É17258445008ëí 1725844500

SLK Operator's Manual É17258445008ËÍ 1725844500

Order no. 6515 3334 13 Part no. 172 584 45 00 Edition A 2015 SLK Operator's Manual Symbols X This symbol indicates an instruction Publication details Registered trademarks: that must be followed. Internet X Several of these symbols in succes- RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of sion indicate an instruction with sev- Bluetooth SIG Inc. Further information about Mercedes-Benz eral steps. vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. (Y This symbol tells you where you can on the following websites: RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks page) find more information about a topic. http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) of DOLBY Laboratories. YY This symbol indicates a warning or an http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are instruction that is continued on the only) registered trademarks of Daimler AG. next page. R ® HomeLink is a registered trademark of Dis‐ This font indicates a display in the Johnson Controls. play multifunction display/COMAND dis- Editorial office RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade- play. © marks of Apple Inc. Parts of the software in the vehicle are pro- Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har- tected by copyright © 2005 or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, man International Industries. The FreeType Project without written permission from Daimler AG. RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg- http://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved. istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora- Vehicle manufacturer tion. R SIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius Daimler AG XM Radio Inc. Mercedesstraße 137 RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq- 70327 Stuttgart uity Digital Corporation. Germany RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i Practical tips or further information that could be helpful to you. As at 24.09.2013 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designation of your vehicle may vary depending on: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry specification Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company

1725844500 É17258445008ËÍ

Contents 3

Index ...... 4 At a glance ...... 29

Introduction ...... 21 Safety ...... 39

Opening and closing ...... 71

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers ...... 107

Climate control ...... 121

Driving and parking ...... 137

On-board computer and displays .... 193

Stowage and features ...... 255

Maintenance and care ...... 277

Breakdown assistance ...... 291

Wheels and tires ...... 309

Technical data ...... 345 4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Setting the blower output of the AIRSCARF vents ...... 135 12 V socket Setting the center air vents ...... 134 see Sockets Setting the side air vents ...... 135 Switching AIRSCARF on/off ...... 100 A Alarm ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 69 Display message ...... 213 Switching off (ATA) ...... 69 Function/notes ...... 61 Switching the function on/off Important safety notes ...... 61 (ATA) ...... 69 Warning lamp ...... 245 Alarm system Accident see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Automatic measures after an acci- Ambient lighting dent ...... 57 Setting the brightness (on-board Activating/deactivating cooling computer) ...... 205 with air dehumidification ...... 127 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 208 Active light function ...... 112 Anti-lock braking system ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 67 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Anti-Theft Alarm system Display message ...... 228 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Function/notes ...... 112 Ashtray ...... 260 Switching on/off ...... 113 Assistance display (on-board com- Additional speedometer ...... 205 puter) ...... 203 Additives (engine oil) ...... 350 Assistance menu (on-board com- Air bags puter) ...... 203 Deployment ...... 54 ASSYST PLUS Display message ...... 224 Displaying a service message ...... 283 Front air bag (driver, front Hiding a service message ...... 282 passenger) ...... 47 Resetting the service interval dis- Head bag ...... 48 play ...... 283 Important safety notes ...... 46 Service message ...... 282 Introduction ...... 46 Special service requirements ...... 283 Knee bag ...... 47 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- Activating/deactivating ...... 69 tor lamp ...... 41 Function ...... 69 Side impact air bag ...... 48 Switching off the alarm ...... 69 Air-conditioning system ATTENTION ASSIST see Climate control Activating/deactivating ...... 203 AIRGUIDE ...... 91 Display message ...... 231 AIRSCARF Function/notes ...... 188 Problem (malfunction) ...... 100 see ATTENTION ASSIST Switching on/off ...... 100 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 200 AIRSCARF vents Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Setting the blower output ...... 135 see Qualified specialist workshop Air vents Authorized workshop Important safety notes ...... 134 see Qualified specialist workshop Setting ...... 134 Index 5

AUTO lights Jump starting ...... 301 Display message ...... 228 Overview ...... 297 see Lights Belt Automatic engine start (ECO start/ see Seat belts stop function) ...... 146 Blind Spot Assist Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Activating/deactivating ...... 204 start/stop function) ...... 144 Display message ...... 232 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 109 Notes/function ...... 189 Automatic transmission Brake Assist Accelerator pedal position ...... 152 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Automatic drive program ...... 154 Brake fluid Changing gear ...... 152 Display message ...... 220 Display message ...... 238 Notes ...... 350 Driving tips ...... 152 Brake force distribution, elec- Emergency running mode ...... 158 tronic Kickdown ...... 153 see EBD (electronic brake force Manual drive program ...... 154 distribution) Manual drive program (vehicles Brake lamps with Sports package AMG) ...... 155 Display message ...... 226 Overview ...... 151 Brakes Problem (malfunction) ...... 158 ABS ...... 61 Program selector button ...... 153 BAS ...... 62 Pulling away ...... 142 BAS PLUS ...... 62 Releasing the parking lock man- Brake fluid (notes) ...... 350 ually ...... 158 Display message ...... 213 Selector lever ...... 151 EBD ...... 67 Starting the engine ...... 142 High-performance brake system .... 168 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 154 Important safety notes ...... 166 Transmission position display ...... 151 Maintenance ...... 167 Transmission positions ...... 152 Parking brake ...... 162 Automatic transmission emer- Riding tips ...... 166 gency mode ...... 158 Warning lamp ...... 245 Breakdown B see Flat tire Backup lamp see Towing away Brightness control (instrument Changing bulbs ...... 117 cluster lighting) ...... 31 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 62 Bulbs BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System see Replacing bulbs PLUS) ...... 62 Battery (SmartKey) C Checking ...... 75 Important safety notes ...... 74 California Replacing ...... 75 Important notice for retail cus- Battery (vehicle) tomers and lessees ...... 23 Charging ...... 299 Calling up a malfunction Display message ...... 229 see Display messages Important safety notes ...... 297 6 Index

Car Child seat see Vehicle Forward-facing restraint system ...... 60 Care On the front-passenger seat ...... 60 Carpets ...... 289 Rearward-facing restraint system .... 60 Car wash ...... 284 Cigarette lighter ...... 260 Display ...... 288 Cleaning Exhaust pipe ...... 287 Mirror turn signal ...... 287 Exterior lights ...... 287 Climate control Gear or selector lever ...... 288 Air-conditioning system ...... 123 Interior ...... 288 Automatic climate control (dual- Matte finish ...... 286 zone) ...... 125 Notes ...... 283 Controlling automatically ...... 129 Paint ...... 285 Cooling with air dehumidification .. 127 Plastic trim ...... 288 Defrosting the windows ...... 131 Power washer ...... 285 Defrosting the windshield ...... 131 Roof lining ...... 289 General notes ...... 122 Seat belt ...... 289 Indicator lamp ...... 129 Seat cover ...... 289 Information about using auto- Sensors ...... 287 matic climate control ...... 126 Steering wheel ...... 288 Maximum cooling ...... 131 Trim pieces ...... 288 Notes on using the air-condition- Washing by hand ...... 284 ing system ...... 124 Wheels ...... 286 Overview of systems ...... 122 Windows ...... 286 Problems with cooling with air Wiper blades ...... 286 dehumidification ...... 129 Wooden trim ...... 288 Problem with the rear window Car key defroster ...... 133 see SmartKey Refrigerant ...... 352 Car wash (care) ...... 284 Refrigerant filling capacity ...... 353 CD player/CD changer (on-board Setting the air distribution ...... 130 computer) ...... 201 Setting the airflow ...... 130 Center console Setting the air vents ...... 134 Lower section ...... 35 Setting the temperature ...... 129 Upper section ...... 34 Switching air-recirculation mode Central locking on/off ...... 133 Automatic locking (on-board com- Switching on/off ...... 127 puter) ...... 207 Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133 Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 72 Switching the rear window Changing bulbs defroster on/off ...... 132 High-beam headlamps ...... 116 Switching the ZONE function on/ Low-beam headlamps ...... 116 off ...... 130 Reversing lamps ...... 117 Cockpit Side marker lamps (rear) ...... 116 Overview ...... 30 Turn signals (front) ...... 116 see Instrument cluster Children Collapsible spare wheel Restraint systems ...... 59 Inflating ...... 342 Special seat belt retractor ...... 58 see Emergency spare wheel Index 7

COMAND display D Cleaning ...... 288 Dashboard Combination switch ...... 110 Compass see Instrument cluster Data Calibrating ...... 274 Calling up ...... 273 see Technical data Daytime running lamps Setting ...... 274 Consumption statistics (on-board Display message ...... 227 computer) ...... 197 Function/notes ...... 109 Convenience closing feature ...... 85 Switching on/off (on-board com- Convenience opening feature puter) ...... 205 Declarations of conformity ...... 25 see Side windows Delayed switch-off Coolant (engine) Exterior lighting (on-board com- Checking the level ...... 281 puter) ...... 206 Display message ...... 228 Interior lighting ...... 206 Filling capacity ...... 351 Diagnostics connection ...... 25 Important safety notes ...... 351 Digital speedometer Temperature (on-board com- ...... 198 puter) ...... 208 Display messages Temperature gauge ...... 194 ASSYST PLUS ...... 282 Warning lamp ...... 251 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 212 Cooling Driving systems ...... 231 see Climate control Engine ...... 228 Copyright ...... 28 General notes ...... 212 Cornering light function Hiding (on-board computer) ...... 212 KEYLESS-GO ...... 242 Display message ...... 225 Lights ...... 225 Function/notes ...... 111 Crash-responsive emergency light- Safety systems ...... 213 SmartKey ...... 242 ing ...... 114 Tires ...... 236 Cruise control Vehicle ...... 238 Cruise control lever ...... 170 Distance recorder Deactivating ...... 171 see Trip odometer Display message ...... 235 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 253 Driving system ...... 169 DISTRONIC PLUS Function/notes ...... 169 Important safety notes ...... 169 Cruise control lever ...... 173 Setting a speed ...... 171 Deactivating ...... 178 Storing and maintaining current Display message ...... 233 speed ...... 170 Displays in the multifunction dis- Cup holder play ...... 177 Driving tips ...... 179 Center console ...... 259 Function/notes ...... 171 Important safety notes ...... 258 Customer Assistance Center Important safety notes ...... 172 Setting the specified minimum (CAC) ...... 26 distance ...... 177 Customer Relations Department ...... 26 Warning lamp ...... 253 8 Index

Doors Driving Assistance package ...... 189 Automatic locking (on-board com- Dynamic handling package ...... 180 puter) ...... 207 HOLD function ...... 181 Automatic locking (switch) ...... 79 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 190 Central locking/unlocking Parking Guidance ...... 185 (SmartKey) ...... 72 PARKTRONIC ...... 182 Control panel ...... 37 Driving tips Display message ...... 240 Automatic transmission ...... 152 Emergency locking ...... 80 Brakes ...... 166 Emergency unlocking ...... 80 Break-in period ...... 138 Important safety notes ...... 78 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 179 Opening (from inside) ...... 78 Downhill gradient ...... 166 Overview ...... 78 Drinking and driving ...... 165 Drinking and driving ...... 165 Driving abroad ...... 108 Drive program Driving in winter ...... 169 Automatic ...... 154 Driving on flooded roads ...... 168 Display ...... 151 Driving on wet roads ...... 168 Manual ...... 154 Exhaust check ...... 165 Manual (vehicles with Sports Fuel ...... 165 package AMG) ...... 155 General ...... 164 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 209 Hydroplaning ...... 168 Driver's door Icy road surfaces ...... 169 see Doors Limited braking efficiency on sal- Driving abroad ted roads ...... 167 Mercedes-Benz Service ...... 283 Snow chains ...... 313 Symmetrical low beam ...... 108 Symmetrical low beam ...... 108 Driving on flooded roads ...... 168 Wet road surface ...... 167 Driving safety systems DVD video ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 61 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 201 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 67 Dynamic handling package BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 62 Function/notes ...... 180 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) ...... 62 E EBD (electronic brake force distri- EASY-ENTRY feature bution) ...... 67 Activating/deactivating ...... 207 ® ESP (Electronic Stability Pro- Function/notes ...... 101 gram) ...... 63 EASY-EXIT feature ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 63 Crash-responsive ...... 102 Important safety information ...... 61 Function/notes ...... 101 Overview ...... 61 Switching on/off ...... 207 PRE-SAFE® Brake ...... 67 EBD (electronic brake force distri- Driving systems bution) ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 188 Display message ...... 215 Blind Spot Assist ...... 189 Function/notes ...... 67 Cruise control ...... 169 ECO display Display message ...... 231 Function/notes ...... 165 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 171 On-board computer ...... 198 Index 9

ECO start/stop function Display message ...... 230 Automatic engine start ...... 146 Filling capacity ...... 350 Automatic engine switch-off ...... 144 Notes about oil grades ...... 349 Deactivating/activating ...... 147 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 279 General information ...... 144 Temperature (on-board com- Important safety notes ...... 143 puter) ...... 208 Introduction ...... 143 Viscosity ...... 350 Electronic Stability Program ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) gram) Emergency AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 209 Automatic measures after an acci- Characteristics ...... 64 dent ...... 57 Deactivating/activating (AMG Emergency release vehicles) ...... 65 Driver's door ...... 80 Deactivating/activating (notes; Trunk ...... 83 except AMG vehicles) ...... 64 Vehicle ...... 80 Display message ...... 213 Emergency spare wheel ETS ...... 63 General notes ...... 341 Function/notes ...... 63 Important safety notes ...... 341 General notes ...... 63 Removing ...... 341 Important safety information ...... 64 Stowing ...... 342 Warning lamp ...... 247 Technical data ...... 344 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ...... 63 Emergency Tensioning Devices Exhaust check ...... 165 Activation ...... 54 Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc- Emissions control tions) ...... 287 Service and warranty information .... 22 Exterior lighting Engine Setting options ...... 108 Check Engine warning lamp ...... 251 see Lights Display message ...... 228 Exterior mirrors ECO start/stop function ...... 143 Adjusting ...... 103 Engine number ...... 347 Dipping (automatic) ...... 104 Irregular running ...... 149 Folding in/out (automatically) ...... 104 Jump-starting ...... 301 Folding in/out (electrically) ...... 104 Starting problems ...... 149 Folding in when locking (on-board Starting the engine with the computer) ...... 208 SmartKey ...... 142 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104 Starting with KEYLESS-GO ...... 142 Storing settings (memory func- Switching off ...... 162 tion) ...... 106 Tow-starting (vehicle) ...... 306 Storing the parking position ...... 105 Engine electronics Eyeglasses compartment ...... 257 Problem (malfunction) ...... 149 Engine oil F Adding ...... 280 Filler cap Additives ...... 350 see Fuel filler flap Checking the oil level ...... 279 Filling capacities (Technical data) ... 347 Checking the oil level using the Flat tire dipstick ...... 279 MOExtended tires ...... 293 10 Index

Preparing the vehicle ...... 292 Opening/closing the garage door .. 273 TIREFIT kit ...... 294 Programming (button in the rear- see Emergency spare wheel view mirror) ...... 271 Floormats ...... 274 Gasoline ...... 348 Fog lamps Gear indicator (on-board com- Switching on/off ...... 109 puter) ...... 208 Front fog lamps Genuine parts ...... 21 Display message ...... 226 Glove box ...... 256 Switching on/off ...... 109 Fuel H Additives ...... 349 Handbrake Consumption statistics ...... 197 Displaying the current consump- see Parking brake Hazard warning lamps tion ...... 198 ...... 111 Displaying the range ...... 198 Display message ...... 242 Driving tips ...... 165 Head bags E10 ...... 348 Display message ...... 222 Fuel gauge ...... 31 Operation ...... 48 Grade (gasoline) ...... 348 Headlamps Important safety notes ...... 348 Cleaning system (notes) ...... 352 Problem (malfunction) ...... 161 Fogging up ...... 113 Refueling ...... 158 see Automatic headlamp mode Tank content/reserve fuel ...... 348 Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ...... 100 Fuel filler flap Head restraints Opening ...... 159 Adjusting ...... 98 Fuel level see NECK-PRO head restraints Calling up the range (on-board Heating computer) ...... 198 see Climate control Fuel tank High-beam headlamps Capacity ...... 348 Changing bulbs ...... 116 Problem (malfunction) ...... 161 Display message ...... 226 Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool Switching on/off ...... 111 kit) ...... 292 Hill start assist ...... 143 Fuses HOLD function Allocation chart ...... 306 Activating ...... 181 Before changing ...... 306 Deactivating ...... 181 Fuse box in the engine compart- Display message ...... 231 ment ...... 307 Function/notes ...... 181 Fuse box in the trunk ...... 307 Hood Important safety notes ...... 306 Closing ...... 279 Display message ...... 240 G Important safety notes ...... 278 Opening ...... 278 Garage door opener Horn ...... 30 Clearing the memory ...... 273 Hydroplaning ...... 168 General notes ...... 270 Important safety notes ...... 270 Index 11

I Knee bag ...... 47

Ignition lock L see Key positions Immobilizer ...... 69 Lamps Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Indicators Activating/deactivating ...... 204 see Turn signals Display message ...... 232 Instrument cluster Function/information ...... 190 Overview ...... 31 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...... 209 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 32 License plate lamp (display mes- Instrument cluster lighting ...... 194 sage) ...... 226 Interior lighting Light function, active Automatic control ...... 113 Display message ...... 227 Delayed switch-off (on-board Lights computer) ...... 206 Activating/deactivating the inte- Emergency lighting ...... 114 rior lighting delayed switch-off ...... 206 Manual control ...... 114 Active light function ...... 112 Overview ...... 113 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 109 Reading lamp ...... 113 Cornering light function ...... 111 Setting the brightness of the Driving abroad ...... 108 ambient lighting (on-board com- Fogged up headlamps ...... 113 puter) ...... 205 Fog lamps ...... 109 Hazard warning lamps ...... 111 J High beam flasher ...... 111 High-beam headlamps ...... 111 Jack Light switch ...... 108 Storage location ...... 292 Low-beam headlamps ...... 109 Using ...... 334 Parking lamps ...... 110 Jump starting (engine) ...... 301 Rear fog lamp ...... 110 Setting the brightness of the K ambient lighting (on-board com- KEYLESS-GO puter) ...... 205 Convenience closing feature ...... 85 Standing lamps ...... 110 Display message ...... 242 Switching the daytime running Locking ...... 73 lamps on/off (on-board com- Removing the Start/Stop button ... 141 puter) ...... 205 Start/Stop button ...... 140 Switching the exterior lighting Starting the engine ...... 142 delayed switch-off on/off (on- Unlocking ...... 73 board computer) ...... 206 Key positions Switching the surround lighting KEYLESS-GO ...... 140 on/off (on-board computer) ...... 206 SmartKey ...... 139 Turn signals ...... 110 Kickdown see Interior lighting Driving tips ...... 153 see Replacing bulbs Light sensor (display message) Manual drive program ...... 157 ...... 228 12 Index

Locking Search & Send ...... 266 see Central locking Self-test ...... 262 Locking (doors) Speed alert ...... 269 Automatic ...... 79 System ...... 262 Emergency locking ...... 80 Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 270 From inside (central locking but- Vehicle remote malfunction diag- ton) ...... 79 nosis ...... 268 Locking centrally Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 267 see Central locking Mechanical key Locking verification signal (on- Function/notes ...... 74 board computer) ...... 207 Locking vehicle ...... 80 Low-beam headlamps Unlocking the driver's door ...... 80 Changing bulbs ...... 116 Media Interface Display message ...... 225 see Separate operating instructions Setting for driving abroad (sym- Memory card (audio) ...... 201 metrical) ...... 108 Memory function ...... 106 Switching on/off ...... 109 Message memory (on-board com- Luggage cover puter) ...... 212 see Trunk partition Messages Lumbar support ...... 99 see Display messages Mirrors M see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror M+S tires ...... 312 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) MAGIC SKY CONTROL ...... 92 Mobile phone Malfunction message Menu (on-board computer) ...... 201 see Display messages Modifying the programming Manual transmission (SmartKey) ...... 73 Engaging reverse gear ...... 150 MOExtended tires ...... 293 Gear lever ...... 150 Mounting wheels Pulling away ...... 142 Lowering the vehicle ...... 336 Shift recommendation ...... 151 Mounting a new wheel ...... 336 Starting the engine ...... 142 Preparing the vehicle ...... 333 Matte finish (cleaning instruc- Raising the vehicle ...... 334 tions) ...... 286 Removing a wheel ...... 335 mbrace Securing the vehicle against roll- Call priority ...... 265 ing away ...... 333 Display message ...... 220 MP3 Downloading destinations see separate operating instructions (COMAND) ...... 266 Multifunction display Downloading routes ...... 269 Function/notes ...... 196 Emergency call ...... 263 Permanent display ...... 205 General notes ...... 261 Multifunction steering wheel Geo fencing ...... 269 Operating the on-board computer..195 Locating a stolen vehicle ...... 268 Overview ...... 33 MB info call button ...... 265 Remote vehicle locking ...... 267 Roadside Assistance button ...... 264 Index 13

N Message memory ...... 212 Navigation menu ...... 199 Navigation Operation ...... 195 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 199 RACETIMER ...... 209 NECK-PRO head restraints Service menu ...... 204 Important safety notes ...... 56 Settings menu ...... 204 Operation ...... 56 Standard display ...... 197 Resetting after being triggered ...... 56 Telephone menu ...... 201 Notes on breaking-in a new vehi- Trip menu ...... 197 cle ...... 138 Vehicle submenu ...... 207 Video DVD operation ...... 201 O Operating safety Occupant Classification System Declaration of conformity ...... 25 (OCS) Important safety notes ...... 24 Conditions ...... 49 Operating system Faults ...... 53 see On-board computer Operation ...... 49 Operator's Manual System self-test ...... 51 Vehicle equipment ...... 22 Occupant safety Outside temperature display ...... 195 Automatic measures after an acci- Overhead control panel ...... 36 dent ...... 57 Children in the vehicle ...... 57 P Important safety notes ...... 41 Paint code number ...... 346 Pets in the vehicle ...... 60 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 285 ® PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu- Panic alarm ...... 40 pant protection) ...... 56 Parking OCS Important safety notes ...... 161 Conditions ...... 49 Parking brake ...... 162 Faults ...... 53 Position of exterior mirror, front- Operation ...... 49 passenger side ...... 105 System self-test ...... 51 see PARKTRONIC Odometer ...... 197 Parking aid Oil Parking Guidance ...... 185 see Engine oil see Exterior mirrors On-board computer see PARKTRONIC AMG menu ...... 208 Parking assistance Assistance menu ...... 203 see PARKTRONIC Audio menu ...... 200 Parking brake Convenience submenu ...... 207 Display message ...... 215 Displaying a service message ...... 283 Electric parking brake ...... 162 Display messages ...... 212 Warning lamp ...... 250 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 177 Parking Guidance Factory settings submenu ...... 208 Display message ...... 233 Important safety notes ...... 194 Important safety notes ...... 185 Instrument cluster submenu ...... 204 Parking lamps Lighting submenu ...... 205 Switching on/off ...... 110 Menu overview ...... 197 14 Index

PARKTRONIC Radio Deactivating/activating ...... 184 Selecting a station ...... 200 Driving system ...... 182 Radio-wave reception/transmis- Function/notes ...... 182 sion in the vehicle Important safety notes ...... 182 Declaration of conformity ...... 25 Problem (malfunction) ...... 185 Reading lamp ...... 113 Range of the sensors ...... 183 Rear fog lamp Warning display ...... 184 Display message ...... 227 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Switching on/off ...... 110 Indicator lamp ...... 41 Rear lamps Problems (malfunction) ...... 224 see Lights Pets in the vehicle ...... 60 Rear-view mirror Pivoting draft stop Anti-glare (manual) ...... 103 see AIRGUIDE Dipping (automatic) ...... 104 Plastic trim (cleaning instruc- Rear window defroster tions) ...... 288 Problem (malfunction) ...... 133 Power washers ...... 285 Switching on/off ...... 132 Power windows Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- see Side windows tem) PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Important safety notes ...... 352 protection) Refueling Display message ...... 220 Fuel gauge ...... 31 Operation ...... 56 Important safety notes ...... 158 PRE-SAFE® Brake Refueling process ...... 159 Activating/deactivating ...... 203 see Fuel Display message ...... 221 Releasing the parking lock man- Function/notes ...... 67 ually (automatic transmission) ...... 158 Warning lamp ...... 253 Remote control Program selector button ...... 153 Programming (garage door Protection against theft opener) ...... 271 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 69 Replacing bulbs Immobilizer ...... 69 Important safety notes ...... 114 Protection of the environment Overview of bulb types ...... 115 General notes ...... 21 Removing/replacing the cover Pulling away (front wheel arch) ...... 115 Automatic transmission ...... 142 Reporting safety defects ...... 26 Manual transmission ...... 142 Reserve (fuel tank) see Fuel Q Reserve fuel Display message ...... 231 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 26 Warning lamp ...... 251 see Fuel R Residual heat (climate control) ...... 133 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 209 Restraint system Radar sensor system Display message ...... 221 Activating/deactivating ...... 207 Introduction ...... 40 Display message ...... 231 Index 15

Warning lamp ...... 250 Warning lamp ...... 244 Warning lamp (function) ...... 41 Warning lamp (function) ...... 45 Reverse gear Seats Engaging (automatic transmis- Adjusting (electrically) ...... 98 sion) ...... 151 Adjusting (manually) ...... 98 Engaging (manual transmission) .... 150 Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup- Reversible floor panel (trunk) ...... 258 port ...... 99 Reversing feature Adjusting the head restraint ...... 98 Side windows ...... 83 Cleaning the cover ...... 289 Trunk lid ...... 81 Correct driver's seat position ...... 96 Reversing lamps (display mes- Important safety notes ...... 97 sage) ...... 227 Overview ...... 97 Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 23 Seat heating problem ...... 99 Roof Storing settings (memory func- Display message ...... 241 tion) ...... 106 Important safety notes ...... 87 Switching AIRSCARF on/off ...... 100 Opening/closing (with roof Switching seat heating on/off ...... 99 switch) ...... 88 Selector lever Opening/closing (with Smart- Cleaning ...... 288 Key) ...... 89 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 287 Overview ...... 87 Service center Problem (malfunction) ...... 94 see Qualified specialist workshop Relocking ...... 89 Service Center Roof carrier ...... 258 see Qualified specialist workshop Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Service menu (on-board com- guidelines) ...... 289 puter) ...... 204 Roof switch ...... 88 Service products Brake fluid ...... 350 S Coolant (engine) ...... 351 Engine oil ...... 349 Safety Fuel ...... 348 Children in the vehicle ...... 57 Important safety notes ...... 347 Child restraint systems ...... 59 Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys- Occupant Classification System tem) ...... 352 (OCS) ...... 49 Washer fluid ...... 352 Safety system Settings see Driving safety systems Factory (on-board computer) ...... 208 Seat belts On-board computer ...... 204 Adjusting the driver's and front- Setting the air distribution ...... 130 passenger seat belt ...... 45 Setting the airflow ...... 130 Cleaning ...... 289 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 209 Correct usage ...... 44 Side impact air bag ...... 48 Fastening ...... 44 Side marker lamp Important safety guidelines ...... 42 Changing bulbs (rear) ...... 116 Introduction ...... 42 Side marker lamp (display mes- Releasing ...... 45 sage) ...... 227 Switching belt adjustment on/off (on-board computer) ...... 208 16 Index

Side windows Standing lamps Cleaning ...... 286 Display message ...... 227 Convenience closing feature ...... 85 Switching on/off ...... 110 Important safety information ...... 83 Start/stop function Opening/closing (all) ...... 84 see ECO start/stop function Opening/closing (front) ...... 84 Starting (engine) ...... 141 Overview ...... 83 Steering (display message) ...... 241 Problem (malfunction) ...... 87 Steering wheel Resetting ...... 86 Adjusting (electrically) ...... 101 SmartKey Adjusting (manually) ...... 101 Changing the battery ...... 75 Button overview ...... 33 Changing the programming ...... 73 Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 195 Checking the battery ...... 75 Cleaning ...... 288 Convenience opening feature ...... 85 Important safety notes ...... 100 Display message ...... 242 Paddle shifters ...... 154 Door central locking/unlocking ...... 72 Storing settings (memory func- Important safety notes ...... 72 tion) ...... 106 Loss ...... 77 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 154 Mechanical key ...... 74 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ...... 209 Opening/closing the roof ...... 89 Stowage areas ...... 256 Overview ...... 72 Stowage compartments Positions (ignition lock) ...... 139 Armrest (under) ...... 257 Problem (malfunction) ...... 77 Center console ...... 257 Starting the engine ...... 142 Cup holders ...... 258 Snow chains ...... 313 Door ...... 257 Sockets Eyeglasses compartment ...... 257 Center console ...... 261 Glove box ...... 256 General notes ...... 261 Important safety information ...... 256 Under the armrest ...... 261 Rear wall ...... 257 Spare wheel Stowage net ...... 258 Stowing ...... 342 Stowage net ...... 258 Specialist workshop ...... 26 Summer tires ...... 312 Special seat belt retractor ...... 58 Sun visor ...... 259 Speed, controlling Surround lighting (on-board com- see Cruise control puter) ...... 206 Speedometer Switching air-recirculation mode Activating/deactivating the addi- on/off ...... 133 tional speedometer ...... 205 Digital ...... 198 T In the Instrument cluster ...... 31 Segments ...... 195 Tachometer ...... 195 Selecting the unit of measure- Tail lamps ment ...... 204 Display message ...... 226 SPORT handling mode see Lights Activating/deactivating (AMG Tank content vehicles) ...... 65 Fuel gauge ...... 31 Warning lamp ...... 248 Index 17

Technical data Important safety notes ...... 318 Capacities ...... 347 Maximum ...... 316 Emergency spare wheel ...... 344 Notes ...... 315 Information ...... 346 Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 295 Tires/wheels ...... 337 Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 296 Vehicle data ...... 353 Recommended ...... 314 TELEAID Tire pressure loss warning sys- Call priority ...... 265 tem Downloading destinations General notes ...... 317 (COMAND) ...... 266 Important safety notes ...... 317 Downloading routes ...... 269 Restarting ...... 318 Emergency call ...... 263 Tire pressure monitor General notes ...... 261 Radio type approval for the tire Geo fencing ...... 269 pressure monitor ...... 321 Locating a stolen vehicle ...... 268 Tire pressure monitoring system MB info call button ...... 265 Checking the tire pressure elec- Remote vehicle locking ...... 267 tronically ...... 320 Roadside Assistance button ...... 264 Function/notes ...... 318 Search & Send ...... 266 General notes ...... 318 Self-test ...... 262 Important safety notes ...... 319 Speed alert ...... 269 Restarting ...... 321 System ...... 262 Warning lamp ...... 254 Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 270 Warning message ...... 320 Vehicle remote malfunction diag- Tires nosis ...... 268 Aspect ratio (definition) ...... 331 Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 267 Average weight of the vehicle Telephone occupants (definition) ...... 330 Accepting a call ...... 202 Bar (definition) ...... 330 Display message ...... 241 Changing a wheel ...... 332 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 201 Characteristics ...... 329 Number from the phone book ...... 202 Checking ...... 311 Redialing ...... 202 Curb weight (definition) ...... 331 Rejecting/ending a call ...... 202 Definition of terms ...... 329 Temperature Direction of rotation ...... 332 Coolant ...... 194 Display message ...... 236 Coolant (on-board computer) ...... 208 Distribution of the vehicle occu- Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 208 pants (definition) ...... 332 Outside temperature ...... 195 DOT, Tire Identification Number Setting (climate control) ...... 129 (TIN) ...... 329 Time DOT (Department of Transporta- see separate operating instructions tion) (definition) ...... 330 Timing (RACETIMER) ...... 209 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) TIREFIT kit ...... 294 (definition) ...... 330 Tire pressure GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def- Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 318 inition) ...... 330 Checking manually ...... 317 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- Display message ...... 236 ing) (definition) ...... 330 Important safety notes ...... 310 18 Index

Increased vehicle weight due to Uniform Tire Quality Grading optional equipment (definition) ...... 330 Standards (definition) ...... 330 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...... 330 Wear indicator (definition) ...... 332 Labeling (overview) ...... 326 Wheel and tire combination ...... 339 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 331 Wheel rim (definition) ...... 330 Load index ...... 328 see Flat tire Load index (definition) ...... 331 Towing M+S tires ...... 312 Important safety guidelines ...... 303 Maximum loaded vehicle weight Installing the towing eye ...... 304 (definition) ...... 330 Removing the towing eye ...... 304 Maximum load on a tire (defini- With the rear axle raised ...... 305 tion) ...... 331 Towing away Maximum permissible tire pres- With both axles on the ground ...... 305 sure (definition) ...... 331 Tow-starting Maximum tire load ...... 328 Emergency engine starting ...... 306 Maximum tire load (definition) ...... 331 Important safety notes ...... 303 MOExtended tires ...... 312 Installing the towing eye ...... 304 Optional equipment weight (defi- Removing the towing eye ...... 304 nition) ...... 331 Transmission Overview ...... 310 Selector lever ...... 151 PSI (pounds per square inch) (def- see Automatic transmission inition) ...... 331 see Manual transmission Replacing ...... 332 Transporting the vehicle ...... 305 Service life ...... 312 Trim pieces (cleaning instruc- Sidewall (definition) ...... 331 tions) ...... 288 Speed rating (definition) ...... 330 Trip computer (on-board com- Storing ...... 332 puter) ...... 197 Structure and characteristics Trip odometer (definition) ...... 329 Calling up ...... 197 Summer tires ...... 312 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 198 Temperature ...... 325 Trunk TIN (Tire Identification Number) Emergency release ...... 82 (definition) ...... 331 Important safety notes ...... 80 Tire bead (definition) ...... 331 Locking separately ...... 82 Tire pressure (definition) ...... 331 Opening/closing (manually from Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 330 outside) ...... 81 Tire size (data) ...... 337 Opening (automatically from out- Tire size designation, load-bearing side) ...... 82 capacity, speed rating ...... 326 Overview ...... 80 Tire tread ...... 311 Trunk lid Tire tread (definition) ...... 331 Display message ...... 240 Total load limit (definition) ...... 332 Opening/closing ...... 80 Traction ...... 325 Opening dimensions ...... 353 Traction (definition) ...... 332 Trunk load (maximum) ...... 353 Tread wear ...... 325 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards ...... 324 Index 19

Trunk partition Vehicle emergency locking ...... 80 Display message ...... 241 Vehicle identification number General notes ...... 89 see VIN Opening/closing ...... 90 Vehicle identification plate ...... 346 Turn signals Vehicle tool kit ...... 292 Changing bulbs (front) ...... 116 Video Display message ...... 225 Operating the DVD ...... 201 Switching on/off ...... 110 VIN ...... 346 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate W

U Warning and indicator lamps ABS ...... 245 Unlocking Brakes ...... 245 Emergency unlocking ...... 80 Check Engine ...... 251 From inside the vehicle (central Coolant ...... 251 unlocking button) ...... 79 Distance warning ...... 253 DISTRONIC PLUS ...... 253 V ESP® ...... 247 ® Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ...... 260 ESP OFF ...... 248 Vehicle Overview ...... 32 Correct use ...... 26 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ...... 41 Data acquisition ...... 27 Reserve fuel ...... 251 Display message ...... 238 Restraint system ...... 250 Equipment ...... 22 Seat belt ...... 244 Individual settings ...... 204 SPORT handling mode ...... 248 Limited Warranty ...... 27 Tire pressure monitor ...... 254 Loading ...... 322 Warranty ...... 22 Locking (in an emergency) ...... 80 Washer fluid Locking (SmartKey) ...... 72 Display message ...... 242 Lowering ...... 336 Wheel and tire combination Maintenance ...... 23 see Tires Parking for a long period ...... 164 Wheel bolt tightening torque ...... 336 Pulling away ...... 142 Wheel chock ...... 333 Raising ...... 334 Wheels Reporting problems ...... 26 Changing a wheel ...... 332 Securing from rolling away ...... 333 Checking ...... 311 Towing away ...... 303 Cleaning ...... 286 Tow-starting ...... 303 Cleaning (warning) ...... 333 Transporting ...... 305 Emergency spare wheel ...... 341 Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 80 Important safety notes ...... 310 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 72 Interchanging/changing ...... 332 Vehicle data ...... 353 Mounting a new wheel ...... 336 Vehicle battery Mounting a wheel ...... 333 see Battery (vehicle) Overview ...... 310 Vehicle data ...... 353 Removing a wheel ...... 335 Vehicle dimensions ...... 353 Storing ...... 332 20 Index

Tightening torque ...... 336 Wheel size/tire size ...... 337 Windows see Side windows Wind screen Inserting and removing ...... 90 Preparing for installation ...... 90 see AIRGUIDE Windshield Defrosting ...... 131 Windshield washer fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ...... 281 Notes ...... 352 Windshield wipers Display message ...... 242 Problem (malfunction) ...... 120 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 118 Switching on/off ...... 117 Winter driving Important safety notes ...... 312 Slippery road surfaces ...... 169 Snow chains ...... 313 Winter operation Overview ...... 312 Winter tires M+S tires ...... 312 Wiper blades Cleaning ...... 286 Important safety notes ...... 118 Replacing ...... 118 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) ...... 288 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop

Z ZONE function Switching on/off ...... 130 Introduction 21

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. General notes Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump- Daimler's declared policy is one of compre- tion. hensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and recom- planet to be used sparingly and in a manner mendations that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to regen- You too can help to protect the environment erate or re-use them. Observe the relevant by operating your vehicle in an environmen- environmental rules and regulations when tally responsible manner. disposing of materials. In this way you will Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, help to protect the environment. transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con- same Limited Warranty entitlements as new sumption. parts. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures ! are correct. Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi- Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. ces, as well as control units and sensors for R these restraint systems, may be installed in remove roof racks once you no longer need the following areas of your vehicle: them. R Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute doors R to environmental protection. You should door pillars therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor sills Ralways have service work carried out at a Rseats qualified specialist workshop. Rcockpit Personal driving style: Rinstrument cluster Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rcenter console starting the engine. Do not install accessories such as audio Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle systems in these areas. Do not carry out is stationary. repairs or welding. You could impair the Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance operating efficiency of the restraint sys- from the vehicle in front. tems. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and Have aftermarket accessories installed at a braking. qualified specialist workshop.

Z 22 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety of The Operator's Manual and Maintenance your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels Booklet are important documents and should as well as accessories relevant to safety be kept in the vehicle. which have not been approved by Mercedes. This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Use Service and vehicle operation only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of Warranty equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been specifically The implied warranty for your vehicle applies approved for your vehicle. in accordance with the warranty terms and Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to conditions in the Service and Warranty Infor- strict quality control. Every part has been spe- mation booklet. cifically developed, manufactured or selected Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles. replace and repair all factory-installed parts in Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should accordance with the following warranty terms therefore be used. and conditions: More than 300,000 different genuine RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Mercedes-Benz parts are available for REmission System Warranty Mercedes-Benz models. REmission Performance Warranty All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main- R tain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu- for necessary service and repair work. In addi- setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode tion, strategically located parts delivery cen- Island and Vermont Emission Control Sys- ters provide quick and reliable parts service. tem Warranty R Always specify the vehicle identification num- State warranty enforcement laws (lemon ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes- laws) Benz parts (Y page 346). Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces- sories warranties. These are available at any Operator's Manual authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle equipment i Should you lose your Service and War- ranty Information booklet, have an author- This Operator's Manual describes all models ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a and all standard and optional equipment of replacement. The new Service and War- your vehicle available at the time of going to ranty Information booklet will be posted to print. Country-specific differences are possi- you. ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not feature all functions described here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The original purchase agreement lists all systems installed in your vehicle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Introduction 23

Information for customers in Califor- Maintenance nia The Service and Warranty Booklet describes Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals. purchase price or lease price, if after a rea- Always have the Service and Warranty Book- sonable number of repair attempts let with you when you bring the vehicle to an Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser- ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or vice advisor will record every service for you more substantial defects or malfunctions in in the Service and Warranty Booklet. the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the Roadside Assistance accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance whichever occurs first, a reasonable number Program offers technical help in the event of a of repair attempts is presumed for a retail breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside buyer or lessee if one or more of the following Assistance Hotline are answered by our occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (1) the same substantial defect or malfunc- (USA) tion results in a condition that is likely to 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc- For additional information, refer to the tion has been subject to repair two or Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro- more times, and you have directly noti- gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis- fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing tance" section in the Service and Warranty of the need for its repair, booklet (Canada). You will find both in your (2) the same substantial defect or malfunc- vehicle literature portfolio. tion of a less serious nature than cate- gory (1) has been subject to repair four or Change of address or change of own- more times and you have directly notified ership us in writing of the need for its repair, or (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of In the event of a change of address, please repair of the same or different substantial send us the "Notification of Address Change" defects or malfunctions for a cumulative in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim- total of more than 30 calendar days. ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- tance Center (USA) at the hotline number Please send your written notice to: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con- One Mercedes Drive tacting you in a timely manner should the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used car, please send us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

Z 24 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply carried out, this can result in malfunctions or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Center (USA) at the hotline number Always have the prescribed service/mainte- 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or nance work as well as any required repairs Customer Service (Canada) at carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 1-800-387-0100. G WARNING Vehicle operation outside the USA If you switch off the ignition while driving, and Canada safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign for example, the power steering and the brake countries, please be aware that: boosting effect. You will require considerably Rservice facilities or replacement parts may more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk not be readily available. of an accident. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic Do not switch off the ignition while driving. converter may not be available. Leaded fuel G may cause damage to the catalytic con- WARNING verter. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower twigs may ignite if they come into contact with octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk engine damage. of fire. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available When driving off road or on unpaved roads, for delivery in Europe through our European check the vehicle's underside regularly. In Delivery Program. For details, consult an particular, remove parts of plants or other authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to flammable materials which have become one of the following addresses. trapped. In the case of damage, contact a In the USA qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC G WARNING European Delivery Department Modifications to electronic components, their One Mercedes Drive software as well as wiring can impair their Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 function and/or the function of other net- In Canada worked components. In particular, systems Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. relevant to safety could also be affected. As a result, these may no longer function as inten- European Delivery Department ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of 98 Vanderhoof Avenue the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 accident and injury. Never tamper with the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. You Operating safety should have all work to electrical and elec- Important safety notes tronic equipment carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or any required repairs Introduction 25

If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- approved by the party responsible for com- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- pliance could void the user’s authority to dered invalid. operate the equipment." ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Industry Canada license-exempt R the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the curb or an unpaved road following two conditions: (1) These devices Ryou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a may not cause interference, and (2) These curb or a hole in the road devices must accept any interference, includ- Ra heavy object strikes the undercarriage ing interference that may cause undesired or parts of the chassis operation of the device." In situations like this, the body, the undercarriage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be damaged without the damage Diagnostics connection being visible. Components damaged in this The diagnostics connection is only intended way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of for the connection of diagnostic equipment at an accident, no longer withstand the strain a qualified specialist workshop. they are designed to. G WARNING If the underbody paneling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, If you connect equipment to the diagnostics grass or twigs can gather between the connection in the vehicle, it may affect the underbody and the underbody paneling. If operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, these materials come in contact with hot the operating safety of the vehicle could be parts of the exhaust system, they can catch affected. There is a risk of an accident. fire. Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos- In such situations, have the vehicle tics connection in the vehicle. checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If on con- G WARNING tinuing your journey you notice that driving Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the safety is impaired, pull over and stop the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. vehicle immediately, paying attention to The operating and road safety of the vehicle is road and traffic conditions. In such cases, jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. visit a qualified specialist workshop. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats Declarations of conformity securely and as specified in order to ensure Vehicle components which receive sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use and/or transmit radio waves loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another. USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper- ! If the engine is switched off and equip- ation is subject to the following two condi- ment on the diagnostics connection is tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm- used, the starter battery may discharge. ful interference, and 2) These devices must Connecting equipment to the diagnostics accept any interference received, including connection can lead to emissions monitoring interference that may cause undesired oper- information being reset, for example. This ation. Changes or modifications not expressly may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the Z 26 Introduction

requirements of the next emissions test dur- again with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con- ing the main inspection. tact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Customer Assistance Center Qualified specialist workshop Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a One Mercedes Drive qualified specialist workshop. It has the nec- Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali- In Canada fications to correctly carry out the work required on your vehicle. This is especially the Customer Relations Department case for work relevant to safety. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book- 98 Vanderhoof Avenue let. Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Reporting safety defects Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work USA only: Rrepair work The following text is published as required of Ralterations, installation work and modifica- manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. tions Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act Rwork on electronic components of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect Correct use which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately If you remove any warning stickers, you or inform the National Highway Traffic Safety others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notify- Leave warning stickers in position. ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Observe the following information when driv- If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may ing your vehicle: open an investigation, and if it finds that a Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it Rthe Technical Data section in this manual may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in Rtraffic rules and regulations individual problems between you, your R laws and safety standards pertaining to dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. motor vehicles To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: If you should experience a problem with your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590. affect its safe operation, we urge you to con- You can also obtain other information about tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from immediately to have the problem diagnosed http://www.safercar.gov and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem Introduction 27

Limited Warranty such as during air bag deployment or when ! hitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designed Follow the instructions in this manual to record data related to vehicle dynamics about the proper operation of your vehicle and safety systems for a short period of time, as well as about possible vehicle damage. typically 30 seconds or less. Damage to your vehicle that arises from The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record culpable contraventions against these such data as: instructions is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the Rhow various systems in your vehicle are New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. operating Rwhether or not the driver and passenger seat belts are fastened Data stored in the vehicle Rhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing the Data recording accelerator and/or brake pedal and Rhow fast the vehicle is traveling This vehicle is capable of recording diagnostic This data can help provide a better under- information relating to vehicle operation, mal- standing of the circumstances in which functions, and user settings. This may include crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is information about the performance or status recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial of various systems, including but not limited crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by to, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys- the EDR under normal driving conditions and tems, that is stored and can be read out with no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, suitable devices, particularly when the vehi- and crash location) are recorded. However, cle is serviced. The data obtained is used to other parties, such as law enforcement, can properly diagnose and service your vehicle or combine the EDR data with the type of per- to further optimize and develop vehicle func- sonal identification data routinely acquired tions. during a crash investigation. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is nee- COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) ded to read data that is recorded by an EDR, and special equipment is required. In addition If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties mbrace, additional data about the vehicle’s that have the special equipment, such as law operation, the use of the vehicle in certain enforcement, can read the information by situations, and the location of the vehicle may accessing the vehicle or the EDR. be compiled through COMAND or the mbrace EDR data may be used in civil and criminal system. matters as a tool in accident reconstruction, For additional information please refer to the accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since the COMAND User Manual and/or the mbrace Crash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to Terms and Conditions. extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia- Event data recorders bility arising from the extraction of this infor- This vehicle is equipped with an event data mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per- recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR sonnel. is to record data that will assist in under- MBUSA will not share EDR data with others standing how a vehicle’s systems performed without the consent of the vehicle owners or, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of

Z 28 Introduction

the lessee. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup- plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module. Tampering with, altering, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the SRS Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-emp- ted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright General information Information on license for free and opensource software used in your vehicle and its electronic components is available on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource 29

Cockpit ...... 30 Instrument cluster ...... 31 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 33 Center console ...... 34 Overhead control panel ...... 36 Door control panel ...... 37 At a glance 30 Cockpit

Cockpit At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Steering wheel paddle E Adjusts the steering wheel shifters 154 manually 100 ; Combination switch 110 F Adjusts the steering wheel electrically 100 = Instrument cluster 31 G Cruise control lever 170 ? Horn H Electric parking brake 162 A PARKTRONIC warning display 182 I Diagnostics connection 25 B Overhead control panel 36 J Opens the hood 278 C Climate control systems 122 K Light switch 108 D Ignition lock 139 Start/Stop button 140 Instrument cluster 31

Instrument cluster Displays and controls At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Speedometer with seg- ? Coolant temperature 194 ments 195 A Multifunction display 196 ; Fuel gage B Instrument cluster lighting 194 = Tachometer 195 32 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps At a glance

Function Page Function Page : L Low-beam head- F 6 Restraint system 40 lamps 109 G ü Seat belt 244 ; T Parking lamps 110 H M SPORT handling = K High-beam head- mode in AMG vehicles 248 lamps 111 I ? Coolant 251 ? ÷ ESP® 247 J R Rear fog lamp 110 A F Electric parking brake K N Front fog lamps 109 (red) 245 L ; Check Engine 251 B ! Electric parking brake (yellow) 245 M 8 Reserve fuel 251 C · Distance warning 253 N å ESP® OFF 247 D #! Turn signals 110 O ! ABS 245 E h Tire pressure monitor 318 P $ Brakes 245 Multifunction steering wheel 33

Multifunction steering wheel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Multifunction display 196 A =; ; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 195 separate operating instruc- 9: tions Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 195 = ? a Switches on the Voice Con- Confirms your selection 195 trol System; see the separate operating instructions Hiding display messages 212 ? ~ B % Rejects or ends a call 201 Back 195 Exits phone book/redial Switches off the Voice Con- memory trol System; see the sepa- 6 rate operating instructions Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute 34 Center console

Center console Center console, upper section At a glance

Function Page Function Page : COMAND; see the separate B £ Hazard warning operating instructions lamps 111 ; c Seat heating 99 C 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG ON/OFF indicator lamp 41 = Ò AIRSCARF 100 D å ESP® 64 ? c PARKTRONIC 182 E à Dynamic handling A è ECO start/stop func- package with sports mode 180 tion 144 Center console 35

Center console, lower section At a glance

Function Page Function Page F Stowage compartment 256 J Roof switch cover 88 Ashtray 260 K COMAND controller; see Cigarette lighter 260 the separate operating Socket 261 instructions G Selector lever 151 L Ú Selects the drive program 153 H Cup holder 258 Ñ Selects the drive pro- I Stowage compartment with gram (AMG vehicles) 153 Media Interface 256 36 Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : p Switches the left- C ï MB Info call button hand reading lamp on/off 113 (mbrace system) 265 ; c Switches the interior D Rear-view mirror 103 lighting on/off 114 E Buttons for the garage door = µ Operates MAGIC SKY opener 273 CONTROL 92 F F Roadside Assistance ? p Switches the right- call button (mbrace sys- hand reading lamp on/off 113 tem) 264 A | Switches the auto- G G SOS button (mbrace matic interior lighting con- system) 263 trol on/off 113 B Eyeglasses compartment 257 Door control panel 37

Door control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 78 B \ Selects the right exterior mirror 103 ; %&Unlocks/locks the vehicle 79 C W Opens/closes the right side window 83 = Adjusts the seats electrically 98 D W Opens/closes the left side window 83 ? r 45= Stores settings for the seat, E 7 Adjusts the exterior exterior mirrors and steer- mirrors 103 ing wheel 106 F Z Selects the left exte- A ö Folds the exterior mir- rior mirror 103 rors in/out 104 38 39

Useful information ...... 40 Panic alarm ...... 40 Occupant safety ...... 40 Children in the vehicle ...... 57 Pets in the vehicle ...... 60 Driving safety systems ...... 61

Protection against theft ...... 69 Safety 40 Occupant safety

Useful information Occupant safety Restraint system: introduction i This Operator's manual describes all models and all standard and optional equip- The restraint system reduces the risk of vehi- ment of your vehicle available at the time of cle occupants coming into contact with parts publication of the Operator's manual. of the vehicle's interior in the event of an Country-specific differences are possible. accident. The restraint system can also Please note that your vehicle may not be reduce the forces to which vehicle occupants Safety equipped with all features described. This are subjected during an accident. also applies to safety-related systems and The restraint system comprises: functions. RSeat belt system i Read the information on qualified special- RAir bags ist workshops (Y page 26). The components of the restraint system work in conjunction with each other. They can only Panic alarm deploy their protective function if, at all times, all vehicle occupants: Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly (Y page 44) Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraint properly (Y page 97). As the driver, you also have to make sure that the steering wheel is adjusted correctly. Observe the information relating to the correct driver's seat position (Y page 96). You also have to make sure that an air bag can inflate properly if deployed (Y page 46). An air bag supplements a correctly worn seat X To activate: press ! button : for at belt. As an additional safety device, the air least one second. bag increases the level of protection for vehi- An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting cle occupants in the event of an accident. For flashes. example, if, in the event of an accident, the X To deactivate: press ! button : protection offered by the seat belt is suffi- again. cient, the air bags are not deployed. When an or accident occurs, only the air bags that X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. increase protection in that particular accident or situation are deployed. However, seat belts and air bags generally do not protect against X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. objects penetrating the vehicle from the out- The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the vehi- side. cle. Information on restraint system operation can be found under "Triggering of the Emer- gency Tensioning Device and air bags" (Y page 54). For more information about children traveling with you in the vehicle and on child restraint Occupant safety 41 systems, see "Children in the vehicle" G WARNING Y ( page 57). If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in Important safety notes the event of an accident with a high rate of G WARNING vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer- gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam- Modifications to the restraint system may ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or cause it to no longer work as intended. The Safety even fatal injury. restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function and may fail in an Have the restraint system checked and accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example. repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as This poses an increased risk of injury or even soon as possible. fatal injury. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator components or their software. lamp If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for further information contact our Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lamp The functions of the restraint system are checked after the ignition is switched on and PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : at regular intervals while the engine is run- and PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec- lamp ; are part of the Occupant Classifica- ted in good time. tion System (OCS). The 6 restraint system warning lamp in The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp the instrument cluster lights up when the igni- informs you about the status of the front- tion is switched on. It goes out no later than a passenger front air bag. few seconds after the engine is started. The If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator components of the restraint system are in lamp: operational readiness. R A malfunction has occurred if the 6 is lit: the front-passenger front air bag is restraint system warning lamp: deactivated. They will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. Rdoes not light up after the ignition is Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger switched on front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an Rdoes not go out after a few seconds with accident, all deployment criteria are met, the engine running the front-passenger front air bag is R lights up again while the engine is running deployed.

Z 42 Occupant safety

The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp The seat belt system comprises: is inoperative. It lights up briefly when the RSeat belts ignition is switched on and then goes out REmergency Tensioning Devices and seat again. belt force limiters Depending on the person in the front- If the seat belt is pulled by the belt loop passenger seat, the front-passenger front air quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt bag must either be disabled or enabled; see retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be the following points. You must make sure of

Safety extracted any further. this both before and during a journey. The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens RChildren in a child restraint system: the seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt whether the front-passenger front air bag is close against the body. However it does not enabled or deactivated depends on the pull the vehicle occupant back in the direction installed child restraint system, and the age of the backrest. and size of the child. Therefore, be sure to The Emergency Tensioning Device does not observe the notes on the "Occupant clas- correct an incorrect seat position or the rout- sification system (OCS)" (Y page 49) and ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt. on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57). There you will also find instructions on When triggered, seat belt force limiters help backwards- and forwards-facing child to reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on restraint systems on the front-passenger the vehicle occupant. seat. The seat belt force limiters are synchronized RAll other persons: depending on the clas- with the front air bags, which absorb part of sification of the person in the front- the deceleration force. This can reduce the passenger seat, the front-passenger front force exerted on the vehicle occupants during air bag is enabled or deactivated an accident. (Y page 49). Be sure to observe the notes ! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, on "Seat belts“ (Y page 42) and "Air bags" do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle (Y page 46). There you can also find infor- of the front-passenger seat. This may oth- mation on the correct seat position. erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer- gency Tensioning Device in the event of an accident, which will then need to be Seat belts replaced. Introduction Important safety notes Seat belts are the most effective means of restricting the movement of vehicle occu- The use of seat belts and child restraint sys- pants in the event of an accident or the vehi- tems is required by law in: cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi- Rall 50 states cle occupants coming into contact with parts Rthe U.S. territories of the vehicle interior or being ejected from Rthe District of Columbia the vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helps Rall Canadian provinces to keep the vehicle occupant in the best position in relation to the air bag. Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle occupants should correctly fasten their seat belts before starting the journey. Occupant safety 43

G WARNING appropriate to the age, weight and size of If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can- the child not protect as intended. Furthermore, an Ralways observe the instructions and safety incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi- notes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec- tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur- tion of this Operator's Manual ing braking or when abruptly changing direc- (Y page 57) in addition to the child tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or restraint system manufacturer's installa- even fatal injury. tion instructions Safety Make sure that all vehicle occupants are Rbe sure to observe the instructions and seated properly with a correctly fastened seat safety notes on the "Occupant classifica- belt. tion system (OCS)" (Y page 49) G WARNING G WARNING The seat belts may not perform their intended The seat belt does not offer the intended level protective function if: of protection if you have not moved the back- R rest to an almost vertical position. When brak- they are damaged, modified, extremely ing or in the event of an accident, you could dirty, bleach or dyed slide underneath the seat belt and sustain Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This extremely dirty poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt injury. anchorages or inertia reels have been modi- Adjust the seat properly before beginning fied your journey. Always ensure that the backrest Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, is in an almost vertical position and that the although the damage may not be visible, e.g. shoulder section of your seat belt is routed due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged across the center of your shoulder. seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices G WARNING could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot when necessary. This poses an increased risk fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi- of injury or even fatal injury. tional suitable restraint system. If the seat Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten- belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas- reels. Make sure that the seat belts are tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow- example, in an accident, during braking or an ing an accident, have the seat belts checked abrupt change of direction. This poses an immediately at a qualified specialist work- increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. shop. For this reason, always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint Only use seat belts that have been approved systems. for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any such modifications could invalidate the vehicle's If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft general operating permit. (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: Ralways secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. The child restraint system must be

Z 44 Occupant safety

Proper use of the seat belts between the vehicle occupant and seat belt. Observe the safety notes on the seat belt R (Y page 42). objects are never secured with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the All vehicle occupants must be wearing the vehicle's occupants. seat belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also make sure that all vehicle occu- Seat belts are only intended to secure and pants are always wearing the seat belt cor- restrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the notes in the "Stowage options/compart- Safety rectly while the vehicle is in motion. ments" section for securing objects, luggage When fastening the seat belt, always make or loads (Y page 256). sure that: Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the Fastening seat belts belt buckle belonging to that seat. Please take note of the safety notes on seat Rthe seat belt is tight across your body. belts (Y page 42) and the notes on their cor- Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter rect use (Y page 44). coat. Rthe seat belt is not twisted. Only then can the forces which occur be distributed over the area of the belt. Rthe shoulder section of the belt is always routed across the center of your shoulder. The shoulder section of the belt must not come into contact with your neck or be routed under your arm. Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down as possible across your lap. The lap belt must always be routed across your hip joints and not across your abdomen. This applies particularly to pregnant women. If necessary, push the lap belt down to your hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder section of the belt. X Adjust the seat (Y page 96). Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, The seat backrest must be in an almost pointed or fragile objects. upright position. X If you have such items located on or in your Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt loop = ; clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, and engage belt tongue into belt : store these in a suitable place. buckle . The driver's and front-passenger's seat Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a belts are automatically pulled taut as time. required, see “Belt adjustment” Infants and children must never travel sit- (Y page 45). ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder event of an accident, they could be crushed section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. Occupant safety 45

In order to attach the child restraint system The belt strap is tightened slightly when: securely in the vehicle, the seat belt on the co- Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle driver's seat is equipped with a child seat and lock. Further information on the "Child seat Rthe ignition is switched on lock" (Y page 58). The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain Releasing seat belts tightening force if any slack is detected between the vehicle occupant and the seat ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly Safety up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue while it is adjusting. will be trapped in the door or in the seat You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on mechanism. This could damage the door, and off in the on-board computer the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam- (Y page 208). aged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be replaced. Belt warning for the driver and front Visit a qualified specialist workshop. passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster is a reminder that all occupants must fasten their seat belts. It may light up continuously or flash. In addition, there may be a warning tone. Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds each time the engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver or front-passenger seat belt has not been fastened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up again. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat belt warning lamp goes out. X Press release button :, hold belt tongue ; and guide it back towards belt If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after loop =. the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after six seconds or when the driver's seat belt is Seat belt adjustment fastened. AMG vehicles: the "seat-belt adjustment" If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph function is not available. (25 km/h) once and the driver's and front- The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of passenger seat belts are not fastened, a the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. This warning tone sounds. The warning tone function adjusts the driver's and front- sounds with increasing intensity for passenger seat belt to the upper body of the 60 seconds or until the driver or front occupants. passenger have fastened their seat belts.

Z 46 Occupant safety

If the driver or front passenger unfasten their RAdjust the seats properly before beginning seat belts during the journey, the seat belt your journey. Always make sure that the warning is activated again. seat is in an almost upright position. The center of the head restraint must support i For more information on the 7 seat the head at about eye level. belt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi- R cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seat Move the driver's and front-passenger belts" (Y page 244). seats as far back as possible. The driver's seat position must allow the vehicle to be Safety driven safely. Air bags ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside. This allows the air bag to be fully Introduction deployed. The installation point of an air bag can be rec- RAlways lean against the backrest while driv- ognized by the AIR BAG symbol. ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against An air bag complements the correctly fas- the door or side window. You may other- tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seat wise be in the deployment area of the air belt. The air bag provides additional protec- bags. tion in applicable accident situations. RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. front of the seat. Do not put your feet on the The different air bag systems function inde- dashboard, for example. Your feet may oth- pendently from one another (Y page 54). erwise be in the deployment area of the air bag. However, no system available today can com- R pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities. For this reason, always secure persons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury systems. Up to this height, the seat belt caused by an air bag due to the high speed at cannot be worn correctly. which the air bag must be deployed. If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also Important safety notes observe the following notes: RAlways secure children under 12 years of G WARNING age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) in height in If you do not sit in the correct seat position, suitable child restraint systems. the air bag cannot protect as intended and ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing could even cause additional injury when child restraint system on the front- deployed. This poses an increased risk of passenger seat when the front-passenger injury or even fatal injury. front air bag is deactivated. If the To avoid hazardous situations, always make PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is sure that all of the vehicle's occupants: permanently lit, the front-passenger front Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly, air bag is deactivated (Y page 41). including pregnant women RAlways observe the instructions and safety Rare sitting correctly and maintain the great- notes on the "Occupant Classification Sys- est possible distance to the air bags tem (OCS)" (Y page 49) and on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 57) in addition to Rfollow the following instructions the child restraint system manufacturer's Always make sure that there are no objects installation instructions. between the air bag and the vehicle's occupants. Occupant safety 47

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre- Front air bags vent the air bag from functioning correctly. Before starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make sure that: Rthere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air bag. Safety Rthere are no objects between the seat, door and B-pillar. Rno accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors or side Driver's air bag : inflates in front of the windows. steering wheel; front-passenger air bag ; inflates in front of and above the glove box. Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of your clothing. Store When deployed, the front air bags offer addi- such objects in a suitable place. tional head and thorax protection on the front seats. G WARNING The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects shows you the status of the front-passenger such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer front air bag (Y page 41). function correctly. There is an increased risk Front-passenger air bag ; is only deployed of injury. if: Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects Rthe Occupant Classification System (OCS) to it. recognizes that the front-passenger seat is Y G WARNING occupied ( page 49) Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Sensors to control the air bags are located in lamp is not lit (Y page 49) the doors. Modifications or work not per- R formed correctly to the doors or door panel- the restraint system control unit predicts a ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the high accident severity function of the sensors being impaired. The air bags might therefore not function properly Knee bags any more. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door paneling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column and front-passenger knee bag ;

Z 48 Occupant safety

under the glove box. The driver's and front- The side impact air bag on the front- passenger knee bags are triggered together passenger side deploys under the following with the front air bags. conditions: The driver's and front-passenger knee bags Rthe OCS system detects that the front- offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro- passenger seat is occupied or tection. Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle of the front-passenger seat Side impact air bags Safety If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt G WARNING buckle, the side impact air bag on the front- Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci- prevent the deployment of the air bags inte- dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy- grated into the seats. Consequently, the air ment is independent of whether the front- bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as passenger seat is occupied or not. they are designed to do. In addition, the function of the Occupant Classification System Head bags (OCS) could be restricted. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the respective seat by Mercedes-Benz.

Head bags : deploy in the area of the side windows at the front. When deployed, the headbag enhances the level of protection for the head. However, it does not protect your: R Side impact air bags : deploy next to the chest outer bolster of the seat backrest. Rarms When deployed, the side impact air bag offers In the event of a side impact, the headbag is additional thorax protection. However, it does deployed on the side on which the impact not protect the: occurs. Rhead If the system determines that they can offer additional protection to that provided by the Rneck seat belt, a headbag may be deployed in other R arms accident situations (Y page 54). In the event of a side impact, the side impact air bag is deployed on the side on which the impact occurs. Occupant safety 49

The headbag on the front-passenger side If you install a child restraint system on the does not deploy under the following condi- front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the tions: correct positioning of the child restraint sys- ROCS has detected that the front-passenger tem. Never place objects under or behind the seat is unoccupied. child restraint system, e.g. cushions. The entire base of the child restraint system must Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas- always rest on the seat cushion of the front- tened. passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards- If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt facing child restraint system must, as far as Safety buckle, the headbag on the front-passenger possible, be resting on the backrest of the side deploys if an appropriate accident situa- front-passenger seat. tion occurs. In this case, it will deploy regard- The child restraint system must not touch the less of whether the front-passenger seat is roof or be put under strain by the head occupied or not. restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head restraint position accord- Occupant Classification System ingly. (OCS) Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function correctly. Always observe the child restraint Introduction system manufacturer's installation instructions. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) categorizes the person in the front-passenger Occupant Classification System opera- seat. Depending on that result, the front- tion (OCS) passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are either enabled or deactivated. The system does not deactivate: Rthe side impact air bag Rthe front-passenger head bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

Prerequisites To be classified correctly, the front passenger must sit: Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly : PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rin an almost upright position with their ; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp back against the seat backrest PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : Rwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi- informs you whether the front-passenger ble front air bag is deactivated. If the front passenger does not observe these X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the conditions, OCS may produce a false classi- ignition lock, or press the Start/Stop but- fication, e.g. because the front passenger: ton once or twice on vehicles with KEY- Rtransfers their weight by supporting them- LESS-GO. selves on a vehicle armrest The system carries out a self-diagnosis. Rsits in such a way that their weight is raised The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp from the seat cushion is inoperative. It lights up briefly when the

Z 50 Occupant safety

ignition is switched on and then goes out bled in accordance with the person in the again. front-passenger seat The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved must light up for approximately six seconds. back as far back as possible. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp Rthe person is seated correctly. then displays the status of the front- Make sure, both before and during the jour- passenger front air bag. If the status of the ney, that the status of the front-passenger front-passenger front air bag changes while Safety front air bag is correct. the vehicle is in motion, an air bag display message may appear in the instrument clus- G WARNING ter (Y page 224). When the front-passenger If you secure a child in a child restraint system seat is occupied, always pay attention to the on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Be PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is aware of the status of the front-passenger off, the front-passenger front air bag can front air bag both before and during the jour- deploy in the event of an accident. The child ney. could be struck by the air bag. This poses an If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. lamp: Make sure that the front-passenger front air Ris lit, the front-passenger front air bag is bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR deactivated. They will then not be deployed BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. in the event of an accident. Rdoes not light up: the front-passenger G WARNING front air bag is enabled. If, in the event of an If you secure a child in a forward-facing child accident, all deployment criteria are met, restraint system on the front-passenger seat the front-passenger front air bag is and you position the front-passenger seat too deployed. close to the dashboard, in the event of an G WARNING accident, the child could: R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator come into contact with the vehicle's inte- lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi- disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of cator lamp is lit, for example an accident and cannot perform its intended Rbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER protective function. A person in the front- AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off passenger seat could then, for example, come This poses an increased risk of injury or even into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe- fatal injury. cially if the person is sitting too close to the Move the front-passenger seat as far back as dashboard. This poses an increased risk of possible. Always make sure that the shoulder injury or even fatal injury. belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle When the front-passenger seat is occupied, belt loop to the shoulder belt guide on the always ensure that: child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap Rthe classification of the person in the front- must be routed forwards and downwards passenger seat is correct and the front- from the vehicle belt loop. Always observe the passenger front air bag is enabled or disa- child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Occupant safety 51

If OCS determines that: If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the to observe the notes on "Children in the vehi- Y PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp cle" ( page 57). lights up after the system self-test and When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6 remains lit. This indicates that the front- restraint system warning lamp in the instru- passenger front air bag is deactivated. ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a OFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-

child of up to 12 months old, in a standard Safety child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR ted in this case and does not deploy during an BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up after the accident. Have the system checked by quali- system self-test and remains lit. This indi- fied technicians as soon as possible. Consult cates that the front-passenger front air bag an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The is deactivated. front-passenger seat should only be repaired at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. But in the case of a 12-month-old child, in a standard child restraint system, the If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp the seat cushion is damaged, have the nec- can go out after the system self-test. This essary repair work carried out at an author- indicates that the front-passenger front air ized Mercedes-Benz Center. bag is activated. The result of the classifi- For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- cation is dependent on, among other fac- mends that you only use seat accessories tors, the child restraint system and the that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. child's stature. Make sure that the condi- If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not tions for a correct classification are met. If mean that the front-passenger front air bag the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator will also deploy. The Occupant Classification lamp remains off, do not install a child System (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the restraint system on the front-passenger front-passenger seat. Depending on that seat. result, the front-passenger front air bag is Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by a either enabled or deactivated. person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG System self-test OFF indicator lamp lights up and remains lit G DANGER after the system self-test depending on the result of the classification or, alternatively, If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator goes out. lamp does not light up during the system self- test, then the system is malfunctioning. The - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, move the front-passenger front-passenger front air bag might be trig- seat as far back as possible. gered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with - if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator high deceleration. This poses an increased lamp is lit, a person of smaller stature risk of injury or even fatal injury. should not use the front-passenger seat. R In this case the front-passenger seat may not the front-passenger seat is occupied by an be used. Do not install a child restraint system adult or a person of a stature correspond- on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu- ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR pant Classification System (OCS) checked BAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after the and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- system self-test. This indicates that the cialist workshop. front-passenger front air bag is activated.

Z 52 Occupant safety

G DANGER facing child restraint system must, as far as If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator possible, be resting on the backrest of the lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the front-passenger seat. Always comply with the front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will child restraint system manufacturer's instal- not be deployed in the event of an accident. In lation instructions. this case, the front-passenger front air bag cannot perform its intended protective func- After the system self-test, the PASSENGER tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front- AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the sta- Safety passenger seat. tus of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 49). That person could, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially For more information about the OCS, see if the person is sitting too close to the dash- "Problems with the Occupant Classification Y board. This poses an increased risk of injury or System" ( page 53). even fatal injury. When the front-passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: Rthe classification of the person in the front- passenger seat is correct and the front- passenger front air bag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front-passenger seat Rthe person is seated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt Rthe front-passenger seat has been moved back as far back as possible If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit when it should not, the front- passenger seat may not be used. Do not install a child restraint system on the front- passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi- cation System (OCS) checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect OCS operation. This could result in the front-passenger air bag not functioning as intended during an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front- passenger seat. The backrest of the forwards- Occupant safety 53

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51). Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The PASSENGER AIR The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is BAG OFF indicator incorrect. lamp lights up and X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per- remains lit, even son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 49). Safety though the front- X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the passenger seat is occu- front-passenger seat may not be used. pied by an adult or a X person of a stature cor- Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized responding to that of an Mercedes-Benz Center. adult. The PASSENGER AIR OCS is malfunctioning. BAG OFF indicator X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the lamp does not light up child seat. and/or does not stay X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on. on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of The front-passenger the forwards-facing child restraint system must, as far as pos- seat is: sible, be resting on the backrest of front-passenger seat. If nec- Runoccupied essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat. Roccupied by the X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the weight of a child up seat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight with the front- to 12 months old in a passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and child restraint sys- the child restraint system being pulled too tightly. tem X Check the installation of the child restraint system. Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accordingly. X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the seat. X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z 54 Occupant safety

Deployment of Emergency Tensioning released. The 6 restraint system warning Devices and air bags lamp will light up. Only in rare cases will the bang affect your Important safety notes hearing. The powder released is generally not G WARNING hazardous to health, it could however cause short-term breathing difficulties in people The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has with asthma or other respiratory problems. In been deployed. There is a risk of injury. order to prevent breathing difficulties, you Safety Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a should leave the vehicle as soon as it is safe to deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe- do so, or open the window. cialist workshop as soon as possible. Air bags and pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners G WARNING contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro- protection measures. Check with your local tection and cannot provide the intended pro- government’s disposal guidelines. California tection in an accident. There is an increased residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/ risk of injury. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/ Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special- index.cfm. ist workshop in order to have a deployed air bag replaced. Method of operation It is important for your safety and that of your During the first stage of a collision, the passenger to have deployed air bags replaced restraint system control unit evaluates impor- and to have any malfunctioning air bags tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler- repaired. This will help to make sure the air ation or acceleration, such as: bags continue to perform their protective RDuration function for the vehicle occupants in the RDirection event of a crash. RIntensity G WARNING Based on the evaluation of this data, the Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices restraint system control unit triggers the belt that have been deployed are no longer opera- tensioners in the event of a frontal or rear tional and are unable to perform their inten- collision. ded protective function. This poses an If the restraint system control unit detects a increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. high accident severity, additional compo- Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten- nents of the restraint system are activated sioning Devices which have been triggered independently of one another in certain fron- immediately replaced at a qualified specialist tal collision situations: workshop. RFront air bags as well as driver's and front- An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® to passenger kneebag trigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz- Depending on the person occupying the front- ardous situations. This procedure is reversi- passenger seat, the front-passenger air bag is ble. activated or deactivated. The front-passenger If the Emergency Tensioning Devices or air front air bag can only be deployed in an acci- bags are deployed, you will hear a bang and a dent if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica- small amount of powder may also be tor lamp is off. Observe the information on the Occupant safety 55

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp If the restraint system control unit detects a (Y page 41). side impact or an overturn situation, the rel- Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. evant restraint system components are acti- During the first deployment stage, the front vated independently of one another depend- air bag fills with propellant gas which reduces ing on the apparent type of accident. If addi- the risk of injury. The second stage is then tional protection for the vehicle occupants is triggered within milliseconds, filling the front determined in this situation, the belt tension- air bag with the maximum amount of propel- ers are also triggered. Safety lant gas. RSidebag on the side on which the impact The deployment thresholds for the Emer- occurs, independently of the belt tensioner gency Tensioning Devices and air bags are and of the use of the seat belt on the driv- calculated on the basis of the vehicle deceler's seat eration or acceleration occurring at various The sidebag on the front-passenger side points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp- deploys under the following conditions: tive in nature. The air bag must be deployed - the OCS system detects that the front- on time, at the start of the collision. passenger seat is occupied or The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera- - the belt tongue has engaged in the belt tion and the direction of the force are essen- buckle of the front-passenger seat. tially determined by: RHeadbag on the side on which the impact Rdistribution of the force during the impact occurs, independently of the use of the seat Rcollision angle belt and independently of whether the Rdeformation characteristics of the vehicle front-passenger seat is occupied Rcharacteristics of the object with which the RHeadbags on the driver's and front- vehicle has collided passenger sides in certain overturn situa- Factors which can only be seen and measured tions if the system determines that they after the collision has occurred do not play a can offer additional protection to that pro- decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, vided by the seat belt nor do they provide an indication of air bag i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci- deployment. dent. The various air bag systems work The vehicle may be considerably deformed independently of each other. without an air bag being deployed. This is the How the air bag system works is deter- case if only relatively easily deformable parts mined by the severity of the accident detec- have been hit and a high rate of deceleration ted, especially the vehicle deceleration or has not been reached. Conversely, an air bag acceleration, and the apparent type of acci- may be deployed even though the vehicle suf- dent: fers only minor deformation. This is the case Rfrontal collision if, for example, very rigid vehicle parts such as R the longitudinal body members are hit in an side impact accident and the rate of deceleration is suffi- Rrollover cient.

Z 56 Occupant safety

NECK-PRO head restraints Resetting triggered NECK-PRO head restraints Important safety notes

G WARNING The function of the head restraint may be impaired if you: Rattach objects such as coat hangers to the Safety head restraints, for example Ruse head restraint covers If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill their intended protective function in the event of an accident. In addition, objects attached to the head restraints could endanger other Do not insert your finger between the uphols- vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk tery of the head restraint and the seat. Pay of injury. particular attention while resetting the NECK- Do not attach any objects to the head PRO head restraints. restraints and do not use head restraint cov- X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint ers. cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :. Method of operation X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion down as far as it will go in the direction of NECK-PRO head restraints reduce the likeli- arrow ;. hood of head and chest injuries. The NECK- PRO head restraints on the driver's and front- X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint passenger seats are moved forwards and cushion back in the direction of arrow = upwards in the event of a rear-end collision of until the cushion engages. a certain severity. This provides better head X Repeat this procedure for the second support. NECK-PRO head restraint. If the NECK-PRO head restraints have been i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints triggered in an accident, you must reset the requires a lot of strength. If you have diffi- NECK-PRO head restraints on the driver’s and culty resetting the NECK-PRO head Y front-passenger seat ( page 56). Other- restraints, have this work carried out at a wise, the additional protection will not be qualified specialist workshop. available in the event of another rear-end collision. You can recognize when NECK-PRO head restraints have been triggered by the PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant fact that they have moved forwards and can protection system) no longer be adjusted. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have Introduction

the NECK-PRO head restraints checked for ® functionality at a qualified specialist work- PRE-SAFE is only available in vehicles with shop after a rear-end collision. the Driving Assistance package. AMG vehicles: PRE-SAFE® is not available. In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE® takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. Children in the vehicle 57

Important safety notes The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Infor- ! Make sure that there are no objects in the mation about the convenience function can footwell or behind the seats. There is a dan- be found under "Belt adjustment" ger that the seats and/or objects could be (Y page 45). damaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated. Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE- SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event of Automatic measures after an acci- an accident cannot be ruled out. Always dent Safety adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing Immediately after an accident, the following road and weather conditions and maintain a measures are implemented, depending on safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive the type and severity of the impact: carefully. Rby activating the hazard warning lamps Function Rthe emergency lighting is activated Rthe vehicle doors are unlocked PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Rthe front side windows are lowered Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. when Rin vehicles with a memory function: the BAS is activated electrically adjustable steering wheel is R in critical driving situations, e.g. when phys- raised ical limits are exceeded and the vehicle Rthe engine is switched off understeers or oversteers severely Rvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer- Ron vehicles with the Driving Assistance gency call package: if BAS PLUS intervenes power- fully or the radar sensor system detects an imminent danger of collision in certain sit- Children in the vehicle uations PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures Important safety notes depending on the hazardous situation detec- If a child younger than 12 years and under 5 ft ted: (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle: R the seat belts are pre-tensioned. Ralways secure the child in a child restraint Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows are system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi- closed so that only a small gap remains. cles. The child restraint system must be Rvehicles with the memory function: the appropriate to the age, weight and size of front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an the child unfavorable position. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and If the hazardous situation passes without safety notes in this section in addition to resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens the child restraint system manufacturer's the belt pre-tensioning. All settings made by installation instructions PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. Rbe sure to observe the instructions and If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced: safety notes on the "Occupant classification system (OCS)" (Y page 49) X Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly when the vehicle is stationary. The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and the locking mechanism is released.

Z 58 Children in the vehicle

G WARNING A booster seat may be necessary to achieve If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- proper seat belt positioning for children over cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: 41 lbs (18 kg) or until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt can be fastened R release the parking brake. properly without a booster seat. Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral. Special seat belt retractor

Safety R start the engine. G WARNING In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- If the seat belt is released while driving, the ment and become trapped. There is a risk of child restraint system will no longer be an accident and injury. secured properly. The special seat belt retrac- When leaving the vehicle, always take the tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. be immediately refastened. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. G WARNING Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten- If persons, particularly children are subjected tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or the special seat belt retractor and secure the cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even child restraint system properly. fatal. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a special seat belt retractor. G WARNING When activated, the special seat belt retrac- If the child restraint system is subjected to tor ensures that the seat belt cannot slacken direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil- once the child seat is secured. dren may burn themselves on these parts, Installing a child restraint system: particularly on the metal parts of the child X restraint system. There is a risk of injury. Make sure you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instruc- If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with tions. you, always ensure that the child restraint X system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro- Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the belt tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child loop. restraint system has been exposed to direct X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle. sunlight, let it cool down before securing the Activating the special seat belt retractor: child in it. Never leave children unattended in X the vehicle. Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have While the seat belt is retracting, you should their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit- hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat ting properly. Particular attention must be belt retractor is enabled. paid to children. X Push the child restraint system down so Observe the safety notes on the seat belt that the seat belt is tight and does not (Y page 42) and the notes on correct use of loosen. seat belts (Y page 44). Children in the vehicle 59

Removing a child restraint system/deactivat- sudden change in direction. The child ing the special seat belt retractor: restraint system could be thrown about, strik- X Make sure you observe the child restraint ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased system manufacturer's installation instruc- risk of injury, possibly even fatal. tions. Always install child restraint systems prop- X Press the belt buckle release button, hold erly, even if they are not being used. Make the belt tongue and guide it back towards sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

the belt loop. Safety The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Further information on stowing objects, luggage and loads securely can be found under “Stowing options/stowage compartments” Y Child restraint system ( page 256). G WARNING The use of seat belts and child restraint systems is required by law in: Child restraint systems or their securing systems which have been damaged or subjected R all 50 states to a load in an accident can no longer protect Rthe U.S. territories as intended. The child cannot then be Rthe District of Columbia restrained in the event of an accident, heavy Rall Canadian provinces braking or sudden changes of direction. There You can obtain further information about the is an increased risk of injury, possibly even correct child restraint system from any fatal. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Replace child restraint systems which have been damaged or subjected to a load in an G WARNING accident as soon as possible. Have the secur- If the child restraint system is installed incor- ing systems on the child restraint system rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as checked at a qualified specialist workshop, intended. The child cannot then be restrained before you install a child restraint system in the event of an accident, heavy braking or again. sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. If a child is carried on the front-passenger Make sure that you observe the child restraint seat, be sure to observe the information on system manufacturer's installation instruc- the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" tions and the notes on use. Please ensure, (Y page 49). There you will also find informa- that the base of the child restraint system is tion on deactivating the front-passenger front always resting completely on the seat cush- air bag. ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under All child restraint systems must meet the fol- or behind the child restraint system. Only use lowing standards: child restraint systems with the original cover RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand- designed for them. Only replace damaged ards 213 and 225 covers with genuine covers. RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 G WARNING Confirmation that the child restraint system If the child restraint system is installed incor- corresponds to the standards can be found rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in on an instruction label on the child restraint the event of an accident, heavy braking or a system. This confirmation can also be found

Z 60 Pets in the vehicle

in the installation instructions that are inclu- backrest of the child restraint system must, ded with the child restraint system. as far as possible, lie flat against the backrest Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte- of the front-passenger seat. The child rior and on the child restraint system. restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest and the head Child restraint system on the front- restraint position accordingly. Always make passenger seat sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly Safety routed from the front-passenger seat belt General notes loop to the shoulder belt guide on the child If you secure a child in a child restraint system restraint system. The shoulder belt strap on the front-passenger seat, be sure to must be routed forwards and downwards observe the instructions and safety notes on from the front-passenger seat belt loop. the "Occupant Classification System (OCS)" Always observe the child restraint system (Y page 49). manufacturer's installation and operating You can thus avoid the risks that could arise instructions. as a result of: Ran incorrectly categorized person in the Pets in the vehicle front-passenger seat Rthe unintentional deactivation of the front- G WARNING passenger front air bag If you leave animals unattended or unsecured R the unsuitable positioning of the child in the vehicle, they could press buttons or restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash- switches, for example. board As a result, they could: Rearward-facing child restraint system Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example If it is absolutely necessary to install a rear- Ractivate or deactivate systems, thereby ward-facing child restraint system on the endangering other road users front-passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front air bag is deactiva- Unsecured animals could also be flung around ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud- indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 41) den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi- is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva- cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident ted. and injury. Always observe the child restraint system Never leave animals unattended in the vehi- manufacturer's installation and operating cle. Always secure animals properly during instructions. the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal transport box. Forward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The Driving safety systems 61

Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Overview of driving safety systems General information In this section, you will find information about ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way the following driving safety systems: that the wheels do not lock when you brake. RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) This allows you to continue steering the vehi- (Y page 61) cle when braking. ! RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 62) The yellow ABS warning lamp in the Safety instrument cluster lights up when the ignition R B A S BAS PLUS ( rake ssist ystem Plus) is switched on. It goes out when the engine is Y ( page 62) running. RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 63) Important safety notes REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- (Y page 67) tion (Y page 61). RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 67) G WARNING RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67) If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking charac- Important safety notes teristics may be severely impaired. Addition- ally, further driving safety systems are deac- If you fail to adapt your driving style or tivated. There is an increased danger of skid- become distracted, the driving safety sys- ding and accidents. tems can neither reduce the risk of accident Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme- nor override the laws of physics. Driving diately at a qualified specialist workshop. safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the dis- When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed including driving safety systems, will also and for braking in good time. Always adapt become inoperative. Observe the information your driving style to suit the prevailing road on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 245) and and weather conditions and maintain a safe display messages which may be shown in the distance from the vehicle in front. Drive care- instrument cluster (Y page 213). fully. ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph i The driving safety systems described only (8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi- work as effectively as possible when there tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if is adequate contact between the tires and you only brake gently. the road surface. Please pay special attention to the notes on tires, recommended Braking minimum tire tread depths, etc. X If ABS intervenes: (Y page 310). continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit- In wintry driving conditions, always use uation is over. winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, X To make a full brake application: snow chains. Only in this way will the driving safety systems described in this section depress the brake pedal with full force. work as effectively as possible. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal.

Z 62 Driving safety systems

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica- With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS tion of hazardous road conditions, and func- PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the tions as a reminder to take extra care while path of your vehicle for an extended period of driving. time. If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake BAS (Brake Assist System) system is still available with complete brake boosting effect and BAS.

Safety General information BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of BAS operates in emergency braking situa- a collision with a vehicle or reduce the effects tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, of such a collision. If BAS PLUS detects a BAS automatically boosts the braking force, danger of collision, you are assisted when thus shortening the stopping distance. braking.

Important safety notes Important safety notes i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- G WARNING tion (Y page 61). BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify G WARNING objects and complex traffic situations. If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance In such cases, BAS PLUS may: in an emergency braking situation is Rintervene unnecessarily increased. There is a risk of an accident. Rnot intervene In an emergency braking situation, depress There is a risk of an accident. the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation. Braking X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until G WARNING the emergency braking situation is over. BAS PLUS does not react: ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Rto people or animals The brakes will function as usual once you Rto oncoming vehicles release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all PLUS) critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. General information Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- uation and be ready to brake. tion (Y page 61). In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles equip- ognition can be impaired. ped with DISTRONIC PLUS. For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensor system must be operational. Driving safety systems 63

Recognition by the radar sensor system is tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa- also impaired in the event of: ted simultaneously. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else cover- X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the ing the sensors emergency braking situation is over. Rthere is interference by other radar sources ABS prevents the wheels from locking. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func- example in parking garages tion as usual again, if:

R Safety a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a Ryou release the brake pedal. motorbike Rthere is no longer a risk of collision. Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rno obstacle is detected in front of your relative to the center of your vehicle vehicle. Following damage to the front end of the vehi- Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. cle, have the configuration and operation of R the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- you activate kickdown. cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- sions at low speeds where there is no visible ® damage to the front of the vehicle. ESP (Electronic Stability Program) General notes Function i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the tion (Y page 61). brake force necessary if: ® R ESP monitors driving stability and traction, you approach an obstacle, and i.e. power transmission between the tires and RBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision the road surface. When driving at a speed under 20 mph If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, from the direction desired by the driver, one BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brake or more wheels are braked to stabilize the pressure will be carried out at the last possi- vehicle. The engine output is also modified to ble moment. keep the vehicle on the desired course within When driving at a speed above 20 mph physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when (30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic situation. ETS (Electronic Traction System) BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz- i ardous situations with vehicles in front within Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Y a speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and tion ( page 61). 155 mph (250 km/h). ETS traction control is part of ESP®. At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react to sta- they spin. This enables you to pull away and tionary objects. Examples of stationary accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example objects are stopped or parked vehicles. if the road surface is slippery on one side. In i If BAS PLUS demands particularly high addition, more drive torque is transferred to braking force, preventative passenger pro- the wheel or wheels with traction.

Z 64 Driving safety systems

ETS remains active when you deactivate Characteristics of ESP® ESP®. General information i AMG vehicles: your vehicle may be If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before equipped with 20-inch tires on the rear beginning the journey, ESP® is automatically axle. If replaced with a 19-inch tire, ETS active. may intervene noticeably sooner for the first few kilometers. After approximately If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. Safety 10 km ETS will function as usual again. Information on the dimensions and types of If ESP® intervenes: wheels and tires for your vehicle can be X ® found in the "Wheel/tire combinations" Do not deactivate ESP under any circum- section (Y page 337). stances. X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as Important safety notes necessary when pulling away. X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail- G WARNING ing road and weather conditions. If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv- ECO start/stop function ing safety systems are deactivated. This The ECO start/stop function switches the increases the risk of skidding and an accident. engine off automatically when the vehicle Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a stops moving. The engine starts automati- qualified specialist workshop. cally when the driver wants to pull away again. ESP® remains in its previously selected sta- ! When testing the electric parking brake tus. Example: if ESP® was deactivated before on a braking dynamometer, switch off the the engine was switched off, ESP® remains ignition. Application of the brakes by ESP® deactivated when the engine is switched on may otherwise destroy the brake system. again. When towing the vehicle with the rear axle ® raised, observe the notes on Deactivating/activating ESP (except ESP®(Y page 305). AMG vehicles) ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp Important safety notes in the instrument cluster lights up continu- i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- ously when the engine is running. tion (Y page 61). If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not You can select between the following states ® available due to a malfunction. of ESP : Observe the information on warning lamps RESP® is activated. (Y page 247) and display messages which RESP® is deactivated. may be shown in the instrument cluster G (Y page 213). WARNING If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- i Only use wheels with the recommended bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function of skidding and an accident. properly. Only deactivate ESP® in the situations described in the following. Driving safety systems 65

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol- The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- lowing situations: ting action for better traction on loose surfaces. Rwhen using snow chains Rtraction control is still activated. Rin deep snow R ® Ron sand or gravel ESP still provides support when you brake. i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP® will ® Deactivating/activating ESP (AMG Safety otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- vehicles) cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. Important safety notes i ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- Y extended period with ESP® deactivated. tion ( page 61). You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. You can select between the following states of ESP®: Deactivating/activating ESP® RESP® is activated. RSPORT handling mode is activated. RESP® is deactivated. G WARNING When SPORT handling mode is activated, there is a greater risk of skidding and accidents. Only activate SPORT handling mode in the situations described in the following.

X To switch off: press button :. G WARNING The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta- instrument cluster lights up. bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X To switch on: press button :. ® The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the Only deactivate ESP in the situations descri- instrument cluster goes out. bed in the following.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated In the following situations, it may be better to activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate ® If ESP is deactivated and one or more wheels ESP®: ÷ ® start to spin, the ESP warning lamp in R the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa- when using snow chains R tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. in deep snow R If you deactivate ESP®: on sand or gravel R R ® on designated roads when the vehicle's ESP no longer improves driving stability. own oversteering and understeering char- Rengine torque is no longer limited and the acteristics are desired drive wheels are able to spin.

Z 66 Driving safety systems

Driving in SPORT handling mode or without Characteristics of activated SPORT han- ESP® requires an extremely qualified and dling mode experienced driver. If SPORT handling mode is activated and one ® i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP ® warning lamp in the instrument cluster described above no longer apply. ESP will ® otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi- flashes. ESP only stabilizes the vehicle to a cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel limited degree.

Safety starts to spin. When SPORT handling mode is activated: R ® ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an ESP only improves driving stability to a extended period with ESP® deactivated. limited degree. You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to a limited degree and the drive wheels can ® Deactivating/activating ESP spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which provides better grip. RETS is still active. RESP® still provides support when you brake. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in the instrument cluster does not flash. In such situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. ® X To activate SPORT handling mode: If you deactivate ESP : briefly press button :. RESP® no longer improves driving stability. The M SPORT handling mode warning Rengine torque is no longer limited and the lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. drive wheels are able to spin. The SPORT handling mode message The spinning of the wheels results in a cut- appears in the multifunction display. ting action for better traction on loose sur- X To deactivate SPORT handling mode: faces. briefly press button :. Rtraction control is still activated. The M SPORT handling mode warning R ® lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. PRE-SAFE is no longer available, nor is it activated if you brake firmly and ESP® X ® To deactivate ESP : press button : until intervenes. the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, it in the instrument cluster. is also not activated if you brake firmly and The ÷ OFF message appears in the mul- ESP® intervenes. tifunction display. R ® X To activate ESP®: briefly press button :. ESP still provides support when you brake. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP® ON message appears in the multifunction display. Driving safety systems 67

EBD (electronic brake force distribu- For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv- tion) ing, the radar sensor system must be operational. General information With the help of the radar sensor system, EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that sure on the rear wheels to improve driving are in front of your vehicle for an extended stability while braking. period of time. ®

PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize Safety Important safety notes the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead, and i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- ® tion for driving safety systems (Y page 61). SAFE Brake has detected a risk of collision, you will be warned visually and acoustically as G WARNING well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can Brake cannot prevent a collision without your still lock, e.g. under full braking. This increa- intervention. ses the risk of skidding and an accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style Important safety notes to the different handling characteristics. Have G the brake system checked at a qualified spe- WARNING cialist workshop. PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehicle by a partial application of the brakes if a Observe information regarding indicator and danger of collision is detected. There may be warning lamps (Y page 245) as well as dis- a collision unless you also brake. Automatic play messages (Y page 215). emergency braking cannot prevent a collision. There is a risk of an accident. Always apply the brakes yourself and try to ADAPTIVE BRAKE take evasive action. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 61). G WARNING ® ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety PRE-SAFE Brake cannot always clearly iden- and offers increased braking comfort. In addi- tify objects and complex traffic conditions. tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: Y also has the HOLD function ( page 181) and Rgive an unnecessary warning and then Y hill start assist ( page 143). brake the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene PRE-SAFE® Brake There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic General information situation and be ready to brake, especially if ® i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec- PRE-SAFE Brake warns you. Terminate the tion (Y page 61). intervention in a non-critical driving situation. PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles In order to maintain the appropriate distance with DISTRONIC PLUS. to the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

Z 68 Driving safety systems

G WARNING distance warning lamp will light up in the instrument cluster. PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: X Brake immediately to defuse the situation. Rto people or animals or Rto oncoming vehicles X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do Rto crossing traffic so. Rwhen cornering ® ® PRE-SAFE Brake can also brake the vehicle

Safety As a result, PRE-SAFE Brake may neither automatically under the following conditions: give warnings nor intervene in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe driver and front-passenger have their Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- seat belts fastened uation and be ready to brake. and Rthe vehicle speed is between approx- In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec- imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph ognition can be impaired. (200 km/h) Recognition by the radar sensor system is At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph also impaired in the event of: (70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else stationary objects. Examples of stationary covering the sensors objects are stopped or parked vehicles. Rthere is interference by other radar sources i If there is an increased risk of collision, Rthere are strong radar reflections, for preventive passenger protection measures example in parking garages (PRE-SAFE®) are activated. R a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front motorbike remains and you do not brake, take evasive Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle relative to the center of your vehicle may perform automatic emergency braking, Following damage to the front end of the vehi- up to the point of full brake application. Auto- cle, have the configuration and operation of matic emergency braking is not performed the radar sensors checked at a qualified spe- until immediately prior to an imminent acci- cialist workshop. This also applies to colli- dent. sions at low speeds where there is no visible You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- damage to the front of the vehicle. SAFE® Brake at any time by: R Function depressing the accelerator pedal further. Ractivating kickdown. X To activate/deactivate: activate or deac- Rreleasing the brake pedal. tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is computer (Y page 203). ended automatically if: When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, the R assistance graphic shows the æ symbol you maneuver to avoid the obstacle. in the multifunction display. Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision. R Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h), there is no longer an obstacle detected in this function warns you if you rapidly front of your vehicle. approach a vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · Protection against theft 69

Protection against theft A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Immobilizer Ra door X To activate with the SmartKey: remove Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Rthe trunk lid X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the Rthe hood ignition off and open the driver's door. Rthe glove box X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. Safety Rthe stowage space under the armrest The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: being started without the correct SmartKey. press the % or & button on the When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The The alarm is switched off. engine can be started by anyone with a valid or SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. i The immobilizer is always deactivated The alarm is switched off. when you start the engine. X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: In the event that the engine cannot be star- grasp the outside door handle. The Smart- ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), Key must be outside the vehicle. the system is not operational. Contact an The alarm is switched off. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call or 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dash- 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. ATA (anti-theft alarm system) The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that triggered it, for example. i If the alarm continues for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call system automatically notifies the Cus- tomer Assistance Center. This is done either by text message or data connection. The emergency call system sends the message or data provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser- X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey vice. or KEYLESS-GO. Rthe mbrace service has been activated : Indicator lamp flashes. The alarm sys- properly. tem is armed after approximately Rthe necessary mobile phone network is 15 seconds. available. X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

Z 70 71

Useful information ...... 72 SmartKey ...... 72 Doors ...... 78 Trunk ...... 80 Side windows ...... 83 Roof ...... 87 Opening and closing 72 SmartKey

Useful information cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. i This Operator's manual describes all Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the models and all standard and optional equip- SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before ment of your vehicle available at the time of inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. publication of the Operator's manual. Country-specific differences are possible. ! Keep the SmartKey away from strong Please note that your vehicle may not be magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote equipped with all features described. This control function could be affected. also applies to safety-related systems and Strong magnetic fields can occur in the functions. vicinity of powerful electrical installations. i Read the information on qualified special- Do not keep the SmartKey: Y ist workshops ( page 26). Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey R SmartKey with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil R Opening and closing Important safety notes inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case G WARNING This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other SmartKey functions people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake. Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral. Rstart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. : & To lock the vehicle When leaving the vehicle, always take the ; F To unlock the trunk lid SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never = % To unlock the vehicle leave children or animals unattended in the X To unlock centrally: press the % but- vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of ton. reach of children. If you do not open the vehicle within G WARNING approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: R If you attach heavy or large objects to the the vehicle is locked again. SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten- Rthe theft deterrent locking system is tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could armed again. X To lock centrally: press the & button. SmartKey 73

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe trunk lid Rthe stowage compartment in the center console Rthe fuel filler flap The turn signals flash once when unlocking and three times when locking. You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible X signal can be activated and deactivated using To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner the on-board computer (Y page 207). surface of the door handle. When it is dark, the surround lighting also X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur- comes on if it is activated in the on-board face :. computer (Y page 206). X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an exten-

ded period. Opening and closing KEYLESS-GO Further information on the convenience General notes closing feature (Y page 85). X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on Bear in mind that the engine can be started by the trunk lid. any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY- The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid. LESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrally Changing the settings of the locking You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using system KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry You can change the settings of the locking the SmartKey with you. You can combine the system. This means only the driver's door, the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a con- lockable stowage compartments in the vehi- ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by cle interior and the fuel filler flap are unlocked using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it when the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if using the & button on the SmartKey. you frequently travel on your own. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, X To change the setting: press and hold the distance between the key and the corre- down the % and & buttons simulta- sponding door handle must not be greater neously for approximately six seconds until than 3 ft (1 m). the battery check lamp flashes twice A check which periodically establishes a radio (Y page 75). connection between the vehicle and the i If the setting of the locking system is SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- changed within the signal range of the vehi- Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example: cle, pressing the & or % button: R when the external door handles are Rlocks or touched Runlocks the vehicle Rwhen starting the engine Rwhile the vehicle is in motion

Z 74 SmartKey

The SmartKey now functions as follows: or X To unlock the driver's door: press the X Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS- % button once. GO. The SmartKey must be outside the X To unlock centrally: press the % but- vehicle. ton twice. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical X To lock centrally: press the & button. key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol- X lows: To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. X To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner surface of the door handle on the Removing the mechanical key driver's door. X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface of the front-passenger door handle. X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles.

Opening and closing X To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 75).

X Push release catch : in the direction of Mechanical key the arrow and at the same time remove mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. General notes For further information about: If the vehicle can no longer be locked or Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 80) unlocked with the SmartKey, use the R mechanical key. unlocking the trunk (Y page 82) R If you use the mechanical key to unlock and locking the vehicle (Y page 80) open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered Inserting the mechanical key Y ( page 69). X Push mechanical key ; completely into There are several ways to turn off the alarm: the SmartKey until it engages and release X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: catch : is back in its basic position. press the % or & button on the SmartKey. or SmartKey battery X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Important safety notes or G WARNING X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS- GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni- Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan- tion lock. The SmartKey must be in the ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in vehicle. SmartKey 75

severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal Replacing the battery injury. You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention Key (Y page 74). immediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment. National guidelines must be observed during disposal. In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard- ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Checking the battery X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey

opening in the direction of the arrow until Opening and closing battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :.

X Press the & or % button. The battery is working properly if battery check lamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does not light up briefly. X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your X Change the battery (Y page 75). palm until battery = falls out. i If the SmartKey battery is checked within X Insert the new battery with the positive ter- the signal reception range of the vehicle, minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth pressing the & or % button: to do so. R locks or X Make sure that the surface of the battery is Runlocks the vehicle free of lint, grease and other contaminants. i You can get a battery at any qualified spe- X Insert the front tabs of battery compart- cialist workshop. ment cover : into the housing and then press to close it.

Z 76 SmartKey

X Insert mechanical key ; into the Smart- Key (Y page 74). X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle. Opening and closing SmartKey 77

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. or unlock the vehicle X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 75) and replace it if nec- using the SmartKey. essary (Y page 75). If this does not work: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty. X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of Opening and closing using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. To do this, hold the SmartKey as close as possible to the vehicle and press the % or & button. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote control function: X Unlock (Y page 80) or lock (Y page 80) the vehicle using the mechanical key. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart- X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work- Key. shop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z 78 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine can no lon- The on-board voltage is too low. ger be started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 299). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine can no lon- The vehicle is locked. ger be started using X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again. KEYLESS-GO. The

Opening and closing SmartKey is in the vehi- There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. cle. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors Unlocking and opening doors from the inside Important safety notes ! The side windows will not open/close if G WARNING the battery is discharged or if the side win- If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, dows have iced up. It will then not be pos- they could: sible to close the door. Do not attempt to Ropen the doors, thus endangering other force the door closed. You could otherwise people or road users. damage the door or the side window. Rget out and disrupt traffic. You can open a door from inside the vehicle Roperate the vehicle's equipment. even if it has been locked. Additionally, children could set the vehicle in If the vehicle was previously locked with the motion if, for example, they: SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening the vehicle from the inside will activate the anti- R release the parking brake. theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm Rshift the automatic transmission out of park (Y page 69). position P or shift manual transmission into neutral. Rstart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. Doors 79

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked. If a locked door is opened from the inside, the previous unlock status of the vehicle will be taken into consideration if: Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking button for the central locking, or X Pull door handle ;. Rif the vehicle was locked automatically If the door is locked, locking knob : pops The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre- up. The door is unlocked and can be viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's opened. door had been previously unlocked, only the i door which has been opened from the inside When a door is opened, the side window is unlocked. on that side opens slightly. When the door

is closed, the side window closes again. Opening and closing Automatic locking feature Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from the inside. For example, you can unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock the vehicle before you pull away.

: Disarming ; Arming X To disarm: press and hold button : for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To arm: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. X To unlock: press button :. i If you press one of the two buttons and do X To lock: press button ;. not hear a tone, the relevant setting has If the front-passenger door is closed, the already been selected. vehicle locks. The vehicle is locked automatically when the The central locking/unlocking button does ignition is switched on and the wheels are not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the turning. stowage compartment in the center console.

Z 80 Trunk

You could therefore lock yourself out if: X Open the driver's door. Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Close the front-passenger door and the Rthe vehicle is being towed. trunk lid. X Y Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. Press the locking button ( page 79). X You can also switch the automatic locking Check whether the locking knob on the function on and off using the on-board com- front-passenger door is still visible. Press puter (Y page 207). the locking knob down by hand, if necessary. X Close the driver's door. Unlocking the driver's door (mechan- X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- ical key) Key (Y page 74). X If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. the driver's door as far as it will go. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm system will be triggered (Y page 69).

Opening and closing X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74). X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To lock X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it will go to position 1. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it. X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lid are locked. X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey as far as it will go to position 1. (Y page 74). The door is unlocked. i If you lock the vehicle as described above, X Turn the mechanical key back and remove the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- it. theft alarm system is not armed. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 74). Trunk

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) Important safety notes G If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the WARNING SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip Trunk 81

over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle G WARNING occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu- The reversing feature does not react: larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud- Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- den change in direction. gers Always store objects so that they cannot be Rover the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closing flung around. Secure objects, luggage or movement loads against slipping or tipping before the journey. This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these sit- ! The trunk lid swings upwards when uations. There is a risk of injury. opened. Therefore, make sure that there is Make sure that no body parts are in close sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. proximity during the closing procedure. ! Only close the trunk once the roof is low- If somebody becomes trapped: ered completely. Otherwise, you could Rpress the F button on the SmartKey, or damage the roof. Rpress the remote operating switch on the If you close the trunk lid before the roof is driver's door, or lowered completely, the loading aid switch Rpress the closing or locking button on the Opening and closing lights up and a warning tone sounds. trunk lid, or i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid Rpull on the trunk lid handle (Y page 353). Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Opening/closing from outside The trunk lid can be: Opening Ropened/closed from outside Ropened automatically from outside Rlocked separately Runlocked with the mechanical key Ropened with the emergency release button

Trunk lid reversing feature The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the X Press the % button on the SmartKey. closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again X Pull handle :. automatically. The automatic reversing func- X Raise the trunk lid. tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness to the trunk lid while it is closing.

Z 82 Trunk

Closing Locking the trunk separately You can lock the trunk separately. If you then unlock the vehicle centrally, the trunk remains locked and cannot be opened. X Close the trunk lid. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74).

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess :. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- GO. i Opening and closing If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the trunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked and will open again. 1 Basic position 2 To lock X Opening automatically from outside Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go. General notes X Turn the mechanical key clockwise from position 1 to position 2. ! The trunk lid swings upwards when X opened. Therefore, make sure that there is Remove the mechanical key. sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey (Y page 74). i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid (Y page 353). Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key) Opening ! The trunk lid swings upwards when You can open the trunk lid automatically opened. Therefore, make sure that there is using the handle in the trunk lid. sufficient clearance above the trunk lid. X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lid If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the handle and let it go again immediately. SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani- Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing fea- cal key. ture: the trunk lid can be also be opened If you use the mechanical key to unlock and automatically using the SmartKey. open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system X Press and hold the F button on the will be triggered (Y page 69). SmartKey until the trunk lid opens. X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart- Key (Y page 74). X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock as far as it will go. Side windows 83

The trunk lid emergency release does not unlock the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or discharged. Trunk lid emergency release light: Remergency release button : flashes for 30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened Remergency release button : flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

1 Basic position Side windows 2 To unlock Important safety notes X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise G as far as it will go from position 1 to posi- WARNING tion 2. While opening the side windows, body parts X Pull the trunk lid handle. could become trapped between the side window and the door frame as the side window The trunk is unlocked. Opening and closing moves. There is a risk of injury. X Turn the mechanical key back to position 1 and remove it. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If some- X Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey body becomes trapped, release the switch or (Y page 74). pull the switch to close the side window again. i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 80), the trunk is also locked. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There Trunk emergency release is a risk of injury. You can unlock the trunk lid from the inside When closing make sure that no parts of the with the emergency release button. body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

X Press emergency release button : briefly. The trunk lid unlocks and opens. Side window reversing feature The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunk The front side windows are equipped with an lid emergency release when the vehicle is automatic reversing feature. If a solid object stationary or while driving. blocks or restricts one of the front side win-

Z 84 Side windows

dows from traveling upwards during the auto- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the matic closing process, the side window opens ignition lock. again automatically. During the manual clos- X To open manually: press and hold the cor- ing process, the side window only opens responding button. again automatically after the corresponding X To open fully: press the button beyond the switch is released. However, the automatic point of resistance and release it. reversing feature is only an aid and does not Automatic closing is started. relieve you of the responsibility of paying X attention when closing a side window. To close manually: pull the corresponding button and hold it. G WARNING X To close fully: pull the button beyond the The reversing feature does not react: point of resistance and release it. Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin- Automatic closing is started. gers X To interrupt automatic operation: press Rwhile resetting or pull the corresponding switch again. This means that the reversing feature cannot i You can continue to operate the side win- prevent someone being trapped in these sit- dows after you switch off the engine. This Opening and closing uations. There is a risk of injury. function is available for up to five minutes Make sure that no body parts are in close or until the driver's or front-passenger door proximity during the closing procedure. If is opened. someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing all side windows

Opening and closing the side win- Using the switch on the center console dows in the front You can use the switch on the center console The switches for the front side windows are to close all side windows simultaneously. located on the driver's door. There is also a X Open the cover in the lower center console. switch for the front-passenger side window The switch for all side windows is under the on the front-passenger door. cover. The switches on the driver's door take precedence.

: Left ; Right Side windows 85

X To open all side windows: press X To open all side windows: press the % switch : to the point of resistance. button on the SmartKey until the side win- X To open all side windows fully: press dows are fully opened. switch : beyond the point of resistance. X To interrupt the opening procedure: All side windows open simultaneously. release the % button. i If, after opening the windows, you then X To close all side windows: press the close a side window using the switch on the & button on the SmartKey until the side door control panel, the other side windows windows are fully closed. will remain open. To close the other side X To interrupt the closing procedure: windows, you must pull the switch on the release the & button. center console and hold it. The front side window will close first, then the rear side Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO windows. G X To close all side windows: pull switch :. WARNING The rear side windows close after the front When using the convenience closing feature, side windows. parts of the body could be trapped in the clos- X Make sure that all the side windows are ing area when a side window is being closed. Opening and closing fully closed. There is a risk of injury. i When the roof is open, only the two front Observe the complete closing procedure side windows can be operated using the when the convenience closing feature is oper- switch on the center console. ating. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. Using the SmartKey If someone is trapped: G WARNING X Release the recessed sensor surface on the When using the convenience closing feature, door handle immediately. parts of the body could be trapped in the clos- X Pull the door handle immediately and hold ing area when a side window is being closed. it until the side windows open again. There is a risk of injury. With KEYLESS-GO you can close all side win- Observe the complete closing procedure dows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GO key when the convenience closing feature is oper- must be outside the vehicle. All the doors ating. Make sure that no body parts are in must be closed. close proximity during the closing procedure.

If someone is trapped: X Release the & button immediately. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows open again. You can use the SmartKey to open or close all side windows simultaneously. X Close the roof (Y page 88). X Open the trunk partition (Y page 89). X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle.

Z 86 Side windows

X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows are fully closed. i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. X Make sure that all the side windows are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longer be closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. Opening and closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 84) X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 84). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again. Roof 87

Problems with the side windows G WARNING If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot X Remove the objects. be closed because it is X Close the side window. blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

A side window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again Opening and closing be closed and you can- slightly: not see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Roof Only have the soft top closed manually at a qualified specialist workshop. Important safety notes ! G WARNING Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavy objects there. You will otherwise damage If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the the roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle. soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short time. This causes the soft top to lower unex- ! Do not forget that the weather can pectedly and may cause you or others to be change abruptly. Make certain that the roof trapped. There is a risk of injury. is closed when you leave the vehicle. The Always open or close the soft top completely. vehicle electronics can be damaged if water enters the vehicle interior. G WARNING ! When opening and closing the roof, make Closing the roof manually is a complicated sure that: and technically demanding procedure, which requires a lot of strength. You or others can become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

Z 88 Roof

Rthere is sufficient clearance, as the roof Opening and closing swings upwards. Rthere is sufficient clearance behind the vehicle, as the trunk lid swings backwards beyond the bumper. Rthe trunk is only loaded to below the trunk partition. Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up by the load. Rthe trunk partition is closed. Rthe trunk lid is closed. R the outside temperature is above 5 ‡ X Secure the vehicle against rolling away Ò ( 15 †). (Y page 161). You could otherwise damage the roof, X Close the trunk partition (Y page 90). trunk and other parts of the vehicle. X Close the trunk lid. i Vehicle dimensions when opening/clos- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Opening and closing Y ing the roof ( page 353). tion lock. i Make sure that the roof and rear window X Open the cover in the lower center console. are clean and dry before opening the roof. Roof switch : is located under the cover. Otherwise, water or dirt could enter the X To open: pull roof switch : until the entire vehicle interior or trunk. roof is stowed away in the trunk. The Vario-Roof in Operation message appears in the multifunction display. Once Opening and closing using the roof the opening procedure is complete, the switch message disappears and a tone will sound. Important safety notes All of the side windows open. X To close: press and hold roof switch : G WARNING until the roof is fully closed. When opening or closing the roof, body parts The Vario-Roof in Operation message could be trapped by, for example, the roof appears in the multifunction display. Once mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There the opening procedure is complete, the is a risk of injury. message disappears and a tone will sound. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure All of the side windows open. that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving X To close all side windows, pull the switch components. If someone becomes trapped, under the cover of the center console release the button. (Y page 84). i If you operate the roof switch and the Trunk Partition Open message appears in the multifunction display, the trunk partition has not been closed correctly. Roof 89

Opening and closing using the Smart- Locking the roof again Key Important safety notes Important safety notes G WARNING G WARNING If you do not fully open/close the soft top, the When opening or closing the roof, body parts soft-top hydraulics depressurize after a short could be trapped by, for example, the roof time. This causes the soft top to lower unex- mechanism, trunk lid or side windows. There pectedly and may cause you or others to be is a risk of injury. trapped. There is a risk of injury. When raising or lowering the roof, make sure Always open or close the soft top completely. that no body parts are in the vicinity of moving components. If someone becomes trapped, The roof is not locked if: release the button. Rthe K symbol and the Vario-Roof in Operation message appear in the multi- Opening and closing function display. R K Open/Close X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89). the symbol and the

Vario-Roof Completely message Opening and closing X Y Close the trunk lid ( page 80). appear and you hear a warning tone. X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's Ryou hear a warning tone for up to 10 sec- door handle. onds when pulling away or while driving. X To open: press and hold the % button on the SmartKey until the roof is fully Locking opened. The roof and the rear side windows open. You can lock the roof again if it is not locked The front side windows close. fully. X To interrupt the opening procedure: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon release the % button. as possible, paying attention to road and X To open the front side windows: press traffic conditions. and hold the % button on the SmartKey X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position again. 2 in the ignition lock. X To close: press and hold the & button X Press the roof switch (Y page 88). on the SmartKey until the roof is fully closed. The roof and the side windows close. Trunk partition X To interrupt the closing procedure: General notes release the & button. i When the roof is closed and the trunk par- ! To avoid damaging the roof or luggage tition is open, the roof cannot be opened when folding back the roof, you should: using the SmartKey functions. Instead, all Ronly load the trunk to below the trunk of the side windows open or close simulta- partition neously (Y page 84). Additionally, the Rnot place any objects on or in front of the Trunk Partition Open message appears trunk partition in the multifunction display.

Z 90 Roof

Rnot place any objects on the cover G WARNING behind the roll bars If the wind screen is incorrectly installed, it Rnot allow the cargo to push the trunk could detach itself during a journey and partition upwards endanger other road users. There is a risk of The trunk partition can be used to cover lug- an accident and injury. gage and loads in the trunk. Install the wind screen as described.

Opening and closing ! Install or remove the wind screen only when the roof is open. You could otherwise damage the wind screen or the vehicle interior. The wind screen offers protection from the wind when driving with the roof down. The wind screen can be installed or removed from the driver's side or passenger side. For operations involving the wind screen, it is preferable to be positioned on the side of the Opening and closing vehicle facing away from the traffic, after stopping the vehicle in accordance with the X To close: pull back trunk partition : by traffic conditions. the handle in the direction of the arrow until it engages on both sides in the eyelets on Installing and removing the wind screen the cargo compartment lip. Preparing for installation X To open: grip the handle of trunk partition :. X Press the release button in the handle of trunk partition :. Trunk partition : is unlocked. X Pull trunk partition : up out of the eyelets on the cargo compartment lip. X Push trunk partition : forwards against the direction of the arrow by handle.

Wind screen Preparing for installation from the left side of the vehicle (example) Important safety notes : Wind screen G WARNING ; Locked latch = If you use the wind screen in darkness or in Unlocked latch other conditions offering poor visibility, your X The following conditions must be fulfilled view to the rear is further impaired. There is a for installation: risk of an accident. Only use the wind screen when visibility conditions are good. Roof 91

Runlocking buttons R and L point in the Removing direction of travel. Rlatch = facing you is unlocked. Rlatch ; facing away from you is locked. X To unlock the latch: press unlocking button R or L on the locked latch. X To lock the latch: push the unlocked latch upwards by hand until it engages. Installing

Removing from the left side of the vehicle (example) X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Press unlocking button L :. Meanwhile,

pull wind screen ; on the side of the vehi- Opening and closing cle facing you upwards and tilt it.

Installation from the left side of the vehicle (example) X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Take the wind screen out of the trunk. X Prepare for installing (Y page 90). X Hold wind screen : at an angle and slide it with locked latch ; in the direction of arrow ? into the bracket of the opposite Removing from the left side of the vehicle (exam- roll bar. ple) X Press wind screen : on the side of the X Pull wind screen ; out of the bracket of vehicle facing you downwards in the direc- the opposite roll bar in the direction of the tion of arrow A until it engages. arrow. B = Make sure that studs and latch fit X Secure wind screen ; to the trunk floor by into the respective brackets. the rubber strips (Y page 258). X Check whether wind screen : is fully inserted into all four brackets and is sitting securely. AIRGUIDE X If this is not the case, remove wind screen : again and repeat the steps Important safety notes above. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle if you fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 92 Roof

Only fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is MAGIC SKY CONTROL stationary. General notes ! AIRGUIDE can only be positioned cor- MAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, the rectly by folding it in or out. AIRGUIDE can- transparency of which can be changed by not be dismantled. Do not try to remove applying electrical voltage. AIRGUIDE from its anchorage. Otherwise, MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switched you could damage AIRGUIDE or the vehicle. between darkened and transparent states. AIRGUIDE can be folded out or back in from i the driver's side or passenger side. MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkens automatically when you turn the SmartKey to posi- When operating AIRGUIDE, preferably stand tion 0 in the ignition lock or remove the on the side of the vehicle away from the traf- SmartKey. fic, after you have stopped the vehicle in accordance with road and traffic conditions. Risk of electric shock

Operating AIRGUIDE G DANGER MAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using high Opening and closing voltage. If the trim behind the overhead control panel is damaged or removed, electrical components will be exposed. If you touch these components, you could get an electric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury. RNever remove the trim behind the overhead control panel. RIf the trim is damaged, never touch the electrical components behind it. RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKY CON- Example: folding out from the left side of the vehicle TROL carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The electrical components of MAGIC SKY X To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc : in the CONTROL are protected by a paneling behind direction of the arrow towards the middle of the overhead control panel. the vehicle to the stop. The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit is X Repeat with disc ;. marked with a yellow warning sticker that X To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs : and ; warns you of high voltage. The electric cables back behind the roll bar to the stop. of the high-voltage section are colored orange. i Discs : and ; can also be used independently of each other, e.g. when you are driving without a passenger. Roof 93

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to the status it was set to before the engine was switched off.

X To change the degree of transparency: Opening and closing press button :. i At sub-zero temperatures, the change is slower and uneven. The entire process may take some time.

Z 94 Roof

Problems with the roof

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The roof will not open or The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged. close. X Close the trunk partition (Y page 90).

The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid (Y page 81).

The on-board voltage is too low. X Leave the engine running.

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been automatically deactivated. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X

Opening and closing Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

The automatic roof mechanism is faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 95

Useful information ...... 96 Correct driver's seat position ...... 96 Seats ...... 97 Steering wheel ...... 100 Mirrors ...... 103 Memory function ...... 106 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 96 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost vertical position i This Operator's manual describes all Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that models and all standard and optional equip- your thighs are gently supported ment of your vehicle available at the time of Ryou can depress the pedals properly publication of the Operator's manual. X Check whether the head restraint is adjus- Country-specific differences are possible. ted properly. Please note that your vehicle may not be When doing so, make sure that you have equipped with all features described. This adjusted the head restraint so that the back also applies to safety-related systems and of your head is supported at eye level by the functions. center of the head restraint. i Read the information on qualified special- X Observe the safety guidelines on steering ist workshops (Y page 26). wheel adjustment (Y page 100). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Correct driver's seat position Adjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 101) Adjusts the steering wheel electrically (Y page 101) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent Ryou can move your legs freely Ryou can see all the displays in the instru- Seats, steering wheel and mirrors ment cluster clearly X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 42). X Check whether you have fastened seat belt ; properly (Y page 44). The seat belt should: X Observe the safety guidelines on seat Rfit snugly across your body adjustment (Y page 97). Rbe routed across the middle of your shoul- X = Make sure that seat is adjusted prop- der erly. Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip Y Manual seat adjustment ( page 98) joints Y Electrical seat adjustment ( page 98) X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mir- When adjusting the seat, make sure that: ror and the exterior mirrors (Y page 103) in Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag such a way that you have a good view of as possible road and traffic conditions. Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position X Vehicles with a memory function: save Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings (Y page 106). Seats 97

Seats G WARNING Important safety notes If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection G WARNING as intended. There is an increased risk of Children could become trapped if they adjust injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the the seats, particularly when unattended. event of an accident or when braking. There is a risk of injury. Always drive with the head restraints instal- When leaving the vehicle, always take the led. Before driving off, make sure for every SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never vehicle occupant that the center of the head leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. The seats can still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in the ignition lock. G WARNING G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle R occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury. mirrors R Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one fasten the seat belt has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" mirrors and fasten your seat belt before start- (Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle" ing the engine. (Y page 57). ! G WARNING To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could R move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If Seats, steering wheel and mirrors motion. This could cause you to lose control of liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. soon as possible. R Always make sure that the driver's seat is if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not engaged before starting the engine. switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry G WARNING the seats. R If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or clean the seat covers as recommended; other vehicle occupants could be trapped and see the "Interior care" section. thereby injured. Children in particular could Rdo not transport heavy loads on the accidentally press the electrical seat adjust- seats. Do not place sharp objects on the ment buttons and become trapped. There is a seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. risk of injury. The seats should only be occupied by While moving the seats, make sure that your passengers, if possible. hands or other body parts do not get under the Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys- not cover the seats with insulating mate- tem. rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers, child seats or booster seats. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when

Z 98 Seats

moving the seats back. There is a risk that Adjusting the seats electrically the seats and/or the objects could be damaged. i The head restraints are installed with the NECK-PRO system (Y page 56). For this reason, it is not possible to remove the head restraints from the seats. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Adjusting the seats manually : Backrest angle ; Seat fore-and-aft adjustment = Seat cushion angle ? Seat height i You can store the seat settings using the memory function (Y page 106).

Adjusting the head restraints Adjusting the head restraints manually X To set seat fore-and-aft adjustment: lift lever : and slide the seat forwards or backwards. Seats, steering wheel andX mirrors Release lever : again. Make sure that you hear the seat engage in position. X To adjust the backrest angle: relieve the pressure on the backrest. X Pull handle ; and adjust the backrest to the desired angle. X Release handle ; again. X To raise/lower: push the head restraint The backrest must audibly engage. upwards or pull it down into the desired X To adjust the seat height: pull handle = position. upwards or push it down repeatedly until the seat has reached the desired height. Seats 99

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Driver's and front-passenger seat : To raise the backrest contour The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. ; To soften the backrest contour mirrors = To lower the backrest contour The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately ? To harden the backrest contour eight minutes. You can adjust the contour of the seat backr- The system automatically switches down ests individually to provide optimum support from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten for your back. minutes. The system automatically switches off

Switching the seat heating on/off approximately 20 minutes after it is set to ering wheel and level 1. Activating/deactivating X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position , ste G WARNING 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: : Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can press button repeatedly Seats cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to until the desired heating level is set. become very hot. The health of persons with X To switch off: press button : repeatedly limited temperature sensitivity or a limited until all the indicator lamps go out. ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer Problems with the seat heating burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. The seat heating has switched off prema- Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on turely or cannot be switched on. The vehicle's repeatedly. electrical system voltage is too low because too many electrical consumers are switched on. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the rear window defroster or interior lighting. X Once the battery is sufficiently charged, switch on the seat heating again.

Z 100 Steering wheel

AIRSCARF Problems with AIRSCARF Activating/deactivating AIRSCARF has switched off prematurely or will not switch on. The vehicle's electrical sys- G WARNING tem voltage is too low because too many When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air electrical consumers are switched on. can flow from the vents in the head restraints. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do This could result in burns in the immediate not need, such as the rear window vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. defroster or interior lighting. Reduce the heater output before it becomes X Switch on AIRSCARF again. too hot.

Steering wheel

mirrors Important safety notes G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt ering wheel and The AIRSCARF function warms the head and There is a risk of an accident. neck area of vehicle occupants with warm air. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer- , ste The warm air flows out of the holes in the head ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt restraints. before starting the engine.

Seats The three red indicator lamps in the button G indicate the heating level you have selected. WARNING X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position You can no longer steer the vehicle if the 2 in the ignition lock. steering wheel lock has been engaged. There is a risk of an accident. X To switch on: press button :. Always switch off the ignition when towing the Three red indicator lamps in the button light vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. up. The blower starts up after a preheating phase of seven seconds. G WARNING X Press button : repeatedly until the Children could injure themselves if they desired heating level is set. adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of X : To switch off: press button repeatedly injury. until all the indicator lamps go out. When leaving the vehicle, always take the i The blower continues running for seven SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never seconds to cool down the heating ele- leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ments. The electrically adjustable steering wheel can i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARF still be adjusted when there is no key in the may switch off. ignition lock. Steering wheel 101

Adjusting the steering wheel man- i Further related subjects: ually REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 101) RStoring settings (Y page 106)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Important safety notes

G WARNING If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an : Release lever mirrors ; To adjust the steering wheel height accident. = To adjust the steering wheel position Always wait until the adjustment process is (fore-and-aft adjustment) complete before driving off. X Push release lever : down completely in G WARNING the direction of the arrow. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts The steering column is unlocked. the steering wheel, you and other vehicle X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired occupants – particularly children – could position. become trapped. There is a risk of injury. ering wheel and X Push release lever : up completely. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- The steering column is locked. ing adjustments, make sure that no one has , ste X Check if the steering column is locked. any body parts in the sweep of the steering When doing so, try to push the steering wheel. Seats wheel up or down or try to move it in the If somebody becomes trapped: fore-and-aft direction. Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or Adjusting the steering wheel electri- Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- cally ment in the opposite direction to that in which the steering wheel is moving. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNING When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts the steering wheel and the driver's seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has : To adjust the steering wheel height any body parts in the sweep of the seat and ; To adjust the steering wheel position the steering wheel. (fore-and-aft adjustment)

Z 102 Steering wheel

If somebody becomes trapped: Position of the steering wheel for driving Rpress one of the memory function position buttons, or The steering wheel is moved to the last selec- Rpress one of the memory function memory ted position when: buttons, or Rthe driver's door is closed Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition ment in the opposite direction to that in lock which the steering wheel is moving or The adjustment process is stopped. Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO G WARNING When you close the driver's door with the If you use openings in the bodywork or ignition switched on, the steering wheel is detachable parts as steps, you could: also automatically moved to the previously Rslip and/or fall set position. Rdamage the vehicle and cause yourself to The last position of the steering wheel is fall. stored when you switch off the ignition or There is a risk of injury. when you store the setting with the memory Y Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. a suita- function ( page 106). ble ladder. Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is in and out of your vehicle easier. triggered in an accident, the steering column You can activate and deactivate the EASY- will move upwards when the driver's door is ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com- opened. This occurs irrespective of the posi- puter (Y page 207). tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This Seats, steering wheel and mirrors makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue Position of the steering wheel when the the occupants. EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is The steering wheel swings upwards when only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea- you: ture is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 207). Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in position 1 Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end stop. Mirrors 103

Mirrors Rear-view mirror

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : mirror or button ; for the right-hand exte- forwards or back. rior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. Exterior mirrors The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected Adjusting the exterior mirrors mirror using adjustment button = as long G WARNING as the indicator lamp is lit. X = The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the Press adjustment button up, down, to image. Visible objects are actually closer than the right or to the left. they appear. This means that you could mis- The exterior mirror must be set to a position judge the distance from road users traveling that provides you with a good overview of traffic conditions. behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a Seats, steering wheel and mirrors risk of an accident. The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger For this reason, always make sure of the field of vision. actual distance from the road users traveling The exterior mirrors are automatically heated behind by glancing over your shoulder. after starting the vehicle if the rear window defroster is switched on and the outside tem- G WARNING perature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to 10 The exterior mirror on the front-passenger minutes. side reduces the size of the image. Visible i You can also heat up the exterior mirrors objects are actually closer than they appear. manually by switching on the rear window This means that you could misjudge the dis- defroster. tance from road users traveling behind, e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an accident. For this reason, always make sure of the actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder.

Z 104 Mirrors

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out button : until you hear a click and then the electrically mirrors engage in position (Y page 104). The mirror housing is engaged again and you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual (Y page 103).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors G WARNING Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, res- mirrors X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. There is a risk of injury. X Briefly press button :. If you come into contact with the electrolyte, Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. observe the following: i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are RRinse off the electrolyte from your skin always folded out fully while driving. They immediately with water. could otherwise vibrate. RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out of your eyes thoroughly with clean water. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately automatically rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function induce vomiting. is activated in the on-board computer RIf electrolyte comes into contact with your

Seats, steering wheel and (Y page 208): skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as attention immediately. soon as you lock the vehicle from the out- RImmediately change out of clothing which side. has come into contact with electrolyte. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat- RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and attention immediately. then open the driver's or front-passenger door. The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror i on the driver's side automatically go into anti- The exterior mirrors do not fold out if they glare mode if the following conditions are met have been folded in manually. simultaneously: Exterior mirror pushed out of position Rthe ignition is switched on and Rincident light from headlamps strikes the If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of sensor in the rear-view mirror. position, proceed as follows: The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if X Vehicles without electrically folding reverse gear is engaged or if the interior light- exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror ing is switched on. into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding exterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding Mirrors 105

Parking position for the exterior mir- Using the memory button ror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see the rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. You can position the front-passenger side X exterior mirror in such a way that you can see Make sure that the SmartKey is in position the rear wheel on that side as soon as you 2 in the ignition lock. engage reverse gear. You can store this posi- X With the exterior mirror on the front- tion. passenger side activated, use adjustment X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the ignition lock. curb should be visible. X ? X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on Press memory button M and one of the the front-passenger side. arrows on adjustment button = within three seconds. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Engage reverse gear. The parking position is stored if the exterior The exterior mirror on the front-passenger mirror does not move. side moves to the preset parking position. X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat X Use adjustment button = to adjust the the steps. exterior mirror to a position that allows you to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. Calling up a stored parking position setting i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving position.

Z 106 Memory function

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody tion lock. becomes trapped, immediately release the X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- memory function position button. The adjust- passenger side using button ;. ment process is stopped. X Engage reverse gear. G The exterior mirror on the front-passenger WARNING side moves to the stored parking position. Children could become trapped if they acti- The exterior mirror on the front-passenger vate the memory function, particularly when side moves back to its original position: unattended. There is a risk of injury. R When leaving the vehicle, always take the as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never (15 km/h) leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rif you press button : for the exterior mirror on the driver's side

Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. X Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 98). Only use the memory function on the driver's X side when the vehicle is stationary. On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 101) and the exterior mirrors Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Y G WARNING ( page 103). X M When the memory function adjusts the seat or Press memory button and one of the steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu- storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within pants – particularly children – could become three seconds. trapped. There is a risk of injury. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. A tone sounds when the set- While the memory function is making adjust- tings have been completed. ments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position Calling up a stored setting button. The adjustment process is stopped. X Press and hold the relevant storage position button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering G WARNING wheel and exterior mirrors are in the stored When the memory function adjusts the seat, position. you and other vehicle occupants – particularly i The setting procedure is interrupted as children – could become trapped. There is a soon as you release the storage position risk of injury. button. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body 107

Useful information ...... 108 Exterior lighting ...... 108 Interior lighting ...... 113 Replacing bulbs ...... 114 Windshield wipers ...... 117 Lights and windshield wipers 108 Exterior lighting

Useful information Setting the exterior lighting Setting options i This Operator's manual describes all models and all standard and optional equip- Exterior lighting can be set using: ment of your vehicle available at the time of Rthe light switch publication of the Operator's manual. R Y Country-specific differences are possible. the combination switch ( page 110) Please note that your vehicle may not be Rthe on-board computer (Y page 205) equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and Light switch functions. Operation i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).

Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed obli- 1 W Left-hand standing lamps gations. 2 X Right-hand standing lamps 3 T Parking lamps, license plate and Driving abroad instrument cluster lighting Lights and windshield wipers 4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control- Symmetrical low-beam headlamps led by the light sensor Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps beam in countries in which traffic drives on B R Rear fog lamp the opposite side of the road from the country C N Fog lamp (only vehicles with front where the vehicle is registered. This prevents fog lamps) glare to oncoming traffic. When using sym- If you hear a warning tone when you leave the metrical lights, the edge of the road is not lit vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. as widely and as far ahead as normal. X Turn the light switch to Ã. Have the headlamps converted at a qualified specialist workshop as close to the border as The exterior lighting (except the parking/ possible before driving in these countries. standing lamps) switches off automatically if you: Asymmetrical low beam Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock Have the headlamps converted back to asym- Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey in metrical low-beam headlamps at a qualified position 0. specialist workshop as soon as possible after crossing the border again. Exterior lighting 109

Automatic headlamp mode turn the light switch to T, the daytime G WARNING running lamps and parking lamps switch on. When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- If the engine is running and you turn the light beam headlamps may not be switched on switch to L, the manual settings take automatically if there is fog, snow or other precedence over the daytime running lamps. causes of poor visibility due to the weather USA only: conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an The daytime running lamps improve the visi- accident. bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this, In such situations, turn the light switch to the daytime running lamps function must be L. switched on using the on-board computer (Y page 205). The automatic headlamp feature is only an If the engine is running and you turn the light aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's switch to T or L, the manual settings lighting at all times. take precedence over the daytime running Ã is the favored light switch setting. The lamps. light setting is automatically selected accord- Low-beam headlamps ing to the brightness of the ambient light (exception: poor visibility due to weather con- G WARNING ditions such as fog, snow or spray): When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: beam headlamps may not be switched on the parking lamps are switched on or off automatically if there is fog, snow or other automatically depending on the brightness causes of poor visibility due to the weather of the ambient light. conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. RWith the engine running: if you have activated the daytime running lamps function In such situations, turn the light switch to via the on-board computer, the daytime L.

running lamps or the low-beam headlamps Lights and windshield wipers Even if the light sensor does not detect that it and parking lamps are switched on or off is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam automatically depending on the brightness headlamps switch on when the ignition is of the ambient light. switched on and the light switch is set to the X To switch on automatic headlamp L position. This is a particularly useful mode: turn the light switch to Ã. function in the event of rain and fog. Only for Canada: X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: The daytime running lamps improve the visi- turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to bility of your vehicle during the day. The day- position 2 or start the engine. time running lamps function is required by law X Turn the light switch to L. in Canada. It cannot therefore be deactivated. The green L indicator lamp in the instru- When the engine is running and the vehicle is ment cluster lights up. stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running Front fog lamps lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after In conditions where visibility is poor due to three minutes. fog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improve vis- When the engine is running, the vehicle is ibility as well as making it easier for other road stationary and in bright ambient light: if you users to see you. They can be operated together with the parking lamps or together

Z 110 Exterior lighting

with the parking lamps and low-beam head- X To switch on: turn the light switch to T. lamps. The green T indicator lamp in the instru- X To switch on the front fog lamps: turn ment cluster lights up. the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position Standing lamps 2 or start the engine. Switching on the standing lamps ensures the X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. corresponding side of the vehicle is illumina- X Press the N button. ted. The green N indicator lamp in the instru- X To switch on the standing lamps: ment cluster lights up. the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in X To switch off the front fog lamps: press position 0. the N button. X W The green N indicator lamp in the instru- Turn the light switch to (left-hand side X ment cluster goes out. of the vehicle) or (right-hand side of the vehicle). Only vehicles with front fog lamps have the fog lamps function. Rear fog lamp Combination switch The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your Turn signal vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country- specific regulations for the use of rear fog lamps. X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. Lights and windshield wipers X Press the R button. The yellow R indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. : X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the High-beam headlamps R button. ; Turn signal, right The yellow R indicator lamp in the = High-beam flasher instrument cluster goes out. ? Turn signal, left X Parking lamps To indicate briefly: press the combination ! switch briefly to the pressure point in the If the battery has been excessively dis- direction of arrow ; or ?. charged, the parking lamps or standing The corresponding turn signal flashes three lamps are automatically switched off to times. enable the next engine start. Always park X To indicate: press the combination switch your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit according to legal standards. Avoid the beyond the pressure point in the direction ; ? continuous use of the T parking lamps of arrow or . for several hours. If possible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp. Exterior lighting 111

High-beam headlamps only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or start the engine. press button :. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. The hazard warning lamps automatically X Press the combination switch beyond the switch on if: pressure point in the direction of arrow :. Ran air bag is deployed or In the Ã position, the high-beam head- Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a lamps are only switched on when it is dark speed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and and the engine is running. comes to a standstill The K indicator lamp in the instrument The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- cluster lights up when the high-beam head- matically if the vehicle reaches a speed of lamps are switched on. above 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full X To switch off the high-beam head- brake application. lamps: move the combination switch back i The hazard warning lamps still operate if to its normal position. the ignition is switched off. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Cornering light function High-beam flasher X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the engine. X Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow =. Lights and windshield wipers

Hazard warning lamps

The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The cornering light function can only be activated when the low-beam headlamps are switched on. Active: Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: turn the steering wheel press button :. Rif you are driving at speeds between All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a 25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) turn signal using the combination switch, and turn the steering wheel

Z 112 Exterior lighting

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short beam automatically. The system recognizes time, but is automatically switched off after vehicles with their lights on, either approach- no more than three minutes. ing from the opposite direction or traveling in front of your vehicle, and consequently switches the headlamps from high beam to Active light function low beam. The system automatically adapts the low- beam headlamp range depending on the distance to the other vehicle. Once the system no longer detects any other vehicles, it reac- tivates the high-beam headlamps. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel.

Important safety notes G The active light function is a system that WARNING moves the headlamps according to the steer- Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize ing movements of the front wheels. In this road users: way, relevant areas remain illuminated while Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians driving. This allows you to identify pedes- Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists trians, cyclists and animals. Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier Active: when the lights are switched on. In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that Adaptive Highbeam Assist have lights, or may recognize them too late. In

Lights and windshield wipers this or similar situations, the automatic high- General notes beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be restricted if there is: Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow You can use this function to set the head- Rdirt on the sensors or the sensors are lamps to change between low beam and high obscured Interior lighting 113

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Interior lighting on/off Overview of interior lighting X To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow :. The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up when it is dark and the light sensor activates the low-beam headlamps. If you are driving at speeds above approximately 16 mph (25 km/h): The headlamp range is set automatically depending on the distance between the vehicle and other road users. Overhead control panel If you are driving at speeds above approx- : p Switches the left-hand reading lamp imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other on/off road users have been detected: ; | Switches the automatic interior The high-beam headlamps are switched on lighting control on/off automatically. The K indicator lamp in = p Switches the right-hand reading the instrument cluster also lights up. lamp on/off If you are driving at speeds below approx- ? c Switches the interior lighting on/off imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: Interior lighting control The high-beam headlamps are switched off General notes automatically. The K indicator lamp in Lights and windshield wipers the instrument cluster goes out. The _ In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from indicator lamp in the multifunction display discharging, the interior lighting functions are remains lit. automatically deactivated after some time X To switch off: move the combination unless the SmartKey is in position 2 in the switch back to its normal position or move ignition lock. the light switch to another position. The color and brightness of the ambient light- The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc- ing may be set using the on-board computer tion display goes out. (Y page 205).

Automatic interior lighting control Headlamps fogged up on the inside X To activate/deactivate: press the | Certain climatic and physical conditions may button. cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This When the automatic interior lighting con- moisture does not affect the functionality of trol is activated, the button is flush with the the headlamp. overhead control panel.

Z 114 Replacing bulbs

The interior lighting automatically switches If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, on if you: you can recognize this by the following: the Runlock the vehicle cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again Ropen a door when you start the engine. For this to be R remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock observed, the lights must be switched on The interior light is activated for a short while before starting the engine. when the SmartKey is removed from the igni- Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of tion lock. You can activate this delayed vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure switch-off using the on-board computer that these function correctly at all times. (Y page 206). Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Manual interior lighting control Other bulbs X To switch the interior lighting on/off: G WARNING press the c button. Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot X To switch the reading lamps on/off: when operating. If you change a bulb, you press the p button. could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Crash-responsive emergency lighting Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. The interior lighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if its glass tube has been scratched. X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard The bulb may explode if: warning lamp button. Ryou touch it or Rit is hot Lights and windshield wipers X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the Ryou drop it SmartKey. Ryou scratch it Only operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. Only install spare Replacing bulbs bulbs of the same type and the specified volt- Important safety notes age. Marks on the glass tube reduce the service Xenon bulbs life of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube with your bare hands. If necessary, clean the G DANGER glass tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get rub it off with a lint-free cloth. an electric shock if you remove the cover of Protect bulbs from moisture during opera- the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con- tion. Do not allow bulbs to come into contact tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. with liquids. Never touch the parts or the electrical con- There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on that you cannot replace. Replace only the the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe- bulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs that cialist workshop. you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Replacing bulbs 115

If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the new bulb still does not light up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types Tail lamp : Backup lamp: W 16 W

Changing the front bulbs Removing/mounting the cover in the front wheel housing

Halogen headlamps : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W Lights and windshield wipers

X To remove: switch off the lights. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Slide cover : up and remove it. X To install: insert cover : again and slide down until it engages.

Bi-Xenon headlamps : Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Z 116 Replacing bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogen head- X Switch off the lights. lamps) X Open the hood. X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards, disconnect it and pull it out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;, push it down and secure it in place. X Attach housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages.

X Remove the cover in the front wheel hous- Side marker lamps (halogen head- ing (Y page 115). lamps) X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise Due to their location, have the bulbs in the and pull it out. side marker lamp changed at a qualified spe- X Press retainer ; up. cialist workshop. X Remove connector = with the bulb. Turn signals (halogen headlamps) X Pull the bulb out of connector =. X Insert the new bulb into connector = and into bracket for retainer ;. Make sure the bulb is positioned correctly. X Press retainer ; down. X Attach housing cover : and turn it clock-

Lights and windshield wipers wise until it engages. X Replace the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 115).

High-beam headlamps (halogen head- X lamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenon Switch off the lights. headlamps) X Open the hood. X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise until it engages. Windshield wipers 117

Changing the rear bulbs Windshield wipers Backup lamp Switching the windshield wipers on/off ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windshield can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windshield is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. X Switch off the lights. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on X Make sure that the roof is closed. the windshield after the vehicle has been X Open the trunk. washed in an automatic car wash, wax or X Turn and pull out buffer stop ;. other residues may be the reason for this. X Unclip catch : for side paneling =. Clean the windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the Lights and windshield wipers windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather. X Reach upwards into side paneling =, loosen and pull downwards until holder ? of the backup lamp is easily accessible. X Pull out bulb holder ?. X Pull out the bulb. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ?. X Insert holder ? until it engages. X re-install side paneling = precisely. X Clip in catch : for side paneling =. X Push in and tighten buffer stop ;. Combination switch 1 $ Windshield wiper off 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set to low sensitivity)

Z 118 Windshield wipers

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor windshield may be damaged by the force of set to high sensitivity) the impact. 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast the wiper blades changed at a qualified B í Single wipe/î To wipe the wind- specialist workshop. shield using washer fluid ! Always position the windshield wiper X Switch on the ignition. arms vertically before folding them away X Turn the combination switch to the corre- from the windshield. By doing so, you will sponding position. avoid damage to the hood. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate Replacing the wiper blades wiping frequency is set automatically according to the intensity of the rain. In the Å Removing the wiper blades position, the rain sensor is more sensitive X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the than in the Ä position, causing the wind- ignition lock (Y page 139). shield wipers to wipe more frequently. X Set the windshield wipers to position °. If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield X When the wiper arms have reached a ver- will no longer be wiped properly. This could tical position, turn the SmartKey to position prevent you from observing the traffic condi- 0 and remove it from the ignition lock tions, thereby causing an accident. (Y page 139). X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from Replacing the wiper blades the windshield. Important safety notes

G WARNING

Lights and windshield wipers If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you could be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, X make sure that you touch only the wiper Press both release clips ;. arm of the wiper. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = away from wiper arm ?. ! Never open the hood if a windshield wiper X : arm has been folded away from the wind- Remove wiper blade in the direction of A shield. arrow . Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield, the Windshield wipers 119

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade : with recess B on lug A. X Fold wiper blade : in the direction of arrow = onto the wiper arm, until retaining clips ; engage in bracket ?. X Make sure that wiper blade : is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. Lights and windshield wipers

Z 120 Windshield wipers

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield are jammed. wiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The windshield washer The spray nozzles are misaligned. fluid from the spray X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist work- nozzles no longer hits shop. the center of the windshield. Lights and windshield wipers 121

Useful information ...... 122 Overview of climate control systems ...... 122 Operating the climate control systems ...... 127 Setting the air vents ...... 134 Climate control 122 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information i The integrated filter filters out most particles of dust and soot and completely fil- i This Operator's manual describes all ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol- models and all standard and optional equip- lutants and odors. A clogged filter reduces ment of your vehicle available at the time of the amount of air supplied to the vehicle publication of the Operator's manual. interior. For this reason, you should always Country-specific differences are possible. observe the interval for replacing the filter, Please note that your vehicle may not be which is specified in the Maintenance equipped with all features described. This Booklet. As it depends on environmental also applies to safety-related systems and conditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, the functions. interval may be shorter than stated in the Maintenance Booklet. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26).

Overview of climate control systems General notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To prevent the windows from fogging up: Climate control Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control can only be operated when the engine is running. Optimum operation is only achieved with the side windows and roof closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 133). i When the weather is warm, ventilate the vehicle for a brief period. This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. Overview of climate control systems 123

Air-conditioning system control panel rol

Canada only : To set the temperature (Y page 129) ; To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 133) = To set the air distribution (Y page 130) ? To defrost the windshield (Y page 131) A To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) Climate cont B To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133) C To set the airflow (Y page 130) D To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)

USA only : To set the temperature (Y page 129) ; To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 131) 124 Overview of climate control systems

= To set the air distribution (Y page 130) ? To defrost the windshield (Y page 131) A To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) B To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133) C To set the airflow (Y page 130) D To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)

Notes on using the air-conditioning system Air-conditioning system Below, you can find a number of notes and recommendations to help you use the air- conditioning system optimally. RSwitch on cooling with air dehumidification using the ¿ button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). R Recommendation for air distribution in winter: set the O and ¯ settings.

Climate control Recommendation for air distribution in summer: set the P setting. ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop function During automatic engine switch-off, the climate control system only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require full climate control capacity, the ECO start/stop function can be deactivated by pressing the ECO button (Y page 147). Overview of climate control systems 125

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only : To set the temperature, left (Y page 129) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 131) = To switch the ZONE function on/off ? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 133) Climate control A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 129) C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133) D To set the air distribution (Y page 130) E To increase the airflow (Y page 130) F To reduce the airflow (Y page 130) G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 127) H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 129) 126 Overview of climate control systems

USA only : To set the temperature, left (Y page 129) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 131) = To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 131) ? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127) A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 132)

Climate control B To set the temperature, right (Y page 129) C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133) D To set the air distribution (Y page 130) E To increase the airflow (Y page 130) F To reduce the airflow (Y page 130) G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 127) H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 129)

Optimum use of dual-zone automatic ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func- climate control tion briefly until the windshield is clear again. Automatic climate control ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. The following contains instructions and rec- if there are unpleasant outside odors or ommendations to enable you to get the most when in a tunnel. The windows could oth- out of your automatic climate control. erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RActivate climate control using the Ã and R ¿ buttons or the Á button on the Use the ZONE function to adopt the tem- control panel of the climate control. The perature settings on the driver's side for indicator lamps in the Ã and ¿ but- the front-passenger side as well. The indi- tons or the Á button light up. cator lamp in the á button goes out. R RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). Use the residual heat function if you want to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when the ignition is switched off. The residual Operating the climate control systems 127

heat function can only be activated or deac- Dual-zone automatic climate control tivated with the ignition switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Y ECO start/stop function tion lock ( page 139). X To switch on: press the Ã button. During automatic engine switch-off, the cli- The indicator lamp in the Ã button lights mate control only operates at a reduced capa- up. Airflow and air distribution are set to city. If you require full climate control capa- automatic mode. city, the ECO start/stop function can be or deactivated by pressing the ECO button X Press the ^ button. (Y page 147). The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings are Operating the climate control sys- restored. tems X To switch off: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights Switching climate control on/off up. General notes When the climate control is switched off, the Activating/deactivating cooling with air supply and air circulation are also air dehumidification switched off. The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off climate control only General notes briefly If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- Climate control i Activate climate control primarily using midification" function, the air inside the vehi- the Ã button (Y page 129). cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The win- Air-conditioning system dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition function only briefly. Y tion lock ( page 139). The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func- X To activate: turn airflow control C clock- tion is only available when the engine is run- wise to the desired position (except posi- ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and tion 0)(Y page 123). dehumidified according to the temperature X To deactivate: turn airflow control C selected. counter-clockwise to position Condensation may drip from the underside of 0(Y page 123). the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction. 128 Operating the climate control systems

Activating/deactivating X To activate: press the ¿ or Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿ or Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿ or Á button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch- off feature. rol Climate cont Operating the climate control systems 129

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a the ¿/Á button malfunction. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The "Cool- ing with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic X To switch to manual mode: press the _ button. General notes or Automatic mode is only available with 2-zone X Press the I or K button. automatic air conditioning. The indicator lamp in the Ã button goes In automatic mode, the set temperature is out. maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow and Setting the temperature the air distribution.

Air-conditioning system Climate control The automatic mode functions optimally when the "Cooling with air dehumidification" X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- function is activated. If necessary, cooling tion lock (Y page 139). with air dehumidification can be deactivated. X To increase/reduce: turn control : If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu- clockwise or counter-clockwise midification" function, the air inside the vehi- (Y page 123). cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi- Only change the temperature setting in cle will also not be dehumidified. The win- small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, i If you turn control : counter-clockwise deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica- to the lowest temperature setting, air-recir- tion function only briefly. culation mode may activate automatically, Activating/switching depending on the outside temperature. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Dual-zone automatic climate control tion lock (Y page 139). Different temperatures can be set for the X Set the desired temperature. driver's and front-passenger sides. X To activate: Ã press the button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Ã The indicator lamp in the button lights tion lock (Y page 139). up. Automatic air distribution and airflow X To increase/reduce: : B are activated. turn control or clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 125). 130 Operating the climate control systems

Only change the temperature setting in S Directs air through the center, side and small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). footwell vents i If you turn controls : and B counter- ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents clockwise to the lowest temperature set- b Directs the airflow through the ting, air-recirculation mode may activate defroster, center and side air vents1 automatically, depending on the outside a Directs air through the defroster and temperature. footwell vents _ Directs the airflow through the Setting the air distribution defroster, center, side and footwell air vents2 Air-conditioning system i Regardless of the air distribution setting, X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- airflow is always directed through the side tion lock (Y page 139). air vents. You can only close the side air X Press one or more of the P, O, ¯ vents, by fully closing the adjuster on the buttons. side air vents (Y page 135). The corresponding indicator lamp lights up briefly. Setting the airflow The following air distribution settings can be selected: Air-conditioning system ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-

Climate control O Directs air through the footwell air tion lock (Y page 139). vents X To increase/reduce: turn control C P Directs air through the center and side clockwise or counter-clockwise air vents (Y page 123). i You can also activate several air distribution settings simultaneously. To do this, Dual-zone automatic climate control press multiple air distribution buttons. The X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- air is then directed through various vents. tion lock (Y page 139). X 2-zone automatic climate control To increase/reduce: press the K or I button. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139). X Press the _ button repeatedly until the Switching the ZONE function on/off desired symbol appears in the display. This function is only available with 2-zone The following air distribution settings can be automatic climate control on vehicles for selected: Canada. P Directs air through the center and side X To switch on: press the á button. air vents The indicator lamp in the á button lights O Directs air through the footwell air up. The temperature setting for the driver's vents

1 Canada only. 2 Canada only. Operating the climate control systems 131

side is not adopted for the front-passenger MAX COOL maximum cooling side. The MAX COOL function is only available in X To switch off: press button á. vehicles for the USA. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. The temperature setting for the driv- MAX COOL is only operational when the er's side is adopted for the front-passenger engine is running. side. X To activate: press the Ù button. The indicator lamp in the button lights up. X To activate: press off-road button Ù Defrosting the windshield again. The indicator lamp goes out. The previously General notes selected settings are restored. You can use this function to defrost the wind- When you activate MAX COOL, climate con- shield or to defrost the inside of the wind- trol switches to the following functions: shield and the side windows. Rmaximum cooling Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func- Rmaximum airflow tion as soon as the windshield is clear again. Rair-recirculation mode on Switching the "Windshield defrosting" function on/off Defrosting the windows X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Y Windows fogged up on the inside

tion lock ( page 139). Climate control X To activate: press the ¬ button. X Activate the ¿/Á cooling with air The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights dehumidification function. up. X 2-zone automatic air conditioning: activate The climate control system switches to the the Ã mode button. following functions: X If the windows continue to fog up, activate Rhigh airflow the ¬ "Windshield defrosting" function. Rhigh temperature i You should only select this setting until Rair distribution to the windshield and the windshield is clear again. front side windows Windows fogged up on the outside Rair-recirculation mode off X X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. Activate the windshield wipers. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes X Air conditioning: press the P or O out. The previously selected settings are button. restored. Air-recirculation mode remains X 2-zone automatic air conditioning: press deactivated. the _ button until the P or O or symbol appears in the display. X 2-zone automatic climate control: press i You should only select this setting until the Ã button. the windshield is clear again. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. Airflow and air distribution are set to automatic mode. 132 Operating the climate control systems

Rear window defroster General notes The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear window defroster switches off automatically after several minutes. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivating X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139). X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights up or goes out. Climate control Operating the climate control systems 133

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con- the ¤ button sumers are switched on. flashes. The rear win- X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading dow defroster has lamps, interior lighting or the seat heating. deactivated prema- When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window turely or cannot be acti- defroster can be activated again. vated. The roof is open. X Close the roof. When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can be activated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto- tion mode matically: R General notes after approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below approximately If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the 41 ‡ (5 †) windows can fog up more quickly, in particu- R after approximately five minutes if cool- Climate control lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu- ing with air dehumidification is deactiva- lation mode briefly to prevent the windows ted from fogging up. Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately Activating/deactivating 41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- midification" function is activated tion lock (Y page 139). X To activate: press the g button. Activating/deactivating the residual g The indicator lamp in the button lights heat function up. i Air-recirculation mode is automatically General notes activated at high levels of pollution (dual- The residual heat function is only available on zone automatic climate control only) or at vehicles for Canada. high outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activated automatically, It is possible to make use of the residual heat the indicator lamp in the g button is not of the engine to continue heating the station- lit. Outside air is added after about ary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after the 30 minutes. engine has been switched off. The heating time depends on the temperature that has X To deactivate: press the g button. been set. The indicator lamp in the g button goes Depending on the equipment level, the con- out. trol panel has either the Ì button or the Á button. 134 Setting the air vents

Activating/deactivating In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- please observe the following notes: tion lock or remove it (Y page 139). R X To activate: press the Ì or Á but- keep the air inlet grille on the hood and in ton. the engine compartment on the front- The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á passenger side free of blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves. button lights up. Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles i The blower will run at a low speed regard- in the vehicle interior. less of the airflow setting. i You can move the adjusters for the air i If you activate the residual heat function vents vertically or horizontally to set the at high temperatures, only the ventilation direction of the airflow. will be activated. The blower runs at medium speed. i For optimal climate control in the vehicle, X To deactivate: press the Ì or Á open the air vents completely and set the adjusters to the central position.

rol button. The indicator lamp in the Ì or Á button goes out. Setting the center air vents Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on Climate cont Rif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air X To open the center air vent: turn the vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in adjuster in one of center air vents : coun- the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There ter-clockwise. is a risk of injury. X To close the center air vent: turn the Make sure that all vehicle occupants always : maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- adjuster in one of center air vents clock- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to wise until it engages. another area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNING When AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot air can flow from the vents in the head restraints. This could result in burns in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Reduce the heater output before it becomes too hot. Setting the air vents 135

Setting the side air vents

You can adjust the blower output of AIR- : : Side window defroster vent SCARF vents using the AIRSCARF button (Y page 100). ; Side air vent X To open a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; counter-clockwise. X To close a side air vent: turn the adjuster in side air vent ; clockwise until it engages.

Setting the blower output of the AIR- SCARF vents Climate control G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air out- lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

Z 136 137

Useful information ...... 138 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ...... 138 Driving ...... 139 Manual transmission ...... 150 Automatic transmission ...... 151 Refueling ...... 158 Parking ...... 161 Driving tips ...... 164 Driving systems ...... 169 Driving and parking 138 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Useful information RChange gear in good time, before the tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red i This Operator's manual describes all area of the tachometer. models and all standard and optional equip- RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to ment of your vehicle available at the time of brake the vehicle. publication of the Operator's manual. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Country-specific differences are possible. RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator Please note that your vehicle may not be pedal beyond the point of resistance (kick- equipped with all features described. This down). also applies to safety-related systems and R functions. Ideally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), drive in program C. i Read the information on qualified special- After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can Y ist workshops ( page 26). increase the engine speed gradually and bring

Driving and parking the vehicle to full speed. Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles: Important safety notes RDo not drive faster than 85 mph The sensor system of some driving and driv- (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles ing safety systems adjusts automatically (1,500 km). while a certain distance is being driven after ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum the vehicle has been delivered or after engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. repairs. Full system effectiveness is not RChange gear in good time. reached until the end of this teach-in proce- i dure. You should also observe these notes on breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive New and replaced brake pads and discs only train on your vehicle have been replaced. reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- i Always observe the respective speed lim- sate for this by applying greater force to the its. brake pedal.

AMG vehicles with self-locking rear The first 1000 miles (1500 km) axle differential The more you look after the engine when it is Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking new, the more satisfied you will be with its differential on the rear axle. To protect the performance in the future. differential on the rear axle, carry out an oil RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi- change after a breaking-in phase of cle and engine speeds for the first 2,000 miles (3,000 km). This oil change pro- 1,000 miles (1,500 km). longs the service life of the differential. Have the oil change carried out at a qualified spe- RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt- cialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom- tle, during this period. mends that you use an authorized Mercedes- Benz Center for this purpose. Driving 139

Driving ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use the engine's full performance until it has Important safety notes reached operating temperature. G WARNING Only shift the automatic transmission to Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the the desired drive position when the vehicle pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. is stationary. Where possible, avoid spinning the drive

The operating and road safety of the vehicle is rking jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. wheels when pulling away on slippery Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are roads. You could otherwise damage the stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter drive train. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper- securely and as specified in order to ensure atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximum sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use engine speed is restricted in order to pro- loose floormats and do not place floormats on tect the engine. To protect the engine and Driving and pa top of one another. maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when the engine is G WARNING cold. Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: SmartKey positions Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels SmartKey Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably g more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk To remove the SmartKey of an accident. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P Do not switch off the ignition while driving. 1 Power supply for some consumers, such G WARNING as the windshield wipers If the parking brake has not been fully 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) released when driving, the parking brake can: and drive position 3 To start the engine Roverheat and cause a fire i Rlose its hold function. The SmartKey can be turned in the igni- There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart- the parking brake fully before driving off. Key for the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on. The engine cannot be started.

Z 140 Driving

KEYLESS-GO the Start/Stop button for approximately three seconds. This function operates inde- General notes pendently of the ECO start/stop automatic Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with engine switch-off function. a SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS- Key positions with KEYLESS-GO GO start function and a detachable Start/ Stop button. rking The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. When you insert the Start/Stop button into the ignition lock, the system needs approximately two seconds recognition time. You can then use the Start/Stop button.

Driving and pa Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only : Start/Stop button the case if you are not depressing the brake ; Ignition lock pedal. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the If you depress the brake pedal and press the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi- up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after ately. starting the engine or lights up while driving, A check which periodically establishes a radio see (Y page 245). connection between the vehicle and the If Start/Stop button : has not yet been SmartKey determines whether a valid Smart- pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example, being removed from the ignition. when starting the engine. X To start the vehicle without actively using the To switch on the power supply: press SmartKey: Start/Stop button : once. The power supply is switched on. You can R the Start/Stop button must be inserted in now activate the windshield wipers, for the ignition lock. example. R the SmartKey must be in the vehicle. i If you then open the driver's door when in Rthe vehicle must not be locked with the this position, the power supply is deactiva- SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 73). ted. Do not keep the SmartKey: X To switch on the ignition: press Start/ Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile Stop button : twice. phone or another SmartKey The ignition is switched on. Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal i The ignition is switched off when: foil Rthe driver's door is opened and R inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Ryou press Start/Stop button : once This can impair the functionality of the KEY- when in this position LESS-GO key. i The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding Driving 141

Starting the engine Important safety notes

G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Rget out and disrupt traffic. R = Start/Stop button USA operate the vehicle's equipment. ? Start/Stop button Canada Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Removing the Start/Stop button Rrelease the parking brake. Driving and parking Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into neutral. Rstart the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of reach of children. You can remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor- G WARNING mal using the SmartKey. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust X Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling lock ;. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop the engine running in enclosed spaces with- button from the ignition lock when you out sufficient ventilation. leave the vehicle. You should, however, always take the SmartKey with you when G WARNING leaving the vehicle. As long as the Smart- Flammable materials introduced through Key is in the vehicle: environmental influence or by animals can Rthe vehicle can be started using the ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or Start/Stop button parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk Relectrically powered equipment can be of fire. operated. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system.

! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine.

Z 142 Driving

i AMG vehicles: the exhaust flap of the X Depress the brake pedal and keep it exhaust system will be checked after every depressed. cold start. A resulting noise can be heard X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 140) during this process. once. i During a cold start, the engine runs at The engine starts. higher speeds to enable the catalytic con-

rking verter to reach its operating temperature. The sound of the engine may change during Pulling away this time. Manual transmission Manual transmission ! Change gear in good time and avoid spinning the wheels. You could otherwise dam- X Depress the brake pedal and keep it age the vehicle. depressed. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Driving and pa X Fully depress the clutch pedal. depressed. X Shift to neutral N. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. i You can only start the engine when the X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. clutch pedal is fully depressed. X Release the electric parking brake (Y page 162). Automatic transmission X Release the brake pedal. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gently The transmission position display in the depress the accelerator pedal. multifunction display shows P. i Follow the shift recommendations in the i You can also start the engine when the multifunction display for an economical transmission is in position N. driving style (Y page 151). i The vehicle locks centrally once you have Starting procedure with the SmartKey pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni- drop down. tion lock (Y page 139) and release it as You can open the doors from the inside at soon as the engine is running. any time. i You can also deactivate the automatic lock- To start the engine using the SmartKey ing feature (Y page 207). instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/ Stop button out of the ignition lock. Automatic transmission

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine G WARNING i The Start/Stop button can be used to If the engine speed is above the idling speed start the vehicle manually without inserting and you engage transmission position D or R, the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is Start/Stop button must be inserted in the a risk of an accident. ignition lock and the SmartKey must be in When engaging transmission position D or R, the vehicle. This mode for starting the always firmly depress the brake pedal and do engine operates independently of the ECO not simultaneously accelerate. start/stop automatic engine start function. Driving 143 i It is only possible to shift the transmission X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. from position P to the desired position if The vehicle is then held for about a second. you depress the brake pedal. Only then is X Pull away. the shift lock released. Hill start assist is not active if: X Depress the brake pedal and keep it Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a depressed. downhill gradient. X Shift the transmission to position D or R. Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, X Release the brake pedal. the transmission is in N. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. The electric parking brake (Y page 162) is RESP® is malfunctioning. automatically released. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- ECO start/stop function

ter goes out. Driving and parking Introduction i The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled away. The locking knobs in the doors The ECO start/stop function switches the drop down. engine off automatically if the vehicle is stop- You can open the doors from the inside at ped under certain conditions. any time. The engine starts automatically when the You can also deactivate the automatic lock- driver wants to pull away again. The ECO ing feature (Y page 207). start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions i Upshifts take place at higher engine of your vehicle. speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating Important safety notes temperature more quickly. G WARNING Hill start assist If the engine is switched off automatically and you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted Hill start assist helps you when pulling away automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It There is a risk of accident and injury. holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your foot from the brake pedal. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off This gives you enough time to move your foot the ignition and secure the vehicle against from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal rolling away. and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

Z 144 Driving

General notes SLK 55 AMG

SLK 250

: ECO start/stop display è : ECO start/stop display If the ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop If the è ECO symbol is shown in green in function switches the engine off automati- the multifunction display, the ECO start/stop cally if the vehicle stops moving. function switches the engine off automati- Every time you switch on the engine using the Driving and parking cally if the vehicle stops moving. SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO Every time you switch on the engine using the start/stop function is activated. SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO If the ECO start/stop function has been man- start/stop function is activated. ually deactivated (Y page 147) or a malfunc- If the ECO start/stop function has been man- tion has caused the system to be deactivated, ually deactivated (Y page 147) or a malfunc- the è ECO symbol is not displayed. tion has caused the system to be deactivated, The ECO start/stop function is only available è the ECO symbol is not displayed. in drive program C. SLK 350 i If automatic cylinder shut-off is active in drive program C, then 4, the number of active cylinders, is also shown in the è ECO symbol. This means that the engine is operating with four cylinders. If cylinder shut-off is not active, the engine will operate with all eight cylinders. In this case, 8, the number of active cylinders, is : ECO start/stop display shown in the è ECO symbol. If the engine has been switched off automatically by the ECO start/stop function, the Automatic engine switch-off è ECO symbol is shown in the multifunction display. Operation (SLK 250) Every time you switch on the engine using the The ECO start/stop function is operational SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO and the è ECO symbol is displayed in start/stop function is activated. green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit green. Rthe outside temperature is within the range that is suitable for the system. Rthe engine is at normal operating temperature. Driving 145

Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior The ECO start/stop function switches off the has been reached. engine automatically at low speeds. Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. X Brake the vehicle. Rthe system detects that the windshield is X Engage neutral N (follow gearshift instruc- not fogged up when the air-conditioning tion : to engage neutral N, if necessary). system is switched on. X Release the clutch pedal. R the hood is closed. The engine is switched off automatically. Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's Vehicles with automatic transmission

seat belt is fastened. d parking If the conditions for automatic engine switch- (SLK 250) off are not all fulfilled, the è symbol is lit If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, yellow. the ECO start/stop function switches off the engine automatically. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active

when the engine is stopped automatically. SLK 350 Driving an i The engine can be switched off automat- If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, ically a maximum of four times (first stop the ECO start/stop function switches off the and three subsequent stops) in succession. engine automatically. The è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in The ECO start/stop function is operational the multifunction display after the engine when: has been started automatically for the Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit è fourth time. When the ECO symbol is green. shown in green in the multifunction display, Rthe outside temperature is within the range automatic engine switch-off is again possi- that is suitable for the system. ble. Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- i The HOLD function can be activated if the ature. engine has been switched off automati- Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior cally. It is then not necessary to continue has been reached. applying the brakes during the automatic R stop phase. When you depress the accel- the battery is sufficiently charged. erator pedal, the engine starts automati- Rthe system detects that the windshield is cally and the braking effect of the HOLD not fogged up when the air-conditioning function is deactivated. system is switched on. Rthe hood is closed. Vehicles with manual transmission (SLK R 250) the driver's door is closed and the driver's seat belt is fastened. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active when the engine is stopped automatically. i The engine can be switched off automatically a maximum of four times (first stop and three subsequent stops) in succession. i The HOLD function can be activated if the engine has been switched off automatically. It is then not necessary to continue applying the brakes during the automatic

Z 146 Driving

stop phase. When you depress the accel- Automatic engine start erator pedal, the engine starts automatically and the braking effect of the HOLD Operation (SLK 250) function is deactivated. The engine starts automatically if: SLK 55 AMG Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button. If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N, R the ECO start/stop function switches off the you engage reverse gear R. engine automatically. Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the The ECO start/stop function is operational driver's door. and the è ECO symbol is displayed in Rthe vehicle starts to roll. green in the multifunction display, if: Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- green. ates from the set range. Driving and parking Rthe outside temperature is within the range Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- that is suitable for the system. shield when the air-conditioning system is Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- switched on. ature. Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low. Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior Vehicles with manual transmission (SLK has been reached. 250) R the battery is sufficiently charged. ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is Rthe system detects that the windshield is depressed. not fogged up when the air-conditioning The engine is started automatically if you: system is switched on. R Rthe hood is closed. fully depress the clutch pedal. R Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's depress the accelerator pedal. seat belt is fastened. Vehicles with automatic transmission If the conditions for automatic engine switch- (SLK 250) è off are not all fulfilled, the ECO symbol is The engine is started automatically if you: lit yellow. Rrelease the brake pedal in transmission i All of the vehicle's systems remain active position D or N when the HOLD function is when the engine is stopped automatically. not active. i The engine can be automatically switched Rdepress the accelerator pedal. off an unlimited number of times. Rmove the transmission out of position P. i The HOLD function can be activated if the i Shifting the transmission to position P engine has been switched off automati- does not start the engine. cally. It is then not necessary to continue i applying the brakes during the automatic If you shift the transmission from R to D, stop phase. When you depress the accel- the ECO start/stop function is available erator pedal, the engine starts automati- again once the è ECO symbol reap- cally and the braking effect of the HOLD pears in green in the multifunction display. function is deactivated. Driving 147

SLK 350 Rthe system detects moisture on the wind- The engine starts automatically if: shield when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function R by pressing the ECO button. the battery's condition of charge is too low. Rin transmission position D or N the brake i Shifting the transmission to position P pedal is released and the HOLD function is does not start the engine. not active. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, R you depress the accelerator pedal. the ECO start/stop function is available Ryou engage reverse gear R. again once the è ECO symbol reap- Ryou move the transmission out of position pears in green in the multifunction display. P. Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ driver's door. stop function R Driving and parking the vehicle starts to roll. SLK 250 Rthe brake system requires this. Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- ates from the set range. Rthe system detects moisture on the windshield when the air-conditioning system is switched on. Rthe battery's condition of charge is too low. i Shifting the transmission to position P does not start the engine. SLK 55 AMG X The engine starts automatically if: To deactivate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; and the è ECO sym- R you switch off the ECO start/stop function bol in the multifunction display go out. by pressing the ECO button. X To activate: : Rin transmission position D or N the brake press ECO button . ; pedal is released and the HOLD function is Indicator lamp lights up. not active. If all conditions for automatic engine Y Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. switch-off ( page 144) are fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in green in the R R you engage reverse gear . multifunction display. R you move the transmission out of position If not all conditions for automatic engine P. switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the Ryou switch to drive program S or M. è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the multifunction display. driver's door. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop func- Rthe vehicle starts to roll. tion is not available. Rthe brake system requires this. Conditions for the automatic engine Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi- switch-off (Y page 144). ates from the set range.

Z 148 Driving

i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ X To switch off: in drive program C, press stop function has been deactivated man- ECO button :. ually or as the result of a malfunction. The or engine will then not be switched off auto- X Switch to drive program S or M matically when the vehicle stops. (Y page 153). i The ECO start/stop function is activated Indicator lamp ; and the è ECO sym- each time the engine is switched on. bol in the multifunction display go out. SLK 350 X To activate: press ECO button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. If drive program S or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the

Driving and parking è ECO symbol is shown in green in the multifunction display. If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the è ECO symbol is shown in yellow in the multifunction display. X To deactivate: press ECO button :. If this is the case, the ECO start/stop func- Indicator lamp ; goes out. tion is not available. X To activate: press ECO button :. Conditions for the automatic engine Indicator lamp ; lights up. switch-off (Y page 144). i i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/ stop function has been deactivated man- stop function has been deactivated manually or as the result of a malfunction. The ually or as the result of a malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off auto- engine will then not be switched off automatically when the vehicle stops. matically when the vehicle stops. i i The ECO start/stop function is activated Each time the engine is started, the ECO each time the engine is switched on. start/stop function switches to the status (on or off) that was selected before switch- SLK 55 AMG ing off the engine. Driving 149

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine does not The HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. start. X Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 181) or DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171). X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. can be heard. X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before attempting to start the engine again. or X Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps Driving and parking in the instrument cluster go out. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or start. You cannot hear discharged. the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 301). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not run- There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical ning smoothly and is component of the engine management system. misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 150 Manual transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The coolant tempera- The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine ture gauge shows a is no longer being cooled sufficiently. value above 248 ‡ X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to (120 †). The coolant cool down. warning lamp may also X Check the coolant level (Y page 281). Observe the warning be on and a warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. tone may sound. If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fan may be faulty. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Driving and parking X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain and start/stop traffic.

Manual transmission Gear lever ! Only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. ! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear, you should always push the gear lever all the way to the right. You could otherwise shift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gear and damage the transmission. If you shift down at too high a speed (trans- Gear lever mission braking), this can cause the engine k Reverse gear to overrev, leading to engine damage. 1 - 6 Forward gears Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the clutch. Engaging reverse gear ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you could damage the transmission. X Stop the vehicle. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Shift to neutral N. X Move the gear lever firmly to the left beyond the point of resistance and then forwards. Automatic transmission 151 i The ECO start/stop function is not avail- Selector lever able when reverse gear is engaged. Overview of transmission positions Further information on the ECO start/stop function (Y page 144).

Shift recommendation

Selector lever Driving and parking X Shift gear according to gearshift recom- j Park position with selector lever lock mendation : when shown in the multi- k Reverse gear function display of the instrument cluster. i Neutral The gearshift recommendations assist you in h Drive adopting an economical driving style. The recommended gear is shown in the multifunction Transmission position and drive pro- display. gram display

Automatic transmission Important safety notes G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, : Transmission position display the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is ; a risk of an accident. Drive program display When engaging transmission position D or R, The current position of the selector lever is always firmly depress the brake pedal and do shown by the indicators next to the selector not simultaneously accelerate. lever. The indicators light up when the SmartKey is G WARNING inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators The automatic transmission switches to neu- go out when the SmartKey is removed from tral position N when you switch off the engine. the ignition lock. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle from rolling away by applying the parking brake.

Z 152 Automatic transmission

Transmission positions A Neutral B Park position Do not shift the transmission to N while driving. Otherwise, the auto- Do not shift the transmission into matic transmission could be dam- P Y position ( page 151) unless the aged. vehicle is stationary. The parking No power is transmitted from the lock should not be used as a brake engine to the drive wheels. when parking. Always apply the electronic parking brake in addi- Releasing the brake pedal will allow d parking tion to the parking lock in order to you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. secure the vehicle. to push it or tow it. The SmartKey can only be removed If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: if the transmission is in position P. only shift the transmission to posi- If the SmartKey is removed from tion N if the vehicle is in danger of Driving an the ignition lock, the selector lever skidding, e.g. on icy roads. is locked. ! Rolling in neutral N can damage If the vehicle electronics are mal- the drive train. functioning, the selector lever may 7 be locked in position P. To release Drive a locked selector lever, see "Man- The automatic transmission ual override of parking lock" changes gear automatically. All (Y page 158). forward gears are available. C Reverse gear Only shift the transmission to R Driving tips when the vehicle is stationary. Changing gear The automatic transmission shifts to the individual gears automatically when it is in transmission position D. This automatic gear shifting behavior is determined by: Rthe selected drive program (Y page 153) Rthe position of the accelerator pedal (Y page 152) Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal position Your style of driving influences how the automatic transmission shifts gear: Rlittle throttle: early upshifts Rmore throttle: late upshifts Automatic transmission 153

Double-clutch function As well as this permanent drive program M, you can also activate temporary drive pro- When shifting down, the double-clutch func- gram M (Y page 154). tion is active regardless of the currently selected drive program. The double-clutch function In AMG vehicles, drive program E is called reduces load change reactions and is condu- drive program C. cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen- E erated by the double-clutch function depends Economy Comfortable, economical rking on the drive program selected. C Controlled driving Efficiency Kickdown S Sport Sporty driving style Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. M Manual Manual gear shifting X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. Only change from automatic drive program E The automatic transmission shifts to a Driving and pa or S to manual drive program M when the lower gear depending on the engine speed. vehicle is stationary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. i When the engine is started, the automatic The automatic transmission shifts back up. transmission always switches to automatic drive program E (drive program C in AMG vehicles). Program selector button i AMG vehicles: when in drive program C General notes and with a small load demand, the engine will automatically only operate with four cylinders. This is the case in city traffic or on a country road, for example. This reduces fuel consumption. Cylinder shut- off is inactive in drive programs S and M, so that the engine will operate with all eight cylinders. i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 154).

Example: program selector button X Press program selector button : repeatedly until the letter for the desired gearshift program appears in the multifunction display. The program selector button allows you to choose between different driving characteristics. i Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 155).

Z 154 Automatic transmission

Steering wheel paddle shifters Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for example Rthe automatic transmission shifting up sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven at lower engine speeds and the wheels being less likely to spin Drive program S is characterized by the following: Rsporty engine and transmission settings Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear R : Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter the automatic transmission shifting up ; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter later

Driving and parking Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher In the manual drive program, you can change as a result of the later automatic transmis- gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters sion shift points or the selector lever (Y page 154). Further information about permanent drive Manual drive program M program M (Y page 155). Further information about temporary drive General notes program M (Y page 154). In this drive program, you can briefly change gear yourself by using the steering wheel pad- i The full range of functions for the steering dle shifters. The transmission must be in posi- wheel paddle shifters is available only once tion D. operating temperature has been reached. You can activate manual drive program M in i You can only change gear with the steer- the E and S automatic drive programs. ing wheel paddle shifters when the transmission is in position D. i As well as temporary drive program M, you can also activate permanent drive program M (Y page 153). Automatic drive program Further information about permanent drive program M (Y page 155). Automatic drive programs E and S Activating Drive program E (drive program C on MAG X vehicles) is characterized by the following: Shift the transmission to position D. X Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmission Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle Y settings shifter ( page 154). Manual drive program M is temporarily acti- Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from vated. The selected gear and M appear in the automatic transmission shifting up the multifunction display. sooner Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully Automatic transmission 155

Upshifting the transmission shifts to the optimal gear X Briefly press the selector lever to the right for the current speed. towards D+. i If the engine exceeds the maximum or engine speed when shifting down, the auto- X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle matic transmission protects against engine shifter (Y page 154). damage by not shifting down. In cases where it is permissible, the auto- i Automatic down shifting occurs when matic transmission shifts up to the next coasting. gear. i If the maximum engine speed on the cur- Deactivating rently engaged gear is reached and you If you have activated manual drive program continue to accelerate, the automatic M, it will remain active for a certain amount of transmission automatically shifts up in time. Under certain conditions the minimum order to prevent engine damage. amount of time is extended, e.g. in the case of Driving and parking lateral acceleration, during an overrun phase Shift recommendation or when driving on steep terrain. If manual drive program M has been deactivated, the automatic transmission shifts into the automatic drive program that was last selected, i.e. E or S. You can also deactivate manual drive program M yourself: The gearshift recommendations assist you in X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad- adopting an economical driving style. The rec- dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 154). ommended gear is shown in the multifunction or display. X Use the lever to switch the transmission X Shift to recommended gear ; according position. to gearshift recommendation : when or shown in the multifunction display of the X Use the program selector button to change instrument cluster. the drive program (Y page 153). M Downshifting Manual drive program is deactivated. The automatic transmission switches into X Briefly press the selector lever to the left the automatic drive program that was last towards D–. selected, i.e. E or S. or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 154). Manual drive program In cases where it is permissible, the automatic transmission shifts down to the next General information gear. In this drive program, you can permanently i For maximum acceleration, push the change gear yourself by using the steering selector lever to the left or pull and hold the wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until be in position D.

Z 156 Automatic transmission

i As well as this permanent drive program shown in the multifunction display of the M, you can also activate temporary drive instrument cluster. program M (Y page 154). AMG vehicles Switching on the manual drive program ! In manual drive program M, the automatic Manual drive program M is different from transmission does not shift up automati- drive program S with regard to spontaneity, cally even when the engine limiting speed responsiveness and smoothness of gear for the current gear is reached. When the

d parking changes. engine limiting speed is reached, the fuel Manual drive program M can be selected supply is cut to prevent the engine from using the program selector button. You can overrevving. Always make sure that the change gear using the steering wheel paddle engine speed does not reach the red area of shifters or the selector lever in manual drive the tachometer. There is otherwise a risk of engine damage. Driving an program M if the transmission is in position D. The selected gear appears in the multifunction display. X Press the program selector button (Y page 153) repeatedly until M appears in the multifunction display.

Upshifting : Gear indicator X Briefly press the selector lever to the right ; Upshift indicator D+ towards . Before the engine speed reaches the red area, or an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul- X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle tifunction display. shifter (Y page 154). X If the color in the speedometer multifunc- The automatic transmission shifts up to the tion display changes to red and the UP dis- next gear. play message is shown, shift up a gear.

Shift recommendation Downshifting X Briefly press the selector lever to the left towards D–. or X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 154). The automatic transmission shifts down to The gearshift recommendations assist you in the next gear. adopting an economical driving style. The rec- i If you brake the vehicle or stop without ommended gear is shown in the multifunction shifting down, the automatic transmission display. will shift down to a gear that will allow the X Shift to recommended gear ; according vehicle to accelerate or pull away again. to gearshift recommendation : when Automatic transmission 157 i For maximum acceleration, push the selector lever to the left or pull and hold the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission shifts to the optimal gear for the current speed.

Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use Driving and parking kickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off the manual drive program X Press the program selector button (Y page 153) repeatedly until E (C in AMG vehicles) or S appears in the multifunction display.

Z 158 Refueling

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. Driving and parking X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, immediately.

Releasing the parking lock manually at rear edge =, pulling it up and out at the same time. ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to X Press release button ? down and simul- remove the selector lever gaiter from the taneously move the selector lever out of center console. This could damage the position P. selector lever gaiter. The selector lever can now be moved freely until it is returned to position P. In the event of an electrical malfunction, it is possible to release the selector lever lock manually to move it out of position P. This is the case, for example, if you wish to tow the vehicle away.

Refueling Important safety notes X Apply the electric parking brake. G X Press the frame of selector level gaiter : WARNING together somewhat on the side edge at the Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel back and hold with one hand ;. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- X With the other hand, pry off the frame of sion. selector level gaiter : with a flat, blunt You must avoid fire, open flames, creating object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in cloth) sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Refueling 159

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted refueling. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. G WARNING ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection There is a risk of injury. system could be blocked by particles from You must make sure that fuel does not come the fuel can. into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing Do not get into the vehicle again during the and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic vapors. Keep fuel away from children. charge could build up again. If you or others come into contact with fuel, If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray observe the following: out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. RWash away fuel from skin immediately For further information on fuel and fuel quality

using soap and water. (Y page 348). Driving and parking RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Seek medical assistance with- Refueling out delay. General information RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assistance without delay. Do not induce vomit- The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto- ing. matically when you open or close the vehicle RImmediately change out of clothing which with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. has come into contact with fuel. The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow G WARNING next to the filling pump indicates the side of Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and the vehicle. ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Opening the fuel filler flap Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. Notify a quali- : Fuel filler flap fied specialist workshop and have the fuel ; To insert the fuel filler cap tank and fuel lines drained completely. = Tire pressure table ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the ? Fuel type to be used fuel system.

Z 160 Refueling

X Switch the engine off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and refuel. X

Driving and parking Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flap X Place fuel filler cap on the fuel filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages. X Close fuel filler flap :. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. The ; Check Engine warning lamp may also light up. A message appears in the multifunction display (Y page 231). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 251). Parking 161

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 139). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can- The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.

not be opened. or Driving and parking The SmartKey battery is discharged. X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 72). or X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 74).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Important safety notes Do not switch off the ignition while driving. G WARNING G Flammable material such as leaves, grass or WARNING twigs may ignite if they come into contact with If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Rrelease the parking brake. Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate- Rshift the automatic transmission out of park rials come into contact with parts of the vehi- position P or shift manual transmission into cle which are hot. Take particular care not to neutral. park on dry grassland or harvested grain Rstart the engine. fields. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip- G WARNING ment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available When leaving the vehicle, always take the with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never for example, the power steering and the brake leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. boosting effect. You will require considerably

Z 162 Parking

! Always secure the vehicle correctly Using the SmartKey against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- or its drivetrain could be damaged. tion lock and remove it. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against The immobilizer is activated. rolling away unintentionally: i The SmartKey can only be removed if the Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. transmission is in position P. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, Using KEYLESS-GO engage first gear or reverse gear. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 140). Ron vehicles with automatic transmission, The engine stops and all the indicator the transmission must be in park position P lamps in the instrument cluster go out. and the transmission position display in the i When the driver's door is closed, this cor- multifunction display must show P. responds to key position 1. When the driv- Rthe SmartKey must be removed from the er's door is open, this corresponds to key Driving and parking ignition lock. position 0: "Key removed". Rthe front wheels must be turned towards If you try to switch off the engine when the the curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi- transmission is not in position P, a message ents. appears in the multifunction display. A signal sounds. Switching off the engine Important safety notes Electric parking brake

G WARNING General notes The automatic transmission switches to neu- G WARNING tral position N when you switch off the engine. If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi- The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an cle, they could set it in motion by, for example: accident. Rrelease the parking brake. After switching off the engine, always switch R to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi- shift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual transmission into cle from rolling away by applying the parking brake. neutral. Rstart the engine. Vehicles with manual transmission In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R. an accident and injury. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- When leaving the vehicle, always take the tion lock and remove it. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The immobilizer is activated. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X Apply the electric parking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmission X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. Parking 163

The function of the electric parking brake is X To release: switch on the ignition. dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on- X Pull handle :. board voltage is low or there is a malfunction The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada in the system, it may not be possible to apply only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- the released parking brake. ter goes out. X If this is the case, only park the vehicle on i The electric parking brake can only be level ground and secure it to prevent it roll- released: ing away. Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the X Vehicles with automatic transmission: ignition lock (Y page 139) or shift the automatic transmission to posi- Rif the ignition was switched on using the tion P. Start/Stop button. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. Applying automatically

It may not be possible to release an applied The electric parking brake is applied auto- Driving and parking parking brake if the on-board voltage is low or matically: there is a malfunction in the system. Contact R a qualified specialist workshop. if DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or i The electric parking brake performs a Rif the HOLD function is keeping the vehicle function test at regular intervals while the stationary engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. In addition, at least one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: Applying/releasing manually Rthe engine is switched off. Rthe driver's seat belt is not inserted in the belt buckle and the driver's door is open. Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Releasing automatically The electric parking brake is released auto- X To engage: push handle :. matically when all of the following conditions When the electric parking brake is are fulfilled: engaged, the F (USA only) or ! Rthe engine is running. (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up Rthe transmission is in position D or R. in the instrument cluster. Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened. i The electric parking brake can also be Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. applied when the SmartKey is removed. If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.

Z 164 Driving tips

If your seat belt is not fastened, the following X Connecting a trickle charger. conditions must be fulfilled to automatically i You can obtain information about trickle release the electric parking brake: chargers from a qualified specialist work- Rthe driver's door is closed. shop. Ryou have shifted out of P or you have pre- If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than viously driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a i result of lack of use. The electric parking brake can only be X released automatically on vehicles with Visit a qualified specialist workshop and automatic transmission. seek advice. Ensure that you do not depress the accelerator pedal unintentionally. Otherwise the Driving tips parking brake will be released and the vehicle will start to move. General notes Driving and parking Emergency braking Important safety notes G The vehicle can also be braked during an WARNING emergency by using the electric parking If you switch off the ignition while driving, brake. safety-relevant functions are only available X While driving, push handle : of the electric with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, parking brake. for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably i The vehicle is braked for as long as the more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk handle of the electric parking brake is of an accident. pressed. The longer the electric parking brake handle is depressed, the greater the Do not switch off the ignition while driving. braking force. G WARNING During braking: If you operate mobile communication equip- R a warning tone sounds ment while driving, you will be distracted from Rthe Please Release Parking Brake traffic conditions. You could also lose control message appears of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada Only operate this equipment when the vehicle only) indicator lamp in the instrument clus- is stationary. ter flashes When the vehicle has been braked to a stand- Observe the legal requirements for the coun- still, the electric parking brake is engaged. try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic- tions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Parking the vehicle for a long period If you make a call while driving, always use hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than when the traffic situation permits. If you are four weeks, the battery may be damaged by unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop exhaustive discharging. before operating the telephone. Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers Driving tips 165 a distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per Certain engine systems are designed to keep second. the level of poisonous components in exhaust fumes within legal limits. Drive sensibly – save fuel These systems only work at peak efficiency if Observe the following tips to save fuel: they are serviced exactly in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. All work RThe tires should always be inflated to the on the engine must be carried out only by recommended tire pressure. qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz RRemove unnecessary loads. technicians. RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds. The engine settings must not be changed RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking. under any circumstances. Furthermore, all RObserve the service intervals in the Main- specific service work must be carried out at tenance Booklet or in the service interval regular intervals and in accordance with the display. Have all the maintenance work car- Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details ried in accordance with Daimler AG regu- can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Driving and parking lations. Fuel consumption also increases when driv- ECO display ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNING Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can Example: ECO display affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg- The ECO display provides feedback on how ment. economical your driving characteristics are. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci- The ECO display assists you in achieving the dent is greatly increased when you drink or most economical driving style for the selec- take drugs and drive. ted settings and prevailing conditions. Your Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow driving style can significantly influence the anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak- vehicle's consumption. ing drugs. The ECO display consists of three bars: RAcceleration Emission control RConstant G WARNING RCoasting Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust The percent value is the average value of the gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling three bars. The three bars and the mean value these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There begin at the value of 50 %. A higher percent- is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave age indicates a more economical driving the engine running in enclosed spaces with- style. out sufficient ventilation. The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel consumption. A fixed percentage count

Z 166 Driving tips

in the ECO display does not indicate a fixed i The ECO display summarizes the driving consumption. characteristics from the start of the journey Apart from driving style, consumption is to its completion. For this reason, the bars dependent on many factors such as, e.g.: change dynamically at the beginning of the journey. On longer journeys, there are Rload fewer changes. For more dynamic changes, R tire pressure carry out a manual reset. Rcold start For further information on the ECO display, R choice of route see (Y page 198). Relectrical consumers switched on These factors are not included in the ECO display. Brakes The evaluation of your driving style is carried Important safety notes out using the following three categories: Driving and parking RAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera- G WARNING tion processes): If you shift down on a slippery road surface in - The bar fills up: moderate acceleration, an attempt to increase the engine's braking especially at higher speeds effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. - The bar empties: sporty acceleration There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. RConstant (assessment of driving behavior at all times): Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. - The bar fills up: constant speed and avoidance of unnecessary acceleration and deceleration Downhill gradients - The bar empties: fluctuations in speed ! On long, steep gradients, you must RCoasting (assessment of all deceleration reduce the load on the brakes. To use processes): engine braking, shift to a lower gear in good - The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, time. This helps you to avoid overheating keeping your distance and early release the brakes and wearing them out exces- of the accelerator. The vehicle can coast sively. without use of the brakes. When making use of the engine braking - The bar empties: frequent braking effect, it is possible that a drive wheel may i not turn for some time, e.g. in the case of An economical driving style specially suddenly changing or slippery road surface requires driving at moderate engine conditions. This could cause damage to the speeds. drive train. This type of damage is not cov- To achieve a higher value in the categories ered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. Acceleration and Constant: Change into a lower gear in good time on long R observe the gearshift recommendations. and steep downhill gradients. This is espe- Rdrive in drive program E (vehicles with an cially important if the vehicle is laden. automatic transmission). i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g. on the highway, only the bar for Constant will change. Driving tips 167

Heavy and light loads RBrake occasionally to remove any possible salt residue. Make sure that you do not G WARNING endanger other road users when doing so. If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the driving, the braking system can overheat. This beginning and end of a journey. increases the stopping distance and can even RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle cause the braking system to fail. There is a ahead. risk of an accident. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never Servicing the brakes depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time. ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and you hear a warn- ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly ing tone while the engine is running, the results in excessive and premature wear to brake fluid level may be too low. Observe the brake pads. additional warning messages in the multi- Driving and parking If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy function display. load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but The brake fluid level may be too low due to drive on for a short while. This allows the air- brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. flow to cool the brakes more quickly. Have the brake system checked immediately. This work should be carried out at a Wet roads qualified specialist workshop. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain ! As the ESP® system operates automati- without braking, there may be a delayed reac- cally, the engine and the ignition must be tion from the brakes when braking for the first switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in time. This may also occur after the vehicle has the ignition lock) if the electric parking been washed or driven through deep water. brake is being tested on a brake dynamom- You then have to depress the brake pedal eter (maximum 10 seconds). more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from Braking triggered automatically by ESP® the vehicle in front. may seriously damage the brake system. After driving on a wet road or having the vehi- All checks and maintenance work on the cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten- brake system must be carried out at a quali- tion to the traffic conditions. This will warm up fied specialist workshop. Have this work car- the brake discs, thereby drying them more ried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- quickly and protecting them against corro- ter. sion. Have the brake pads replaced and the brake fluid renewed at a qualified specialist work- Limited braking performance on salt- shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- treated roads ter. If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt If the brake system has only been subject to residue may form on the brake discs and moderate loads, you should test the function- brake pads. This can result in a significantly ality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do longer braking distance. so, depress the brake pedal firmly when driving at a high speed. This improves the grip of the brake pads. A description of Brake Assist (BAS): (Y page 62) Z 168 Driving tips

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only your driving and braking accordingly during have brake pads/linings installed on your this break-in period. vehicle which have been approved for Excessive heavy braking results in corre- Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond spondingly high brake wear. Observe the to an equivalent quality standard. Brake brake system warning lamp in the instrument pads/linings which have not been approved cluster and note any brake status messages for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not in the multifunction display. Especially for of an equivalent quality could affect your vehi- high performance driving, it is important to cle's operating safety. maintain and have the brake system checked Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only regularly. use brake fluid that has been specially approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality Driving on wet roads standard. Brake fluid which has not been Hydroplaning

Driving and parking approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of an equivalent quality could If water has accumulated to a certain depth affect your vehicle's operating safety. on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: High performance and ceramic brake Ryou drive at low speeds. system for AMG vehicles Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. The high-performance brake system is only For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in available on AMG vehicles. conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, The AMG brake systems are designed for you must drive in the following manner: heavy loads. This may lead to noise when Rlower your speed. braking. This will depend on: Ravoid ruts. Rspeed Ravoid sudden steering movements. Rbraking force Rbrake carefully. Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity Driving on flooded roads The wear of individual components of the ! brake system, such as the brake pads/linings Do not drive through flooded areas. or brake discs, depends on the individual driv- Check the depth of any water before driving ing style and operating conditions. through it. Drive slowly through standing water. Otherwise, water may enter the For this reason, it is impossible to state a vehicle interior or the engine compartment. mileage that will be valid under all circum- This can damage the electronic compo- stances. An aggressive driving style will lead nents in the engine or the automatic trans- to high wear. You can obtain more informa- mission. Water can also be drawn in by the tion on this from a qualified specialist work- engine's air suction nozzles and this can shop. cause engine damage. New and replaced brake pads and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compen- sate for this by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt Driving systems 169

Winter driving especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could skid if you fail to adapt your G WARNING driving style. Always adapt your driving style If you shift down on a slippery road surface in and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing an attempt to increase the engine's braking weather conditions. effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. You should pay special attention to road con- There is an increased danger of skidding and ditions when temperatures are around freez- accidents. ing point. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- For more information on driving with snow ing on a slippery road surface. chains, see (Y page 313). For more information on driving with summer G DANGER tires, see (Y page 312). If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases section (Y page 312). such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the Driving and parking vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of Driving systems fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating Cruise control running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area General notes around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a Cruise control maintains a constant road window on the side of the vehicle that is not speed for you. It brakes automatically in order facing into the wind. to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali- vehicle is laden, you must select a lower gear fied specialist workshop at the onset of win- in good time. By doing so, you will make use of ter. the braking effect of the engine. This relieves Drive particularly carefully on slippery road the load on the brake system and prevents surfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering the brakes from overheating and wearing too and braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise quickly. control. Use cruise control only if road and traffic con- If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be ditions make it appropriate to maintain a stopped when moving at low speed: steady speed for a prolonged period. You can X Vehicles with manual transmission: store any road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). shift to neutral. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Important safety notes shift the transmission to position N. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise The outside temperature indicator is not control can neither reduce the risk of an acci- designed to serve as an ice-warning device dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruise and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. control cannot take into account the road, Changes in the outside temperature are dis- traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control played after a short delay. is only an aid. You are responsible for the dis- Indicated temperatures just above the freez- tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, ing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,

Z 170 Driving systems

for braking in good time and for staying in Storing, maintaining and calling up a lane. speed Do not use cruise control: Storing and maintaining a speed R in road and traffic conditions which do not X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. speed. in heavy traffic or on winding roads X : R Briefly press the cruise control lever up on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel- or down ?. erating could cause the drive wheels to lose X traction and the vehicle could then skid Remove your foot from the accelerator R pedal. when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, Cruise control is activated. The vehicle heavy rain or snow automatically maintains the stored speed. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. You can store the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). Driving and parking Cruise control lever i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. i Vehicles with manual transmission: RAlways drive at adequate, but not excessive, engine speeds. RChange gear in good time. RIf possible, do not shift down several Cruise control lever gears at a time. : To store the current speed or a higher Storing or calling up a speed speed G ; To store the current speed or call up the WARNING last stored speed If you call up the stored speed and it differs = To store the current speed or a lower from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- speed ates or decelerates. If you do not know the ? To deactivate cruise control stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- When you activate cruise control, the stored dent. speed is shown in the status indicator of the Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- multifunction display: tions before calling up the stored speed. If you RUSA only: e.g. CRUISE 55 Miles do not know the stored speed, store the RCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h desired speed again. Driving systems 171

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever toward Deactivating cruise control you =. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it stores the current speed or regulates the speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed.

Setting a speed

G WARNING Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment Cruise control lever until the vehicle has made the necessary There are several ways to deactivate cruise adjustments. control: Driving and parking Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to X Briefly press the cruise control lever for- a value that the prevailing road conditions and wards : . legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration or deceleration or of the vehicle could cause an accident and/or X Brake. serious injury to you and others. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- Ryou engage the electric parking brake ments (1 km/h increments): briefly Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph press the cruise control lever up : to the (30 km/h) pressure point for a higher speed or RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® down ? for a lower speed. Ron vehicles with manual transmission, you Every time the cruise control lever is shift to a gear that is too high, and as a pressed up or down, the last speed stored result the engine speed is too low is increased or reduced. Ryou shift the transmission to position N X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- while driving ments (10 km/h increments): briefly If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a press the cruise control lever up : past warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐ the pressure point for a higher speed or trol Off message in the multifunction dis- down ? for a lower speed. play for approximately five seconds. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored i When you switch off the engine, the last is increased or reduced. speed stored is cleared. i Cruise control is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. For exam- DISTRONIC PLUS ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed General notes to the last speed stored after you have fin- DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and ished overtaking. automatically helps you maintain the distance to the vehicle detected in front. DIS-

Z 172 Driving systems

TRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in the set speed is not exceeded. any non-approved way. On long and steep downhill gradients, espe- Any unauthorized modification to this cially if the vehicle is laden, you must select a device could void the user's authority to lower gear in good time. By doing so, you will operate the equipment. make use of the braking effect of the engine. i Canada only: This device complies with This relieves the load on the brake system and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is prevents the brakes from overheating and subject to the following two conditions: wearing too quickly. 1. This device may not cause harmful inter- If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front, ference, and DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. It maintains the preset distance to the vehicle in 2. this device must accept any interference front. received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk Driving and parking of a collision, you will be warned visually and Removal, tampering, or altering of the acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- device will void any warranties, and is not vent a collision without your intervention. An permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use intermittent warning tone will then sound and in any non-approved way. the distance warning lamp will light up in the Any unauthorized modification to this instrument cluster. Brake immediately in device could void the user's authority to order to increase the distance to the vehicle operate the equipment. in front or take evasive action provided it is safe to do so. Important safety notes For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar G WARNING sensor system must be operational. DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise Rpeople or animals control in the speed range between 20 mph Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop- (Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: ped or parked vehicles 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of Roncoming and crossing traffic you, it operates in the speed range between As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: warnings nor intervene in such situations. 200 km/h). There is a risk of an accident. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit- roads with steep gradients. uation and be ready to brake. As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the G WARNING responsible authorities. You can refer to the DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden- relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if tify other road users and complex traffic sit- questions are asked about this. uations. i USA only: This device has been approved In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: by the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Rgive an unnecessary warning and then The radar sensor is intended for use in an brake the vehicle automotive radar system only. Removal, R tampering, or altering of the device will void neither give a warning nor intervene any warranties, and is not permitted by the Raccelerate unexpectedly Driving systems 173

There is a risk of an accident. In particular, the detection of obstacles can Continue to drive carefully and be ready to be impaired if: brake, in particular when warned to do so by Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else DISTRONIC PLUS. covering the sensors Rsnow or heavy rain G WARNING Rinterference by other radar sources DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this parking garages braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi- warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect- of an accident. edly accelerate the vehicle to the stored In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and speed. try to take evasive action. This speed may:

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane Driving and parking is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- or an exit lane cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC lane that you overtake vehicles in the left- PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- hand lane ing or other similar situations: Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane Rwhen towing the vehicle that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand Rin the car wash lane If you fail to adapt your driving style, DIS- If there is a change of drivers, advise the new TRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of driver of the speed stored. accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account Cruise control lever the road, traffic and weather conditions. DIS- TRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: Rin road and traffic conditions which do not allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels to lose Cruise control lever traction and the vehicle could then skid : To store the current speed or a higher Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, speed heavy rain or snow ; To set the specified minimum distance DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow = To store the current speed or call up the vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or last stored speed vehicles driving on a different line.

Z 174 Driving systems

? To store the current speed or a lower pressure point for a higher speed or speed down ? for a lower speed. A To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing, is increased or reduced. maintaining and calling up a speed or X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- Important safety notes ments (10 km/h increments): briefly ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function press the cruise control lever up : past is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- the pressure point for a higher speed or cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- down ? for a lower speed. age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC Every time the cruise control lever is PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- pressed up or down, the last speed stored ing or other similar situations: is increased or reduced. Driving and parking Rwhen towing the vehicle X Remove your foot from the accelerator Rin the car wash pedal. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol- vehicle in front, but only up to the desired lowing conditions must be fulfilled: stored speed. R the engine must be started. It may take up When driving at speeds below 20 mph to two minutes after pulling away before (30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONIC DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. PLUS if the vehicle in front has been detected Ryour vehicle must not be secured by the and is shown in the multifunction display. If electric parking brake. the vehicle in front is no longer detected and RESP® must be activated. displayed, for example because it has Rthe transmission must be in position D. changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. You will hear a warning tone if this is the Rthe hood must be closed. case. Rthe driver's door must be closed when you i shift from P to D or your seat belt must be If you do not fully release the accelerator fastened. pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Inactive message appears in the multifunction dis- Rthe front-passenger door must be closed. play. The set distance to a slower-moving R the vehicle must not skid. vehicle in front will then not be maintained. Activating You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the accelerator X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards pedal. you =, or press it up : or down ?. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Pulling away and driving X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is ments (1 km/h increments): briefly deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. press the cruise control lever up : to the Driving systems 175

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove if changing lanes takes too long or if the dis- your foot from the brake pedal. tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards front becomes too small. you =. Stopping or G WARNING X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked speed to that of the vehicle in front. only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC d parking PLUS operates in the same way as cruise the voltage supply. control. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi- front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. cle occupant or from outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- It maintains the preset distance to the vehicle Driving an in front. partment, the battery or the fuses have If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk been tampered with. of a collision, you will be warned visually and Rthe battery is disconnected. acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre- Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, vent a collision without your intervention. An e.g. by a vehicle occupant. intermittent warning tone will then sound and There is a risk of an accident. the distance warning lamp will light up in the If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off instrument cluster. Brake immediately in DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle order to increase the distance from the vehi- against rolling away. cle in front, or take evasive action, provided it is safe to do so. Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 178). If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to is stationary. the speed you have stored. Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains Changing lanes stationary and you do not need to depress the brake. After a time, the electric parking brake If you wish to change to the passing lane (in secures the vehicle and relieves the service countries where traffic drives on the right, the brake. passing lane is the left-hand lane), DIS- TRONIC PLUS supports you if: Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill at R you are driving faster than 40 mph a sufficient distance behind the vehicle in (60 km/h) front. The specified minimum distance is set RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis- using the control on the cruise control lever. tance to a vehicle in front Ryou have switched on the corresponding turn signal RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted

Z 176 Driving systems

The electric parking brake automatically Storing the current speed or calling up the secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is last stored speed activated and: G WARNING Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's If you call up the stored speed and it differs seat belt is unfastened. from the current speed, the vehicle acceler- Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- ates or decelerates. If you do not know the matically switched off by the ECO start/ stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or stop function. brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- Rthe hood is opened. dent. Ra system malfunction occurs. Pay attention to the road and traffic condi- Rthe power supply is not sufficient. tions before calling up the stored speed. If you do not know the stored speed, store the If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec- desired speed again. tronics, a warning message may also appear

Driving and parking in the multifunction display. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Brake Immediately you =. X Immediately depress the brake firmly until X Remove your foot from the accelerator the warning message in the multifunction pedal. display goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS is deac- DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first tivated. time it is activated, the current speed is Shift to 'P' stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the previously stored value. X Shift the transmission to position P to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. Setting a speed DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. The warning message in the multifunction display Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment disappears. until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to The horn will also sound at regular intervals if the speed set. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you: X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre- Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's ments (1 km/h increments): briefly door and remove your seat belt. press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or Ropen the hood. down ? for a lower speed. The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact Every time the cruise control lever is that the vehicle has been parked while DIS- pressed up or down, the last speed stored TRONIC PLUS is still activated. The sound is increased or reduced. becomes louder if you attempt to lock the X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre- vehicle. The vehicle is not locked until DIS- ments (10 km/h increments): briefly TRONIC PLUS is deactivated. press the cruise control lever up : past i If the engine has been switched off, it the pressure point for a higher speed or cannot be started again until DISTRONIC down ? for a lower speed. PLUS has been deactivated. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. Driving systems 177

Setting the specified minimum distance DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the instrument cluster You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span Displays in the speedometer between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 177). Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently safe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Driving and parking When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two segments ; in the set speed range light up. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front, segments ; between speed of the vehicle in front : and stored speed = light up. i For design reasons, the speed displayed in the speedometer may differ slightly from the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Cruise control lever Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti- X To increase: turn control = toward ;. vated DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. X To decrease: turn control = toward :. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front.

: Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

Z 178 Driving systems

X Select the Assistance Graphic function using the on-board computer (Y page 203). In the Assistance menu of the on-board computer, you can also activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 203). Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated

Cruise control lever There are several ways to deactivate DIS- TRONIC PLUS:

Driving and parking X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you : Vehicle in front, if detected will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in ; Specified minimum distance to the vehi- the multifunction display for approximately cle in front; adjustable five seconds. = Own vehicle i The last speed stored remains stored until ? DISTRONIC PLUS activated you switch off the engine. X Select the Assistance Graphic function i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you using the on-board computer depress the accelerator pedal. If you accel- (Y page 203). erate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS You will initially see the stored speed for adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last about five seconds when you activate DIS- speed stored after you have finished over- TRONIC PLUS. taking. DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva- Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS ted if: G WARNING Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releases the electric parking brake the brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to a R speed below 20 mph (30km/h) by the system, you are driving slower than 15 mph provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does not (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, detect a vehicle directly in front. At this point, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detec- the driver must apply the brakes in order to ted slow down further and bring the vehicle to a RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® standstill. Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Driving systems 179

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles you in order to pull away and the front- traveling on a different line. The distance to passenger door is open the vehicle in front will be too short. R the vehicle has skidded Other vehicles changing lanes If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DIS‐ TRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS d parking

General notes The following contains descriptions of certain road and traffic conditions in which you must be particularly attentive. In such situations, Driving an brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi- deactivated. cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle Cornering, going into and coming out of a will be too short. bend Narrow vehicles

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi- DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle vehicle in front on the edge of the road, may brake unexpectedly or late. because of its narrow width. The distance to Vehicles traveling on a different line the vehicle in front will be too short.

Z 180 Driving systems

Obstructions and stationary vehicles Dynamic handling package General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the

Driving and parking detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals The adjustable damping system adapts to the an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC current driving conditions. The adjustment PLUS will not brake for these. depends on whether you have selected sport or comfort mode. Your selection remains Crossing vehicles stored even if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning The firmer setting of the suspension tuning in sports mode ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode if you want more direct contact with the road when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X If indicator lamp : is not lit: press but- DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect ton ;. vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat- Indicator lamp : lights up. You have selec- ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with ted the suspension for a sporty driving crossing traffic, for example, could cause style. your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. Comfort tuning Select comfort mode if you prefer a more comfortable driving style. X If indicator lamp : is lit: press button ;. Indicator lamp : goes out. You have selected the suspension for a comfortable driving style. Driving systems 181

HOLD function Activation conditions General notes You can activate the HOLD function if: Rthe vehicle is stationary The HOLD function can assist the driver in the R following situations: the engine is running or if it has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ R when pulling away, especially on steep stop function slopes Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt R when maneuvering on steep slopes is fastened R when waiting in traffic Rthe hood is closed The vehicle is kept stationary without the Rthe electric parking brake is released driver having to depress the brake pedal. Rthe selector lever is in position D, R or N on The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD vehicles with automatic transmission function deactivated when you depress the R accelerator pedal to pull away. DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Driving and parking

Important safety notes Activating the HOLD function

G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake X Make sure that the activation conditions pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. are met. Rthe electrical system in the engine com- X Depress the brake pedal. partment, the battery or the fuses have X Quickly depress the brake pedal further been tampered with. until : HOLD appears in the multifunction Rthe battery is disconnected display. There is a risk of an accident. The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off the HOLD function and secure the vehicle i If depressing the brake pedal the first against rolling away. time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- Deactivating the HOLD function cally in certain situations. To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC The HOLD function is deactivated automati- PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- cally if: ing or other similar situations: Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatic Rwhen towing the vehicle transmission: only when the transmission Rin the car wash is in position D or R. Ryou shift the transmission to position P on Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 181). vehicles with automatic transmission.

Z 182 Driving systems

Ryou apply the brakes again with a certain to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. amount of pressure until HOLD disappears The vehicle is not locked until the HOLD func- from the multifunction display. tion is deactivated. R you secure the vehicle using the electric i If the engine has been switched off, it parking brake. cannot be started again until the HOLD Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS. function has been deactivated. i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service PARKTRONIC

d parking brake. The electric parking brake automatically Important safety notes secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with activated and: ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's audibly the distance between your vehicle Driving an seat belt is unfastened. and an object. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto- PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace- matically switched off by the ECO start/ ment for your attention to your immediate stop function. surroundings. You are always responsible for Rthe hood is opened. safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park- Ra system malfunction occurs. ing space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking space, make sure that Rthe power supply is not sufficient. there are no persons, animals or objects in If there is a malfunction in the vehicle elec- the area in which you are maneuvering. tronics, a warning message may also appear in the multifunction display. ! When parking, pay particular attention to Brake Immediately objects above or below the sensors, such as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARK- X Immediately depress the brake firmly until TRONIC does not detect such objects when the warning message in the multifunction they are in the immediate vicinity of the display goes out. vehicle. You could damage the vehicle or The HOLD function is deactivated. the objects. In vehicles with automatic transmission: The sensors may not detect snow and other Shift to 'P'. objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. X Shift the transmission to position P to pre- Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic vent the vehicle from rolling away. car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a The HOLD function is deactivated. The truck or a pneumatic drill could cause warning message in the multifunction dis- PARKTRONIC to malfunction. play disappears. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on The horn will also sound at regular intervals if uneven terrain. the HOLD function is activated and you: PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when Rswitch the engine off, open the driver's you: door and remove your seat belt. Rswitch on the ignition Ropen the hood. Rmove the selector lever to position D, R or The sounding of the horn alerts you to the fact N on vehicles with automatic transmission that the vehicle has been parked while the Rrelease the electric parking brake. HOLD function is still activated. If you attempt Driving systems 183

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notes PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con- Top view sideration that are: The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani- slush. They can otherwise not function cor- mals or objects.

rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking Driving and parking R above the detection range, e.g. overhang- care not to scratch or damage them ing loads, truck overhangs or loading (Y page 287). ramps. Front sensors Center Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) Corners Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) Rear sensors Center Approx. 48 in (approx. 120 cm) : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand Corners Approx. 32 in (approx. side (example) 80 cm) Minimum distance Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm) Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the relevant warning displays light up and a warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below Side view the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Z 184 Driving systems

Warning displays Automatic transmission: Transmission Warning display position D Front area activated R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas is rolling back- activated wards P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicle Warning display for the front area approaches an obstacle, depending on the : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. Driving and parking vehicle From the: ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an = Segments showing operational readiness intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. The warning displays show the distance Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning tone for approximately two sec- warning display for the front area is located onds. This indicates that you have now on the dashboard above the center air vents. reached the minimum distance. The warning display for the rear area is located between the roll bars. Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. The selector lever position or selected automatic transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active when the engine is running. Manual transmission: Gear lever posi- Warning display : Indicator lamp tion ; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC If indicator lamp : is on then PARKTRONIC is Forwards gear Front area activated deactivated. Parking Guidance is also deacti- or vated. Neutral i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated Reverse gear or Rear and front areas when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the vehicle is rolling activated the ignition lock. backwards Driving systems 185

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately 20 seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button lights up. Driving and parking Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference. in the PARKTRONIC X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 287). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approx- The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or imately five seconds. ultrasound waves. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance G WARNING Important safety notes If objects are located above the detection range, Parking Guidance may provide steering Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aid instructions too soon. You may cause a colli- with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to meas- sion as a result. There is a risk of an accident. ure the road on both sides of the vehicle. A If objects are located above the detection suitable parking space is indicated by the range, stop and switch off Parking Assist. parking symbol. You receive steering instructions when parking. You may also use PARK- ! If unavoidable, you should drive over TRONIC (Y page 182). obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at a Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage replacement for your attention to your imme- the wheels or tires. diate surroundings. You are always responsi- When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Parking ble for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting Guidance is also unavailable. a parking space. When maneuvering, parking Parking Guidance may also display spaces or pulling out of a parking space, make sure not suitable for parking, e.g.: that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in which you are maneuvering. Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits Ron unsuitable surfaces

Z 186 Driving systems

Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces: Detecting parking spaces Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel Rthat are on straight roads, not bends Rthat are on the same level as the road, i.e. not on the pavement, for example. Parking Guidance may not detect flat curbs Parking tips: ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park- : Detected parking space on the left ing space as possible. ; Parking symbol RParking spaces that are littered or over- = Detected parking space on the right grown might be identified or measured incorrectly. Parking Guidance is automatically activated when you drive forwards. The system is RParking spaces that are partially occupied

Driving and parking operational at speeds of up to approximately by trailer drawbars might not be identified 22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the as such or be measured incorrectly. system independently locates and measures R Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. space being measured inaccurately. When driving at speeds below 19 mph RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC (30 km/h), you will see parking symbol ; as (Y page 184) warning messages during the a status indicator in the instrument cluster. parking procedure. When a parking space has been detected, an RWhen transporting a load which protrudes arrow towards the right = or the left : also from your vehicle, you must not use Parking appears. Parking Guidance only displays Guidance. parking spaces on the front-passenger side RNever use Parking Guidance with snow as standard. Parking spaces on the driver's chains or an emergency spare wheel moun- side are displayed as soon as the turn signal ted. on the driver's side is activated. To park on RMake sure that the tire pressures are the driver's side, you must leave the driver's always correct. This has a direct effect on side turn signal switched on until you have the steering instructions. engaged reverse gear. RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the Parking Guidance will only detect parking parking space after parking is dependent spaces: on various factors. These include the posi- Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel tion and shape of the vehicles parked in Rthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide front and behind it and the conditions of the Rthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than location. In some cases, Parking Guidance your vehicle may guide you too far or not far enough into a parking space. In some cases, it may also A parking space is displayed while you are lead you across or onto the curb. If neces- driving past it, and until you are approx- sary, cancel the parking procedure with imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. Parking Guidance. Driving systems 187

Parking Backing up into the parking space

Moving the vehicle into the stop position X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in the instrument cluster. X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift to reverse gear. Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift into position R. The multifunction display shows the Check Vehicle Surroundings Press 'OK' to Confirm message. X While the vehicle is stationary, turn the steering wheel in the specified direction

until the arrow is white and a warning tone Driving and parking sounds. X To reverse into the parking space: maintain the steering wheel angle and reverse carefully. X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, The vehicle has reached the position in which you need to countersteer. The Please Steer Wheel to the Right or Please Steer Wheel to the Left X Press the a button on the multifunction message appears in the multifunction dis- steering wheel to confirm. play. The multifunction display switches to Park- X To countersteer: while the vehicle is sta- ing Guidance. tionary, turn the steering wheel in the Depending on your distance from the park- specified direction until the arrow is white ing space, the Please Drive Backward and a warning tone sounds. message will appear in the multifunction X To reverse into the parking space: main- display. tain the steering wheel angle and reverse X If necessary, reverse towards the parking carefully. space. This is indicated by an arrow point- X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone, at ing backwards. the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds the Continue backing up until you hear a tone. continuous warning tone. Stop – the stop position has been reached. The Parking Guidance Finished mes- The arrow is white. sage appears in the multifunction display The Please Steer Wheel to the Right and a tone sounds. You may be asked to or Please Steer Wheel to the Left steer in a different direction and then message appears in the multifunction dis- change gear. In this case, further displays play. in the multifunction display will direct you to the final position.

Z 188 Driving systems

X Maneuver if necessary. Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style X Always observe the warning messages dis- with high cornering speeds or high rates of played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 184). acceleration Rif you are predominantly driving slower Canceling Parking Guidance than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than 112 mph (180 km/h) X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen- Rif you are currently using COMAND or mak- Y ter console ( page 184). ing a telephone call with it Parking Guidance is canceled immediately R and PARKTRONIC is deactivated. if the time has been set incorrectly Rin active driving situations, such as when Parking Guidance is canceled automatically if you change lanes or change your speed it is no longer possible to guide you into the parking space, or if a malfunction occurs. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue The parking space symbol goes out and a or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to Driving and parking Parking Guid‐ warning tone sounds. The recognize them at all. The system is not a ance Canceled message appears in the mul- substitute for a well-rested and attentive tifunction display. driver.

Warning and display messages in the ATTENTION ASSIST multifunction display Important safety notes X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, board computer (Y page 203). monotonous journeys, such as on highways. If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be It is active in the range between 50 mph warned no sooner than 20 minutes after (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). your journey has begun. You then hear an If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical indica- intermittent warning tone twice and the tors of fatigue or increasing lapses in con- Attention Assist: Take a Break! centration on the part of the driver, it sug- message appears in the multifunction dis- gests you take a break. play. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of X If necessary, take a break. fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking X Press the a or % button to confirm the following criteria into account: the message. Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering On long journeys, take regular breaks in good characteristics time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST of journey still detects increasing lapses in concentra- The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is tion, you will be warned again after restricted and warnings may be delayed or 15 minutes at the earliest. not occur at all: ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you continue your journey and starts assessing your Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur- tiredness again if: face is uneven or if there are potholes R Rif there is a strong side wind you switch off the engine. Ryou take off your seat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break. Driving systems 189

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the sensor is intended for use in an automotive é symbol appears in the multifunction radar system only. Removing, tampering display in the assistance graphics display. with, or altering the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Driving Assistance package any non-approved way. General notes Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to The Driving Assistance package consists of operate the equipment. DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171), Blind Spot Monitoring range of the sensors Assist (Y page 189) and Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 190).

Blind Spot Assist Driving and parking General notes Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle. It supports you from a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If you then switch on the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, you will also receive a visual and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring purposes. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radar Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft sensor system must be operational. (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. For Important safety notes this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radar G WARNING sensors in the rear bumper. Blind Spot Assist does not react to: If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may placing them in the blind spot area be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not R driving in the middle of their lane. This may be vehicles which approach with a large speed the case if there are vehicles driving at the differential and overtake your vehicle inner edge of their lanes. As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give Due to the nature of the system: warnings in such situations. There is a risk of R an accident. warnings may be issued in error when driv- Always observe the traffic conditions care- ing close to crash barriers or similar solid fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an i USA only: extended period next to long vehicles, such This device has been approved by the FCC as trucks. as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar

Z 190 Driving systems

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist Collision warning are integrated into the sides of the rear If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. corresponding turn signal, a double warning The sensors must not be covered, for exam- tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol- the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam- are indicated by the flashing of red warning age to the bumpers, have the function of the lamp :. There are no further warning tones. sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwise Switching on Blind Spot Assist not work properly. X Make sure that the radar sensor system (Y page 207) and Blind Spot Assist Indicator and warning display (Y page 204)are activated in the on-board computer. X Driving and parking Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational. If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on the corresponding side lights up red. This warning is Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in always emitted when a vehicle enters the front of your vehicle with camera :, which is blind spot monitoring range from behind or mounted at the top of the windshield. Lane from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, Keeping Assist detects lane markings on the the warning only occurs if the difference in road and warns you before you leave your speed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h). lane unintentionally. The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse If you select km on the on-board computer in gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- Assist is no longer active. tion (Y page 204), Lane Keeping Assist is The brightness of the indicator/warning active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If the lamps is adjusted automatically according to miles display unit is selected, the assistance the ambient light. range begins at 40 mph. Driving systems 191

A warning may be given if a front wheel Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the means of intermittent vibration in the steer- vicinity of the camera ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. Rthere are no, several or unclear lane mark- Important safety notes ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con- struction work G WARNING Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow rking recognize lane markings. Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: small and the lane markings thus cannot be Rgive an unnecessary warning detected Rnot give a warning Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. There is a risk of an accident. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge Always pay particular attention to the traffic Driving and pa R situation and stay in lane, in particular if the road is narrow and winding warned by Lane Keeping Assist. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane Switching on Lane Keeping Assist G WARNING X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not the on-board computer; to do so, select return the vehicle to the original lane. There is Standard or Adaptive (Y page 204). a risk of an accident. If you drive at speeds above 40 mph You should always steer, brake or accelerate (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep- the lines in the assistance graphics display ing Assist. (Y page 203) are shown in green. Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use. If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of Standard an accident nor override the laws of physics. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account occurs if: the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane R Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are you switch on the turn signals. In this event, responsible for the distance to the vehicle in the warnings are suppressed for a certain front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good period of time. time and for staying in your lane. Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ® The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the ABS, BAS or ESP . vehicle in the lane. Adaptive The system may be impaired or may not func- When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration if: tion occurs if: Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi- Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, cient illumination of the road, or due to the warnings are suppressed for a certain snow, rain, fog or spray period of time. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road ABS, BAS or ESP®. surface is wet) Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. Ryou brake hard.

Z 192 Driving systems

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lanes quickly. Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: R d parking you approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway. Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.

Driving an The warning vibration occurs later if: Rthe road has narrow lanes. Ryou cut the corner on a bend. 193

Useful information ...... 194 Important safety notes ...... 194 Displays and operation ...... 194 Menus and submenus ...... 197 Display messages ...... 212 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 244 On-board computer and displays 194 Displays and operation

Useful information times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not operating safely may cause an accident. i This Operator's manual describes all If the operating safety of your vehicle is models and all standard and optional equip- impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do ment of your vehicle available at the time of so. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. publication of the Operator's manual. For an overview, see the instrument panel Country-specific differences are possible. illustration (Y page 31). Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and Displays and operation functions. Instrument cluster lighting i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness con- Important safety notes trol knob.

On-board computer and displays The brightness control knob is on the bottom G WARNING left of the instrument cluster (Y page 31). If you operate information systems and com- X Turn the brightness control knob counter- munication equipment integrated in the vehi- clockwise or clockwise. cle while driving, you will be distracted from If the light switch is set to Ã, T or traffic conditions. You could also lose control L, the brightness is dependent upon of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. the brightness of the ambient light. Only operate the equipment when the traffic i The light sensor in the instrument cluster situation permits. If you are not sure that this automatically controls the brightness of is possible, park the vehicle paying attention the multifunction display. to traffic conditions and operate the equip- In daylight, the displays in the instrument ment when the vehicle is stationary. cluster are not lit. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. Coolant temperature display G WARNING G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or mal- Opening the hood when the engine is over- functioned, you may not recognize function heated or when there is a fire in the engine restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The compartment could expose you to hot gases operating safety of your vehicle may be or other service products. There is a risk of impaired. There is a risk of an accident. injury. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked Let an overheated engine cool down before at a qualified specialist workshop immedi- opening the hood. If there is a fire in the ately. engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the mul- ! A display message is shown if the coolant tifunction display. You should therefore make temperature is too high. sure your vehicle is operating safely at all Displays and operation 195

If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ The segments between the speed of the (120 †), do not continue driving. The vehicle in front and the stored speed light engine will otherwise be damaged. up. The coolant temperature gauge is in the instrument cluster on the right-hand side Operating the on-board computer (Y page 31). Under normal operating conditions and with Overview the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. On-board computer and displays The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display You should pay special attention to road conditions when temperatures are around freez- : Multifunction display ing point. ; Right control panel Bear in mind that the outside temperature = Left control panel display indicates the temperature measured X To activate the on-board computer: turn and does not record the road temperature. the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition The outside temperature display is in the mul- lock. tifunction display (Y page 196). Changes in the outside temperature are dis- You can control the multifunction display and played after a short delay. the settings in the on-board computer using the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Speedometer with segments The segments in the speedometer indicate which speed range is available. RCruise control activated (Y page 169): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 171): One or two segments in the set speed range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

Z 196 Displays and operation

Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume X = RCalls up the menu and menu bar ; 8 RMute 9 Press briefly: Back button : RScrolls in lists RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly: RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control a video scene System; see the separate oper- RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: ating instructions switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function number used 9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial On-board computer and displays memory : RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/next station or selects % Press and hold: an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in using rapid scrolling the Trip menu RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open Multifunction display a RConfirms a selection/display message RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call RExits phone book/redial memory 6 RMakes or accepts a call Example: vehicles with automatic transmission RSwitches to the redial memory : Transmission position (Y page 151) ; Drive program (Y page 151) = Text field ? Menu bar Menus and submenus 197

A Time RAudio menu (Y page 200) B Outside temperature or speed RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 201) (Y page 205) RDriveAssist menu (assistance) Text field = shows the selected menu or (Y page 203) submenu as well as display messages. RServ menu (Y page 204) X To show menu bar ?: press the = RSett menu (settings) (Y page 204) or ; button on the steering wheel. RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 208) Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds of inactivity. Trip menu i You can set the time using COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. Standard display Vehicles with manual transmission: instead of transmission position : and drive program ;, the time and the outside temperature or speed are shown. The following messages may appear in the On-board computer and displays multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation for man- X ual transmission (Y page 151) or Press and hold the % button on the when shifting manually (automatic steering wheel until the Trip menu with transmission) (Y page 154) trip odometer : and odometer ; is shown. XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 185) CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 169) Trip computer "From Start" or "From _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist Reset" (Y page 113) è ECO start/stop function (Y page 143) ë HOLD function (Y page 181)

Menus and submenus Menu overview Example: trip computer "From Start" : Distance = ; Press the or button on the steer- ; Time ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select a = Average speed menu. ? Average fuel consumption Operating the on-board computer (Y page 195). X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Depending on the equipment installed in the ing wheel to select the Trip menu. vehicle, you can call up the following menus: X Press the 9 or : button to select From Start or From Reset. RTrip menu (Y page 197) RNavi menu (navigation instructions) The values in the From Start submenu are (Y page 199) calculated from the start of a journey whilst

Z 198 Menus and submenus

the values in the From Reset submenu are X Press the = or ; button on the steer- calculated from the last time the submenu ing wheel to select the Trip menu. was reset (Y page 198). X Press the 9 or : button to select the The From Start trip computer is automati- current fuel consumption (not for AMG cally reset when: vehicles) and the approximate range. Rthe ignition has been switched off for more The approximate range that can be covered than four hours. depends on the fuel level and your current R999 hours have been exceeded. driving style. If there is only a small amount of R9,999 miles have been exceeded. fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows a C The From Reset trip computer is automati- vehicle being refueled instead of the cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or range. 99,999 miles. Digital speedometer ECO display On-board computer and displays

: Gearshift recommendation, manual trans- Y Example: ECO display mission ( page 151) or automatic transmission (Y page 154) X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ; Digital speedometer ing wheel to select the Trip menu. : X Press the 9 or : button to select Gearshift recommendation is not given on ECO DISPLAY. AMG vehicles. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If the ignition remains switched off for longer ing wheel to select the Trip menu. than four hours, the ECO display will be auto- X matically reset. Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer. For further information on the ECO display, see (Y page 165). Resetting values Displaying the range and current fuel consumption

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start" X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the function that you wish to reset. Menus and submenus 199

X Press the a button. Route guidance active X Press the : button to select Yes and No change of direction announced press the a button to confirm. You can reset the values of the following functions: RTrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer R"From Reset" trip computer RECO display : Distance to the destination i If you reset the values in the ECO display, ; Distance to the next change of direction the values in the "From start" trip computer = Current road are also reset. If you reset the values in the ? "Follow the road's course" symbol "From start" trip computer, the values in the ECO display are also reset. Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation On-board computer and displays Navigation system menu Displaying navigation instructions In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information on navigation, see the separate operating instructions. : Road into which the change of direction X Switch on COMAND (see the separate leads operating instructions). ; Distance to change of direction and visual X Press the = or ; button on the steer- distance display ing wheel to select the Navi menu. = Change-of-direction symbol When a change of direction is announced, you Route guidance not active will see symbol = for the change of direction and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator shortens towards the top of the display as you approach the point of the announced change of direction.

: Direction of travel ; Current road

Z 200 Menus and submenus

Change of direction announced with a Audio menu lane recommendation Selecting a radio station

: Road into which the change of direction leads : Waveband ; Distance to change of direction and visual ; Station frequency with memory position distance display i Station ; is displayed with the station = Recommended lane and new lane during a frequency or station name. The memory change of direction position is only displayed along with sta- ? Lanes not recommended tion ; if this has been stored.

On-board computer and displays A Recommended lane X Switch on the audio system or COMAND B Change-of-direction symbol and select Radio; see the separate operat- On multilane roads, lane recommendations ing instructions. can be displayed for the next change of direc- X Press the = or ; button on the steer- tion if the digital map supports this data. Dur- ing wheel to select the Audio menu. ing the change of direction, new lanes may be X To select a stored station: briefly press added. the 9 or : button. Recommended lane and new lane during a X To select a station from the station list: change of direction =: in this lane you will be press and briefly hold the 9 or : able to complete the next two changes of button. direction without changing lane. If no station list is received: Lane not recommended ?: you will not be X To select a station using the station able to complete the next change of direction search: press and briefly hold the 9 if you stay in this lane. or : button. Recommended lane A: in this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of i For information on changing waveband direction without changing lane. and storing stations, see the separate operating instructions. Other status indicators of the naviga- i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a tion system normal radio. RO: you have reached the destination or an For more information on satellite radio intermediate destination. operation, see the separate operating RNew Route... or Calculating Route: instructions. calculating a new route. ROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position). RNo Route: no route could be calculated to the selected destination. Menus and submenus 201

Operating an audio player or audio X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; media see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X To select the next/previous scene: briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a scene from the scene list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 or : button until desired scene : has Example: CD/DVD changer display been reached. Audio data from various audio devices or media can be played, depending on the equipment installed in the vehicle. Telephone menu X Switch on COMAND and activate audio CD Introduction mode or MP3 mode; see the separate operating instructions. G WARNING X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If you operate information systems and com- On-board computer and displays ing wheel to select the Audio menu. munication equipment integrated in the vehi- X To select the next/previous track: cle while driving, you will be distracted from briefly press the 9 or : button. traffic conditions. You could also lose control X To select a track from the track list of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. (rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9 Only operate the equipment when the traffic or : button until desired track : has situation permits. If you are not sure that this been reached. is possible, park the vehicle paying attention If you press and hold 9 or :, the to traffic conditions and operate the equip- rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all ment when the vehicle is stationary. audio drives or data carriers support this When telephoning, you must observe the function. legal requirements for the country in which If track information is stored on the audio you are currently driving. device or medium, the multifunction display X Switch on your mobile phone and will show the number and title of the track. COMAND, see the separate operating The current track does not appear in audio instructions. AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to audio source connected). COMAND; see the separate operating Video DVD operation instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu.

Example: CD/DVD changer display

Z 202 Menus and submenus

You will see one of the following display mes- X Press the 9 or : button to select the sages in the multifunction display: desired name. RPhone READY or the name of the network or provider: the mobile phone has found a X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold network and is ready to receive. the 9 or : button for longer than RPhone No Service: there is no network one second. available or the mobile phone is searching Rapid scrolling stops when you release the for a network. button or reach the end of the list. X If only one telephone number is stored Accepting a call for a name: press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or X If there is more than one number for a particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the On-board computer and displays number you want to dial. Example: incoming call X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- X Press the 6 button on the steering ing. wheel to accept an incoming call. or If someone calls you when you are in the Tel X To exit the phone book: press the ~ or menu, a display message appears in the mul- % button. tifunction display. You can accept a call even if you are not in the Redialing Tel menu. The on-board computer saves the last names Rejecting or ending a call or numbers dialed in the redial memory. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the ~ button on the steering ing wheel to select the Tel menu. wheel. X Press the 6 button to switch to the You can end or reject a call even if you are not redial memory. in the Tel menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name or number. Dialing an entry from the phone book X Press the 6 or a button to start dial- X Press the = or ; button on the steering. ing wheel to select the Tel menu. or X Press the 9, : or a button to X To exit the redial memory: press the switch to the phone book. ~ or % button. Menus and submenus 203

Assistance menu The assistance graphic displays the status of and information from the following driving Introduction systems or driving safety systems: RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188) RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 190) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67)

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake In the DriveAssist menu, you have the fol- PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles lowing options: with DISTRONIC PLUS. RDisplaying the assistance graphic X Press = or ; on the steering wheel (Y page 203) to select the DriveAssist menu. RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake X Press the 9 or : button to select oard computer and displays (Y page 203) PRE-SAFE Brake. RActivating/deactivating ATTENTION X Press the a button. On-b ASSIST (Y page 203) The current selection is displayed. RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist X To activate/deactivate: press the a (Y page 204) button again. RActivating/deactivating Lane Keeping When the PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, Assist (Y page 204) the multifunction display in the assistance graphic shows the æ symbol. Displaying the assistance graphic For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake, see (Y page 67).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select ATTENTION ASSIST. X Press the a button. The current selection is displayed. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X To activate/deactivate: press the a ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. button again. X Press 9 or : to select Assistance When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, Graphic. the é symbol appears in the multifunc- X Press the a button. tion display in the assistance graphics dis- The multifunction display shows the DIS- play. TRONIC PLUS distance display in the assis- For further information about ATTENTION tance graphic. ASSIST, see (Y page 188).

Z 204 Menus and submenus

Activating/deactivating Blind Spot RCalling up display messages Assist (Y page 212) R X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Restarting the tire pressure loss warning Y ing wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. system ( page 318) R X Press the 9 or : button to select Checking the tire pressure electronically Y Blind Spot Assist. ( page 318) R X Press the a button. Calling up the service due date Y The current selection is displayed. ( page 283) X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. Settings menu Further information about Blind Spot Assist (Y page 189) Introduction

oard computer and displays Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist

On-b X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select Lane Keep‐ ing Assist. In the Sett menu, you have the following X Press the a button. options: The current selection is displayed. RChanging the instrument cluster settings X Press a to confirm. (Y page 204) X Press : or 9 to set Off, Standard RChanging the light settings (Y page 205) or Adaptive. RChanging the vehicle settings X Press the a button to save the setting. (Y page 207) When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, the RChanging the convenience settings multifunction display shows the lane mark- (Y page 207) ings as bright lines in the assistance R graphic. Restoring the factory settings (Y page 208) For further information about Lane Keeping Assist, see (Y page 190). Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement for dis- Maintenance menu tance You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or kilometers. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Instrument Cluster submenu. In the Service menu, you have the following X Press a to confirm. options: Menus and submenus 205

X Press the : or 9 button to select the Selecting the permanent display function Display Unit Speed-/Odometer func- You can determine whether the multifunction tion. display permanently shows your speed or the You will see the selected setting: km or outside temperature. miles. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- X Press the a button to save the setting. ing wheel to select the Sett menu. The selected unit of measurement for dis- X Press the : or 9 button to select the tance applies to: Instrument Cluster submenu. RDigital speedometer in the Trip menu X Press a to confirm. ROdometer and the trip odometer X Press the : or 9 button to select the RTrip computer Permanent Display function. RCurrent consumption and the range You will see the selected setting Outside Temperature or Additional Speedome‐ RNavigation instructions in the Navi menu ter [km/h]/Additional Speedometer R Cruise control [mph]. R DISTRONIC PLUS X Press the a button to save the setting. RASSYST PLUS service interval display On-board computer and displays i The speed is highlighted in km/h or in Switching the additional speedometer mph conversely to your speedometer. on/off Only vehicles with manual transmission have Lights this function. Setting the daytime running lamps X Press the = or ; button on the steer- i ing wheel to select the Sett menu. This function is not available in Canada. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Instrument Cluster submenu. ing wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu. Additional Speedometer [mph] func- X Press a to confirm. tion. X Press the : or 9 button to select the You will see the selected setting: On or Off. Daytime Running Lights function. X Press the a button to save the setting. If the Daytime Running Lights function has been switched on, the cone of light and i Speed is displayed in mph. the W symbol in the multifunction dis- The Additional Speedometer [mph] func- play are shown in orange. tion allows you to choose whether the status X Press the a button to save the setting. area in the multifunction display always Further information on daytime running mph shows the speed in instead of the outside lamps (Y page 109). temperature. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Light submenu.

Z 206 Menus and submenus

X Press a to confirm. the surround lighting is switched off and X Press the : or 9 button to select the automatic headlamp mode is activated Amb. Light +/- function. (Y page 109). You will see the selected setting. Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: the X Press a to confirm. exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the after the engine is switched off. If you close brightness to a level from Off to Level 5 all the doors and the trunk lid, the exterior (bright). lighting goes off after 15 seconds. X Press the a or % button to save the i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, setting. when the surround lighting and delayed switch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol- Activating/deactivating surround light- lowing light up: ing and exterior lighting delayed switch- RParking lamps off RFront fog lamps X Press the = or ; button on the steer- RLow-beam headlamps ing wheel to select the Sett menu. RDaytime running lamps On-board computer and displays X Press the : or 9 button to select the R Light submenu. Side marker lamps R X Press a to confirm. Surround lighting in the exterior mirrors X Press the : or 9 button to select the Activating/deactivating the interior light- Surround Lighting function. ing delayed switch-off When the Surround Lighting function is If you activate the Interior Lighting activated, the light cone and the area Delay function, the interior lighting remains around the vehicle are displayed in orange on for 20 seconds after you remove the in the multifunction display. SmartKey from the ignition lock. X a Press the button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte- ing wheel to select the Sett menu. rior lighting temporarily: X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart- Lights submenu. Key to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Press a to confirm. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Press the : or 9 button to select the tion lock. Interior Lighting Delay function. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is If the Interior Lighting Delay function deactivated. has been switched on, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange in the multifunction Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is display. reactivated the next time you start the X engine. Press the a button to save the setting. If you have activated the Surround Light‐ ing function and the light switch is set to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Rsurround lighting: the exterior lighting remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, Menus and submenus 207

Vehicle X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to select Activating/deactivating the automatic Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. door locking mechanism You will see the selected setting: Enabled X Press the = or ; button on the steer- or Disabled. Sett ing wheel to select the menu. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Vehicle submenu. The following systems are switched off when the radar sensor system is deactivated: X Press a to confirm. R Y X Press the : or 9 button to select the DISTRONIC PLUS ( page 171) R Automatic Door Lock function. BAS PLUS (Y page 62) When the Automatic Door Lock function RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 67) is activated, the left-hand vehicle door is displayed in orange in the multifunction Convenience display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature If you activate the Automatic Door Lock On-board computer and displays G function, the vehicle is centrally locked above WARNING a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts For further information on the automatic lock- the steering wheel, you and other vehicle ing feature, see (Y page 79). occupants – particularly children – could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. Activating/deactivating the acoustic While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak- locking verification signal ing adjustments, make sure that no one has If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, any body parts in the sweep of the steering an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the wheel. vehicle. If somebody becomes trapped: X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Rpress one of the memory function position ing wheel to select the Sett menu. buttons, or X Press the : or 9 button to select the Rmove the switch for steering wheel adjust- Vehicle submenu. ment in the opposite direction to that in X Press a to confirm. which the steering wheel is moving. X Press the : or 9 button to select the The adjustment process is stopped. Acoustic Lock function. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, X Press the = or ; button on the steer- the & symbol in the multifunction dis- ing wheel to select the Sett menu. play lights up orange. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the a button to save the setting. Convenience submenu. X Press a to confirm. Activating/deactivating the radar sensor X : 9 system Press the or button to select the Easy Entry/Exit function. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activa- ing wheel to select the Settings menu. ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayed X Press the : or 9 button to select the in orange in the multifunction display. Vehicle submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting.

Z 208 Menus and submenus

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT displayed in orange in the multifunction feature (Y page 101). display. X Switching the belt adjustment on/off Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Restoring the factory settings ing wheel to select the Sett menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- Convenience submenu. ing wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. Belt Adjustment function. X Press a to confirm. When the Belt Adjustment function is The Reset All Settings? message activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed appears. in orange in the multifunction display. X Press the : or 9 button to select No X Press the a button to save the setting. or Yes. For further information on belt adjustment, X Press the a button to confirm the selec-

On-board computer and displays see (Y page 45). tion. If you have selected Yes, the multifunction Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock- display shows a confirmation message. ing feature on/off For safety reasons, the Daytime Running This function is only available on vehicles with Lights function in the Light submenu is only Y the memory function ( page 106). reset if the vehicle is stationary. This function is only available in Canada. When you activate the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded AMG menu in AMG vehicles in when the vehicle is locked. AMG displays If you unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the exterior mirrors fold out again. If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror Folding function and you fold in the exterior mirrors using the button on the door (Y page 104), they will not fold out automatically. The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out using the button on the door. : Digital speedometer X Press the = or ; button on the steer- ; Gear indicator ing wheel to select the Sett menu. = Upshift indicator X Press the : or 9 button to select the ? Convenience submenu. Engine oil temperature A X Press a to confirm. Coolant temperature B Transmission fluid temperature X Press the : or 9 button to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is to select the AMG menu. activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the engine has reached the overrevving range when in the manual gearshift program. Menus and submenus 209

Upshift indicator UP = fades out other You can start the RACETIMER when the messages until you have shifted up. engine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi- If the engine oil temperature is below tion 2 in the ignition lock. 160 ‡(71 †), oil temperature ? is shown X Press = or ; on the steering wheel in blue. Avoid driving at full engine output to select the AMG menu. during this time. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the If the transmission fluid temperature is RACETIMER is shown. B below 122 ‡(50 †), oil temperature is X To start: press the a button to start the shown in blue. Avoid driving at full engine RACETIMER. output during this time. Displaying the intermediate time SETUP On-board computer and displays

X Press the = or ; button to select : Drive program (C/S/M) Interm. Time. ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) or SPORT handling X Press a to confirm. mode (SPORT) The intermediate time is displayed for five SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® seconds. (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the Starting a new lap SPORT handling mode. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until SETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER : RACETIMER Displaying and starting RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a = Lap closed race circuit. Do not use the function on X a New Lap public roads. Press to confirm . i It is possible to store a maximum of six- teen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap.

: Lap ; RACETIMER

Z 210 Menus and submenus

Stopping the RACETIMER Overall statistics

X Press the % button on the steering : RACETIMER overall evaluation wheel. ; Total time driven X Press a to confirm Yes. = Average speed The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you ? Distance covered stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to A Maximum speed position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the This function is shown if you have stored at SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. a Start to confirm , timing is continued. X On-board computer and displays Press = or ; on the steering wheel Resetting the current lap to select the AMG menu. X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the X Press the = or ; button to select overall evaluation is shown. Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Lap statistics Deleting all laps

: Lap ; Lap time If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is = Average lap speed reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are ? Lap length deleted. A Top speed during lap You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Menus and submenus 211

This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. On-board computer and displays

Z 212 Display messages

Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in the multifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on: RHOLD function (Y page 181) R Y

oard computer and displays Parking ( page 161)

Hiding display messages On-b X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up the display messages: X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high- priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Display messages 213

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill Currently Unavail‐ start assist are temporarily unavailable. able See Opera‐ ® tor's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without the On-board computer and displays functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. !÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See ® Operator's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE Brake may also have failed. The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.

Z 214 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable. Currently Unavail‐ ® able See Opera‐ BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE Brake may also have failed. tor's Manual In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the oard computer and displays instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. On-b The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 215

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See ® Operator's Manual BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. oard computer and displays If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. On-b X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE- SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due ÷ to a malfunction. Inoperative See BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. Operator's Manual In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp F(USA flashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automatic only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 162). only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually. Parking Brake

Z 216 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 162). The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. F(USA ! The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. only) (Canada To apply: only) X Switch the ignition off. Parking Brake See X Operator's Manual Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X

oard computer and displays Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. On-b The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 162). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 217

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp

continues to flash: oard computer and displays X Do not drive on.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 333). On-b X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Turn the front wheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 218 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. oard computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake: On-b X Vehicles with manual transmission (automatic emergency release): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 162). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parking brake, the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: switch off the ignition. The electric parking brake is applied automatically. You can release the electrical parking brake with the emergency release; to do so insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerate slightly more when pulling away. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P as the electric parking brake is not being applied automatically. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. i If you do not wish the electric parking brake to be applied, leave the ignition switched on, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed. Excep- tion: when having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised (Y page 305). Display messages 219

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA F(USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or only) released. It then goes out or remains lit. Parking Brake Inop‐ The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of over- erative voltage or undervoltage. X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake:

X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. oard computer and displays X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: On-b X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the electric parking brake still cannot be applied: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights F(USA up. only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the igni- only) tion was switched off. Turn On the Igni‐ X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. tion to Release X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. the Parking Brake

Z 220 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. $(USA In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning only)J(Canada lamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone only) sounds. Check Brake Fluid G WARNING Level The braking effect may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). oard computer and displays X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction. On-b A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function or DIS- $(USA TRONIC PLUS is active. only)J(Canada A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock only) the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. Brake Immediately You cannot start the engine. X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress the brake pedal firmly and hold until the display message disappears. X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it (Y page 161). You can restart the engine. # The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pad Wear G One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning. mbrace Inoperative X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupant Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages 221

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

PRE-SAFE PRE‑SAFE® Brake is deactivated or temporarily inoperative. Pos- Functions Cur‐ sible causes are: rently Limited See Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Operator's Manual Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. oard computer and displays PRE‑SAFE® Brake is operational again. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying On-b attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper (Y page 287). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 65).

PRE-SAFE PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUS or Functions Limited the distance warning signal may also have failed. See Operator's Man‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ual 6 The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. SRS Malfunction Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40).

Z 222 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus- Front Left Malfunc‐ ter. tion Service G Required or Front WARNING Right Malfunction The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- Service Required gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

There is a malfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag. 6 6

oard computer and displays The warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction G WARNING

On-b Service Required The left or right head bag may either be triggered unintentionally or Right Side Cur‐ or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. tain Airbag Mal‐ There is an increased risk of injury. function Service X Required Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 223

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front-Passenger The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are Airbag Disabled deactivated during the journey, although: See Operator's Man‐ Ran adult ual or Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front- passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may not be triggered in the event of an accident. oard computer and displays There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. On-b X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated the front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 49). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.

Z 224 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 49).

Front-Passenger The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are Airbag Enabled enabled during the journey, even though: See Operator's Man‐ Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys- ual tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. oard computer and displays G WARNING

On-b The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may be triggered unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has deactivated the front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 49). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ Display messages 225

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multifunction display. If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. oard computer and displays For further information about the Occupant Classification System, see (Y page 49). On-b

Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Corner‐ (Y page 115). ing Light or Check Right Cornering or Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Low (Y page 115). Beam or Check Right Low Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Rear Left (Y page 115). Turn Signal or Check Rear Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 226 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 115). Turn Signal or Check Front Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. Check Left Mirror X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal oard computer and displays b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Center Brake On-b Lamp b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Brake Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Tail and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail and Brake Lamps b The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left High (Y page 115). Beam or Check Right High Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. License Plate Lamp b The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Left Fog Lamp or Check Right Fog Lamp Display messages 227

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The rear fog lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Rear Fog Lamp b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 115). Parking Lamp or Check Front Right or Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Backup Light Y

( page 115). oard computer and displays or X

Visit a qualified specialist workshop. On-b b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Front Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front Right Sidemarker Lamp b The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Rear Left Sidemarker Lamp or Check Rear Right Sidemarker Lamp b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Daytime (Y page 115). Running Light or Check Right Day‐ or time Running Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The active light function is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Active Headlamps Inoperative b The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator's Manual

Z 228 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The light sensor is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auto Lamp Function Inoperative b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper- oard computer and displays Assist Currently ative. Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.

On-b Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Clean the windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. ! Check Coolant Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine Level See Opera‐ cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. tor's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 281). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. Display messages 229

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant is too hot. A warning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING Engine Off Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). oard computer and displays X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. On-b X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other- wise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †). # The battery is not being charged. A warning tone also sounds. See Operator's Man‐ ual Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 230 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. Stop Vehicle See A warning tone also sounds. Operator's Manual X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Observe the instructions in the display message # See Operator's Manual. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as Start Engine See the rear window defroster and interior lighting. Operator's Manual X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis- On-board computer and displays tance. The battery is being charged. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. A warning tone also sounds. Check Engine Oil X At Next Refueling Check the oil level at the latest when next refueling (Y page 279). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 280). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. X Check the oil level at the latest when next refueling Check Engine Oil (Y page 279). Level (Add 1 quart) X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 280). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Display messages 231

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Fuel Level Low C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: oard computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. On-b

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone Attention Assist: also sounds. Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Attention Assist Inoperative ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. A warning tone also sounds. Off X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 181).

Radar Sensors Deac‐ The radar sensor system is deactivated. tivated See Opera‐ X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 207). tor's Manual

Z 232 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Assist Currently Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying oard computer and displays attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161).

On-b X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist is faulty. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Unavail‐ Rthe sensors are dirty. able See Opera‐ Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. tor's Manual Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Clean the sensors (Y page 287). X Restart the engine. Display messages 233

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist is defective. Inoperative The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 185). Inoperative X Restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are: Canceled R

the vehicle is skidding. oard computer and displays Rthe sensors are dirty. R

a malfunction has occurred. On-b A warning tone also sounds. X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 185). If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Clean the sensors (Y page 287). X Restart the engine. If the parking space symbol still does not appear in the multifunction display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h): X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longer following the recommended path. X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messages in the multifunction display.

Parking Guidance The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds. Finished The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 171). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo- Available rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171).

Z 234 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS Cur‐ DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: rently Unavailable Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. See Operator's Man‐ R ual the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper are dirty. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. A warning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears.

oard computer and displays DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: On-b X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Clean the sensors in the radiator trim and the bumper (Y page 287). X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Inoperative BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be inoperative as well. A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS Sus‐ You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no pended longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. - - - mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171). Display messages 235

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Cruise Control Cruise control is defective. Inoperative A warning tone also sounds. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. - - - mph You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 169). On-board computer and displays

Z 236 Display messages

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Canada only: Tire Pressure Soon The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss in pressure. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.

oard computer and displays Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R

On-b the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 292). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 318).

Check Tire Pressure Canada only: Then Restart Run The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes- Flat Indicator sage and has not been restarted since. X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 318).

Run Flat Indicator Canada only: Inoperative The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please Correct The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire Tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 318). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 321). Display messages 237

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Tires The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. oard computer and displays There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking On-b maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 292). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 318). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The Tire Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Ryou could lose control of the vehicle. Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build- up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 292).

Z 238 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Pressure Mon‐ Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received itor from the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily Currently Unavail‐ malfunctioning. able X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved.

TirePress. Sen‐ There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several sor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. oard computer and displays Tire Pressure Mon‐ The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. itor Inoperative The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. On-b No Wheel Sensors X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tire Pressure Mon‐ The tire pressure monitor is faulty. itor X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or 'N' You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in to Start Engine position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply Brake You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to to Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Display messages 239

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Risk of Rolling G WARNING Transmission Not You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button and in P opened the driver's door. You wanted to lock the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. or You have turned off the engine with the Start/Stop button and opened the driver's door while the transmission was in position N. X Shift the transmission to position P.

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:

Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt or oard computer and displays Rswitched off the engine or Ropened the hood On-b A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder. You cannot start the engine. X Shift the transmission to position P. You can restart the engine.

Service Required You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction. Do Not Shift Gears A warning tone also sounds. Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Z 240 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Clutch Overheated The clutch is under considerable load and the permitted operating Avoid Pulling Away temperature has been exceeded. A warning tone also sounds. Engage/Diseng. Avoid frequent pulling away and driving at walking pace over lon- Clutch Quickly if ger distances. Required X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Leave the engine running. The clutch is cooled more quickly with the engine running. or X If possible, continue driving at a steady speed. X oard computer and displays Remove your foot from the clutch pedal and do not allow the clutch to slip. The clutch may also cool down during the journey. On-b It may take several minutes for it to cool down. When the clutch has cooled down, the display message disappears. The clutch is fully operational again. N The trunk lid is open. X Close the trunk lid. M The hood is open. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors. Display messages 241

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The power steering is malfunctioning. A warning tone also sounds. Power Steering Mal‐ function See Oper‐ G WARNING ator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop. J The trunk partition is open. oard computer and displays X Close the trunk partition (Y page 90).

Trunk Partition On-b Open Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. K You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying Decrease Speed attention to road and traffic conditions. X Open the roof (Y page 88). K The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics are depres- surized. Vario-Roof Lower‐ X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 88). ing K The roof is not locked. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying Open/Close Vario- attention to road and traffic conditions. Roof Completely X Push or pull the roof switch until the roof is fully open or closed (Y page 88). K The on-board voltage is too low. X Start the engine. Start Engine See X Operator's Manual After approximately ten seconds, repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 88).

Z 242 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. The roof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons. You can open and close the roof again after approximately ten minutes. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 88).

Close Rear You leave the vehicle and at least one of the rear side windows is Side Windows open. X Close the rear side windows (Y page 84). ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped oard computer and displays below the minimum. Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 281). On-b Wiper Malfunction‐ The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. ing X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty. Flashers Malfunc‐ X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. tioning

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle Â The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. Take Your Key from Ignition Â The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key Â The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 75). Replace Key Battery Display messages 243

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Â The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds and is only a reminder. Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle. Â The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. Key Not Detected (red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. oard computer and displays X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key. On-b

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. A warning tone also sounds. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO Key Not Detected functions in the vehicle. (white display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Â The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected. KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn- Remove 'Start' But‐ ing tone also sounds. ton and Insert Key X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired position. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 244 Warning and indicator lamps

Warning and indicator lamps Safety Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger After starting the to fasten their seat belts. engine, the red seat X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened. After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases. belt warning lamp lights

On-board computer and displays up. In addition, a warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds. ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The red seat belt warn- X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). ing lamp lights up after The warning lamp goes out. the engine starts, as soon as the driver's or There are objects on the front-passenger seat. the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The The red seat belt warn- vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly ing lamp flashes and an been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). intermittent audible X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44). warning sounds. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases. Warning and indicator lamps 245

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. J (Canada only) G WARNING The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired. warning lamp comes on while the engine is run- There is a risk of an accident. ning. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X

Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction On-board computer and displays display.

! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc- The yellow ABS warning tion. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic Stability lamp is lit while the Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and engine is running. hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

Z 246 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD (elec- The yellow ABS warning tronic brake force distribution), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the lamp is lit while the HOLD function, hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for engine is running. example. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec- On-board computer and displays ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps 247

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS, The yellow ABS warning BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD func- lamp is lit while the tion and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example. engine is running. A ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. warning tone also G WARNING sounds. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction On-board computer and displays display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, J (Canada only) BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD ÷å! function and hill start assist, for example, are not available either. The red brake warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. ® lamp, the yellow ESP G WARNING and ESP® OFF warning The brake system continues to function normally, but without the lamps and the yellow functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore ABS warning lamp are lock if you brake hard, for example. lit while the engine is running. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 248 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® warn- skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. ing lamp flashes while Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. the vehicle is in motion. X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 64).

å ESP® is deactivated. ® The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. For exceptions, see: (Y page 64). X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Drive on carefully. X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M SPORT handling mode is activated. AMG vehicles only: G WARNING The yellow SPORT han- ® dling mode warning When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP is unable to lamp is lit while the stabilize the vehicle. engine is running. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations (Y page 65). Warning and indicator lamps 249

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷å ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD The yellow ESP® and function and hill start assist are not available due to a malfunction. ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. lamps are lit while the G WARNING engine is running. The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. On-board computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE‑SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are The yellow ESP® and temporarily unavailable. ESP® OFF warning BAS PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may also have failed. lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. engine is running. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 250 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction ! (Canada only) display. The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or lights up and/or ! warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up. 6 The restraint system is faulty. The red restraint sys- G WARNING tem warning lamp is lit while the engine is run- The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig- On-board computer and displays ning. gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 40). Warning and indicator lamps 251

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a malfunction, for example: The yellow Check Rin the engine management Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-

ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp On-board computer and displays lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legal requirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station. warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking. warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler motion. cap. In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work- Check Engine warning shop. lamp may light up. ? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is The red coolant warn- defective. ing lamp lights up while The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a the engine is running risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. and the coolant tem- X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, perature gauge is at the paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue start of the scale. driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 252 Warning and indicator lamps

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant level is too low. The red coolant warn- If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may ing lamp comes on be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc- while the engine is run- tioning. ning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning On-board computer and displays notes (Y page 281). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air- The red coolant warn- flow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may ing lamp comes on be too low. while the engine is run- G WARNING ning. A warning tone also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). Warning and indicator lamps 253

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 281). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems On-board computer and displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line The red distance warn- of travel at too high a speed. ing lamp lights up while X Be prepared to brake immediately. the vehicle is in motion. X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to A warning tone also brake or take evasive action. sounds. Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 171). Further information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake (Y page 67).

Z 254 Warning and indicator lamps

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at The yellow tire pressure least one of the tires. monitor warning lamp G WARNING (pressure loss/ malfunction) is lit. With tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 292). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 318). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h The tire pressure monitor is faulty. The yellow tire pressure G WARNING monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/ The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire malfunction) flashes for pressure. approximately one There is a risk of an accident. minute and then X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction remains lit. display. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 255

Useful information ...... 256 Stowage areas ...... 256 Features ...... 258 Stowage and features 256 Stowage areas

Useful information Glove box

i This Operator's manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops (Y page 26). X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards Stowage areas until it engages. Stowage space The glove box flap contains brackets for coins, pens, and credit and service cards. Important safety notes Stowage and features G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, especially when braking or abruptly changing directions. RAlways store objects so that they cannot be flung around in these or in similar situations. R Always make sure that objects do not pro- The glove box can be locked and unlocked trude from stowage compartments, parcel using the mechanical key. nets or stowage nets. X To lock: insert the mechanical key into the R Close lockable stowage compartments lock and turn it to position 2. while driving. X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into RStow and secure objects that are heavy, the lock and turn it to position 1. hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk. Stowage areas 257

Stowage compartment/telephone Stowage compartment in the center compartment under the armrest console

X To open: push button : up and raise arm- X To open: briefly press the lower section of rest ;. cover :. The stowage compartment can be locked and X To remove the insert: pull the left-hand unlocked centrally using the SmartKey side of the insert up and out. (Y page 72). X To install the insert: press the insert into the housing. i Depending on the vehicle equipment, a Stowage and features 12 V power socket, USB port or a Media Depending on the vehicle equipment, there Interface is installed in the stowage com- may be an ashtray in the center console partment. A Media Interface is a universal instead of a storage compartment. interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player (see the sepa- Stowage compartment in the doors rate COMAND Operating Instructions).

Eyeglasses compartment

In the door trim, there is a ruffled pocket ; with storage slot :.

X To open: press marking :. Stowage box in the rear wall between the seats Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion. A ruffled pocket is located on the rear wall between the seats.

Z 258 Features

tures : Ruffled pocket Attached to the reversible floor panel are two flexible straps ; that you can use to secure objects, for example wind screen =, when Stowage net reversible floor panel : has been turned Stowage nets are located in the front- over. passenger footwell and on the rear wall behind the driver's seat. Roof carrier

Stowage and fea ! This vehicle is not designed to transport Reversible floor panel in the trunk items on the roof. Roof carriers and other Using the flat side of the reversible floor panel devices which are mounted on the roof that will give you a level trunk. If you turn the have not been specifically approved for this reversible floor panel over, you can transport model by Mercedes-Benz must not be used objects, for example a drinks crate, on it. as they could damage the vehicle and the retractable hardtop (vario-roof). At the time of going to print, Mercedes- Benz does not offer any roof carrier or other roof-installed devices for this model. ! This vehicle is not designed to transport any items on the trunk lid or to allow luggage carriers or equipment of any kind to be installed to the trunk lid. Otherwise the vehicle and the retractable hardtop could be damaged. X To turn over: pull up reversible floor panel ; using strap :. Features X Turn over reversible floor panel ; and re- insert it. Cup holder Important safety notes

G WARNING If you do not correctly store objects in the vehicle interior, they can slip or be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. Features 259

There is a risk of injury, especially when brak- Bottle holder ing or abruptly changing directions. Observe the "Important safety notes" in the R Always store objects so that they cannot be "Stowage compartments" section flung around in these or in similar situa- (Y page 256). tions. ! RAlways make sure that objects do not pro- Make sure that any bottles weighing more trude from stowage compartments, parcel than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the nets or stowage nets. bottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle holder could otherwise be damaged. RClose lockable stowage compartments while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the trunk.

! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill.

Cup holder in the center console Stowage and features X Press the outer edge of button : and slide in the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits into the opening. X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder. The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l). The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; it merely prevents them from tipping over.

X To open: slide cover ; back. Sun visors X To remove the insert: slide catch : Overview inwards on both sides in the direction of the arrow. G WARNING X Remove the cup holder insert upwards. If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded X To re-install the insert: place the insert in up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be the stowage space. blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. X Slide catch : outwards in the direction of the arrow until it engages. Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. You can remove the cup holder insert for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.

Z 260 Features

Ashtray

: Mirror light ; Bracket X To open: = Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket push the lower section of cover :. ? Vanity mirror The cover opens. A Mirror cover X To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; i When driving at high speeds with the side and out. window or roof open: X To re-install the insert: press insert = If you have inserted a car park ticket into

Stowage and features into the holder until it engages. retaining strip =, make sure that it is not blown away by the wind. Cigarette lighter Vanity mirror in the sun visor G WARNING Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor You can burn yourself if you touch the hot is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A heating element or the socket of the cigarette has been folded up. lighter. Glare from the side In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls X Fold down the sun visor. Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. objects, for example X Swing the sun visor to the side. There is a risk of fire and injury. X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Features 261

ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket under the armrest

Your attention must always be focused on the traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and traffic conditions permit. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X Open the stowage compartment under the tion lock (Y page 139). armrest (Y page 257). X To open: push the lower section of X Lift up the cover of socket :. cover :.

The ashtray opens. On vehicles without ashtrays or lighters, there Stowage and features is an additional socket in the center console. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. ; Cigarette lighter will pop out automati- Socket in the front-compartment center cally when the heating element is red-hot. console

12 V sockets General notes ! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle, make sure that you do not exceed the maximum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise, you will overload the fuses. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock (Y page 139). The sockets can be used for accessories with X To open: push the lower section of a maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso- cover :. ries include such items as lamps or chargers The stowage compartment opens. for mobile phones. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. mbrace i An emergency cut-out ensures that the General notes on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power You must have a license agreement to acti- to the sockets is automatically cut. This vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your

Z 262 Features

system is activated and operational. To log in, The system offers various services, e.g.: ï press the MB Info call button. If any of RAutomatic and manual emergency call the steps mentioned are not carried out, the RRoadside Assistance call system may not be activated. RMB Info call If you have questions about the activation, contact one of the following telephone hot- USA only: you can find information and a lines: description of all available features under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes System self-test (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at After you have switched on the ignition, the 1-888-923-8367 system carries out a self-diagnosis. Shortly after successfully registering with the A malfunction in the system has been detec- service, a user ID and password will be sent to ted if one of the following occurs: you by post. RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does USA only: you can use this password to log not come on during the system self-test. onto the mbrace area under "Owners Online" RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside at http://www.mbusa.com. Assistance button does not light up during

Stowage and features The system is available if: self-diagnosis of the system. R Rit has been activated and is operational The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call button does not light up during self-diag- Rthe corresponding mobile phone network is nosis of the system. available for transmitting data to the Cus- R tomer Center The indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red Ra service subscription is available after the system self-diagnosis: Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged - SOS button i Determining the location of the vehicle on - F Roadside Assistance call button a map is only possible if: - ï MB Info call button RGPS reception is available. RAfter the system self-diagnosis, the Inop‐ Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to erative or Service Not Activated the Customer Assistance Center. message appears in the multifunction display. The mbrace system If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expec- To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as ted. In the event of an emergency, help will follows: have to be summoned by other means. X W X Press the or button on the mul- Have the system checked at the nearest tifunction steering wheel. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact or the following service hotlines: X Use the volume controller of the audio sys- RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance tem/COMAND. Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 Features 263

Emergency call As soon as the emergency call has been initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button Important safety notes flashes. The multifunction display shows the G WARNING Connecting Call message. It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, The audio output is muted. even if you have pressed the SOS button in an Once the connection has been made, the emergency if: Call Connected message appears in the Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi- multifunction display. cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident All important information on the emergency is Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of transmitted, for example: road Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter- Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be mined by the GPS system) seen by other road users, particularly when Rvehicle identification number dark or in poor visibility conditions Rinformation on the severity of the accident There is a risk of an accident and injury. Shortly after the emergency call has been ini- Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi- tiated, a voice connection is automatically lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so. established between the Customer Assis- Move to a safe location along with other vehi- tance Center and the vehicle occupants.

cle occupants. In such situations, secure the RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the Stowage and features vehicle in accordance with national regula- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- tions, e.g. with a warning triangle. ter attempts to get more information on the emergency. You must have a license agreement to acti- R vate the mbrace service. Make sure that your If there is no response from the vehicle system is activated and operational. To reg- occupants, an ambulance is immediately ister, press the ï MB Info call button. If sent to the vehicle. any of the steps mentioned are not carried If no voice connection can be established to out, the system may not be activated. the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance If you have questions about the activation, Center, the system has been unable to initiate contact one of the following telephone hot- an emergency call. lines: This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con- Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes tinuously. (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 The Call Failed message appears in the R Canada: Customer Service at multifunction display and must be confirmed. 1-888-923-8367 In this case, summon assistance by other General notes means. An emergency call is dialed automatically if an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is triggered. i You cannot end an automatically triggered emergency call yourself. An emergency call can also be initiated manually.

Z 264 Features

Making an emergency call The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance button : flashes while the call is active. The multifunction display shows the Con‐ necting Call message. The audio output is muted. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction display. If a mobile phone network and GPS reception are available, the system transfers data to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, for example: X To initiate an emergency call manually: R press cover : briefly to open. current location of the vehicle R X Press SOS button ; briefly. vehicle identification number The indicator lamp in SOS button ; i The audio system or COMAND display flashes until the emergency call is conclu- indicates that a call is active. During the ded. call, you can change to the navigation menu X Wait for a voice connection to the by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, Stowage and features Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- for example. ter. Voice output is not available. X After the emergency call, close cover :. A voice connection is established between i If the mobile phone network is unavaila- the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance ble, mbrace will not be able to make the Center and the vehicle occupants. emergency call. If you leave the vehicle From the vehicle remote malfunction diagno- immediately after pressing the SOS button, sis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance you will not know whether mbrace placed Center can ascertain the nature of the prob- the emergency call. In this case, always lem (Y page 268). summon assistance by other means. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- Roadside Assistance button Benz technician or makes arrangements for your vehicle to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. i The system has not been able to initiate a Roadside Assistance call, if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assis- tance call button : is flashing continu- X Press Roadside Assistance button :. ously. R This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz no voice connection to the Mercedes- Customer Assistance Center. Benz Customer Assistance Center was established. Features 265

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, network is not available, for example. for example. The Call Failed message appears in the Voice output is not available. multifunction display. A voice connection is established between X To end a call: press the ~ button on the the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance multifunction steering wheel. Center and the vehicle occupants. or You receive information about operating your X Press the corresponding button for ending vehicle, about the nearest authorized a phone call on the audio system or on Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod- COMAND. ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz. USA only: you can find further information on MB Info call button the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. i The system has not been able to initiate an MB Info call, if: Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center was Stowage and features established. This can occur if the relevant mobile phone network is not available, for example. Call Failed X Press MB Info call button :. The message appears in the This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz multifunction display. Customer Assistance Center. X To end a call: press the ~ button on the The indicator lamp in MB Info call button : multifunction steering wheel. flashes while the connection is being made. or The multifunction display shows the Con‐ X Press the corresponding button for ending necting Call message. The audio system a phone call on the audio system or on is muted. COMAND. If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐ nected message appears in the multifunction Call priority display. When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside If a mobile phone network and GPS reception Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency are available, the system transfers data to the call can still be initiated. In this case, an emer- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center, gency call will take priority and override all for example: other active calls. Rcurrent location of the vehicle The indicator lamp of the respective button Rvehicle identification number flashes until the call is ended. i The audio system or COMAND display An emergency call can only be terminated by indicates that a call is active. During the the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance call, you can change to the navigation menu Center.

Z 266 Features

All other calls can be ended by pressing: Route Assistance Rthe ~ button on the multifunction steer- This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack- ing wheel age and cannot be purchased separately. Rthe corresponding button on the audio sys- i You can also use the Route Assistance tem or on COMAND for ending a telephone function if your vehicle is not equipped with call a navigation system. i When a call is initiated, the audio system Within the framework of this service, you is muted. The mobile phone is no longer receive a professional and reliable form of connected to COMAND. However, if you navigation support without having to leave want to use your mobile phone, do so only your vehicle. when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe The customer service representative finds a location. suitable route depending on your vehicle's

d features current position and the desired destination. Downloading destinations in COMAND You will then be guided live through the current route section. Downloading destinations Downloading destinations gives you access Search and Send wage an to a database with over 15 million points of interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on General notes Sto the navigation system in your vehicle. If you i To use "Search & Send", your vehicle know the destination, the address can be must be equipped with mbrace and a navi- downloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain the gation system. Additionally, an mbrace ser- location of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor- vice subscription must be completed. tant destinations in the vicinity. "Search & Send" is a destination entry ser- Furthermore, you can download routes with vice. A destination address which is found on up to 20 way points. Google Maps® can be transferred via mbrace You are prompted to confirm route guidance directly to your vehicle's navigation system. to the address entered. X Select Yes with the = or ; buttons Specifying and sending the destination on the COMAND system. address X X Confirm with the 9 button on the Go to the website http:// COMAND system. www.maps.google.com and enter a destination address into the entry field. The system calculates the route and subse- X To send the destination address to the quently starts the route guidance with the e-mail address of your mbrace account: address entered. click on the corresponding button on the i If you select No, the address can be saved website. in the address book. i Example: i The destination download function is If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then available if the relevant mobile phone net- 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address work is available and data transfer is pos- will be sent to your vehicle. sible. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: i The destination download function can only be used if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. Features 267

Enter the e-mail address you specified ing may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After when setting up your mbrace account into 30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened the corresponding field. remotely. X Click "Send". X Contact the following service hotlines: RUSA: i Information on specific commands such Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- as "Address entry" or "Send" can be found tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes on the website. (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RCanada: Customer Service at Calling up destination addresses 1-888-923-8367 X Switch on the ignition. You will be asked for your password. The destination address is loaded into the X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed vehicle's navigation system. upon with the Mercedes-Benz Customer A display message appears, asking Assistance Center. d features whether navigation should be started. USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be X Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY opened via: W the COMAND controller and press to R confirm. the Internet, under the "Owners Online" The system calculates the route and sub- section wage an sequently starts the route guidance with Rthe telephone applications (e.g. iPhone®, Sto the address entered. Blackberry) i To do this, you will need your identification If you select No, the address can be saved number and password. in the address book. i i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if If you have sent more than one destina- the corresponding mobile phone network is tion address, each individual destination accessible. must be confirmed separately. i Destination addresses are loaded in the Vehicle remote closing same order as the order in which they were The vehicle remote locking feature can be sent. used when you have forgotten to lock the If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehi- vehicle and you are no longer nearby. cles with mbrace and activated mbrace The vehicle can then be locked by the accounts: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center. If multiple vehicles are registered under the The vehicle can be immediately remotely same e-mail address, the destination will locked within four days of the ignition being be sent to all the vehicles. turned off. After this time, remote locking may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After Vehicle remote opening 30 days the vehicle can no longer be locked You can use the vehicle remote opening if you remotely. have unintentionally locked your vehicle and X Contact the following service hotlines: a replacement SmartKey is not available. The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes- Benz Customer Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately opened remotely within four days of the ignition being turned off. After this time, the remote unlock-

Z 268 Features

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis- Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis tance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes With the vehicle remote malfunction diagno- (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 sis (Vehicle Health Check), the Customer R Canada: Customer Service at Assistance center can provide improved sup- 1-888-923-8367 port for problems with your vehicle. During an You will be asked for your password. existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the The next time you are inside the vehicle and Customer Assistance center. The customer you switch on the ignition, the Doors service representative can use the received Locked Remotely message appears in the data to decide what kind of assistance is multifunction display. required. You are then, for example, guided to USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- locked via: ter or a recovery vehicle is called. If vehicle data needs to be transferred during Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, section this is initiated by the Customer Assistance R ® the telephone applications (e.g. iPhone , center. You will see the Roadside Assis‐ Blackberry) tance Connected message in the COMAND To do this, you will need your identification display. If the vehicle remote malfunction number and password. diagnosis can be started, the Request for Stowage and features vehicle diagnosis received. Start i The vehicle remote closing feature is vehicle diagnosis? available when the relevant mobile phone message appears in network is available and data connection is the display. possible. X Confirm the message with Yes. X When the Vehicle Diagnosis Please Stolen vehicle recovery service start ignition message appears, turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition If your vehicle has been stolen: lock (Y page 139). X Notify the police. X When the Please follow the instruc‐ The police will issue a numbered incident tions received by phone and move report. your vehicle to a safe position. X This number will be forwarded to the message appears, follow the customer ser- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- vice representative's instructions. ter together with your PIN. The message in the display disappears. The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote Center then tries to locate the system. The malfunction diagnosis is canceled com- Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen- pletely. ter contacts you and the local law enforce- The vehicle operating state check begins. ment agency if the vehicle is located. You will see the Vehicle diagnosis However, only the law enforcement agency activated. message. is informed of the location of the vehicle. When the diagnosis is completed, the Send i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated vehicle diagnostics data//(Voice for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- connection may be//interrupted dur‐ Benz Customer Assistance Center is auto- ing data transfer) message appears. The matically notified. vehicle data can now be sent to the Customer Assistance center. Features 269

X Press OK to confirm the message. gation system, you will see the has been saved to memory card. Assistance center is terminated. Do you want to start route guidance? You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis: message in the COMAND display. The route is Transferring data... message. saved to the SD memory card. The vehicle data is sent to the Customer X To start route guidance: select Yes. Assistance center. An overview of the route is shown in the Depending on what the customer service rep- display. resentative agreed with you, the voice con- i If you select No, the saved route can be nection is re-established after the transfer is called up later via the navigation menu. complete. If necessary, you will be contacted X Select Start. at a later time by another means, e.g. by e- Route guidance is started. mail or phone. i Further functions of the vehicle remote mal- Downloaded and saved data can be called function diagnosis include, for example: up again in COMAND. You can find further information in the sep- Rtransfer of service data to the Customer arate COMAND Operating Instructions. Assistance center. If a service is overdue, the COMAND display shows a message Speed alert

about various special offers at your work- Stowage and features shop. You can define the upper speed limit, which Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil must not be exceeded by the vehicle. level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes, If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi- etc. If applicable, you will receive informa- cle, a message will be sent to the Customer tion on special offers in the e-mail. Assistance Center. The Customer Assistance USA only: this information can also be Center then forwards this information to you. called up under "Owners Online" at http:// You can select the way in which you receive www.mbusa.com. this information beforehand. Possible options Information on the data stored in the vehicle include text message, e-mail or an automated (Y page 27). call. Information on Roadside Assistance The data you receive contains the following (Y page 23). information: Rthe location where the speed limit was Downloading routes exceeded Downloading routes allows you to transfer Rthe time at which the speed limit was and save predefined routes in the navigation exceeded system. To do this, an SD memory card must Rthe selected speed limit which was excee- be inserted into the COMAND system. If no ded SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND Geo fencing system before saving. Geo fencing allows you to select areas which A route can be prepared and sent either by a the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will customer service representative or via the be informed if the vehicle crosses the boun- mbrace portal on the Internet. daries of the selected areas. You can select Each route can include up to 20 way points. the way in which you receive this information Once a route has been received by the navi-

Z 270 Features

beforehand. Possible options include text Certain garage door drives are incompatible message, e-mail or an automated call. with the integrated garage door opener. If you The area can be determined as either a circle have difficulty programing the integrated or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. garage door opener, contact an authorized You can specify up to ten areas simultane- Mercedes-Benz Center. ously. Different settings are possible for each Alternatively, you can call the following tele- area. phone assistance services: USA only: these settings can be called up RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance under "Owners Online" at http:// Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes www.mbusa.com. RCanada: Customer Service at Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call 1-800-387-0100 and inform the customer service representa- RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free tive that you wish to activate geo fencing. of charge) Currently inactive areas can be activated by ® text message. More information on HomeLink and/or compatible products is also available online Triggering the vehicle alarm at http://www.homelink.com. Notes on the declaration of conformity With this function, you can trigger the vehi- (Y page 25). Stowage and features cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarm USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4 sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4 Depending on the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off. Important safety notes G WARNING Garage door opener When you operate or program the garage door with the integrated garage door opener, per- General notes sons in the range of movement of the garage door can become trapped or struck by the ® The HomeLink garage door opener integra- garage door. There is a risk of injury. ted in the rear-view mirror allows you to oper- When using the integrated garage door ate up to three different door and gate sys- opener, always make sure that nobody is tems. within the range of movement of the garage Use the integrated garage door opener only door. on garage doors that: Rhave safety stop and reverse features and G WARNING Rmeet current U.S. federal safety standards Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Once programed, the integrated garage door gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There function of the garage door system's remote is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave control. Please also read the operating the engine running in enclosed spaces with- instructions for the garage door system. out sufficient ventilation. When programing a garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the engine while programing. Features 271

Programming When indicator lamp : flashes green: programing was successful. The next step is to Programing buttons synchronize the rolling code. Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" X Release button B on remote control A for (Y page 270). the garage door drive system. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the programing procedure for the corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote control A and the rear-view mirror. The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door opener depends on the garage door drive system. Several attempts might be necessary. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another Garage door remote control A is not inclu- position. ded with the integrated garage door opener. Synchronizing the rolling code X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139). Pay attention to the "Important safety notes" Stowage and features (Y page 270). X Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to control the garage door drive. If the garage door system uses a rolling code, you will also have to synchronize the garage X To start programing mode: press and door system with the integrated garage door hold one of buttons ; to ? on the inte- opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you grated garage door opener. will need to use the programing button on the The garage door opener is now in program- door drive control panel. The programing but- ing mode. After a short time, indicator ton may be positioned at different locations lamp : lights up yellow. depending on the manufacturer. It is usually Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon located on the door drive unit on the garage as button ;, = or ? is programed for the ceiling. first time. If the selected button has already Familiarize yourself with the garage door been programed, indicator lamp : will drive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro- only light up yellow after ten seconds have graming of additional remote controls", elapsed. before carrying out the following steps. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator Your vehicle must be within reach of the lamp : flashes yellow. garage door or gate opener drive. Make sure X To program the remote control: point that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ garage door remote control A towards objects are present within the sweep of the buttons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at door or gate. a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- X B Press and hold button on remote control tion lock (Y page 139). A until indicator lamp : lights up green. X Get out of the vehicle. When indicator lamp : lights up green: programing is finished. X Press the programing button on the door drive unit.

Z 272 Features

Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini- When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro- tiate the next step. graming was successful. The next step is to X Get into the vehicle. synchronize the rolling code. X Press previously programed button ;, = X Release button B of remote control A of or ? on the integrated garage door opener the garage door drive. until the door closes. If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the The rolling code synchronization is then programing process for the corresponding complete. button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance between remote con- Notes on programing the remote control trol A and the rear-view mirror. Canadian radio frequency laws require a The required distance between remote "break" (or interruption) of the transmission control A and the integrated garage door signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. opener depends on the garage door drive Therefore, these signals may not last long system. Several attempts might be neces- enough for the integrated garage door sary. You should test every position for at opener. The signal is not recognized during least 25 seconds before trying another programing. Comparable with Canadian law, position. some U.S. garage door openers also feature a "break". Problems when programing

Stowage and features Proceed as follows: If you are experiencing problems programing the integrated garage door opener on the Rif you live in Canada rear-view mirror, take note of the following R if you have difficulties programing the instructions: garage door opener (regardless of where R you live) when using the programing steps. Check the transmitter frequency used by garage door drive remote control A and X ; ? Press and hold one of buttons to on whether it is supported. The transmitter the integrated garage door opener. frequency can usually be found on the back : After a short time, indicator lamp lights of the garage door drive remote control. up yellow. The integrated garage door opener is com- X Release the button. patible with devices that have units which : Indicator lamp flashes yellow. operate in the frequency range of 280 to X Press button B of garage door remote 433 MHz. A control for two seconds, then release it RReplace the batteries in garage door for two seconds. remote control A. This increases the like- X Press button B again for two seconds. lihood that garage door remote control A X Repeat this sequence on button B of will transmit a strong and precise signal to remote control A until indicator lamp : the integrated garage door opener. lights up green. RWhen programing, hold remote control A When indicator lamp : lights up green: at varying distances and angles from the programing is finished. button which you are programing. Try various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying distances. RIf another remote control is available for the same garage door drive, repeat the same programing steps with this remote control. Features 273

Before performing these steps, make sure Compass that new batteries have been installed in garage door drive remote control A. Calling up the compass RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the indicator lamp on the remote control goes out). Press button B on remote control A again before transmission ends. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door opener unit. This can improve signal reception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

After it has been programed, the integrated Compass ; displays the compass direction garage door opener performs the function of in which the vehicle is currently traveling: N, the garage door system remote control. NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW. Please also read the operating instructions To receive a correct display in rear-view mir- for the garage door system. ror :, the compass must be calibrated and X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- the magnetic field zone set. Stowage and features tion lock (Y page 139). X Press button ;, = or ? which you have programed to operate the garage door. Garage door system with a fixed code: indicator lamp : lights up green. Garage door system with a rolling code: indicator lamp : flashes green. The transmitter will transmit a signal as long as the button is pressed. The transmission is halted after a maximum of ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.

Clearing the memory Make sure that you clear the memory of the integrated garage door opener before selling the vehicle. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139). X Press and hold buttons ; and ?. The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow and then green. X Release buttons ; and ?. The memory of the integrated garage door opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Z 274 Features

Setting the compass X Push a round pen into opening =(Y page 273) for approximately three seconds. The zone currently selected appears in compass display ;(Y page 273). X To select the zone: push a round pen into opening =(Y page 273) until the desired zone is selected. If, after a few seconds, the display in compass display ;(Y page 273) changes direction, the zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compass X Make sure that there is sufficient space for you to drive in a circle without impeding traffic. North America zone map In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do the following:

Stowage and features Rcalibrate the compass in the open and not in the vicinity of steel structures or high- voltage transmission lines. Rswitch off electrical consumers such as the climate control, windshield wipers or rear window defroster. Rclose all doors and the trunk lid. X Switch on the ignition. X Push a round pen into opening =(Y page 273) for approximately six seconds, until symbol C is shown in compass display ;(Y page 273). X Drive your vehicle in a full circle at approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph South America zone map (10 km/h). When the calibration has successfully been X Set your location using the zone maps. completed, the current direction is shown in compass display ;(Y page 273).

Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Features 275

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place floormats on top of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards. Stowage and features X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;. X Remove the floormat.

Z 276 277

Useful information ...... 278 Engine compartment ...... 278 ASSYST PLUS ...... 282 Care ...... 283 Maintenance and care 278 Engine compartment

Useful information G WARNING The engine compartment contains moving i This Operator's manual describes all components. Certain components, such as models and all standard and optional equip- the radiator fan, may continue to run or start ment of your vehicle available at the time of again suddenly when the ignition is off. There publication of the Operator's manual. is a risk of injury. Country-specific differences are possible. If you need to do any work inside the engine Please note that your vehicle may not be compartment: equipped with all features described. This R also applies to safety-related systems and switch off the ignition functions. Rnever reach into the area where there is a i risk of danger from moving components, Read the information on qualified special- such as the fan rotation area ist workshops (Y page 26). Rremove jewelry and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam- Engine compartment ple, away from moving parts

Hood Opening the hood

Important safety notes G WARNING G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts Maintenance and care If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. of the exhaust system, can become very hot. There is a risk of an accident. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Never unlatch the hood while driving. Where possible, let the engine cool down and G WARNING touch only the components described in the following. When opening and closing the hood, it may suddenly fall into the closed position. There is G WARNING a risk of injury to persons within range of movement of the hood. When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by Open and close the hood only when no one is the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. within its range of movement. Always switch off the windshield wipers and G WARNING the ignition before opening the hood. Opening the hood when the engine is over- ! Make sure that the windshield wipers are heated or when there is a fire in the engine not folded away from the windshield. You compartment could expose you to hot gases could otherwise damage the windshield or other service products. There is a risk of wipers or the hood. injury. Let an overheated engine cool down before opening the hood. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and contact the fire department. Engine compartment 279

Engine oil Notes on the oil level Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per 600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. AMG vehicles: before operation on race Y X Make sure that the windshield wipers are tracks, check the oil level and ( page 279) Y turned off. add oil if necessary ( page 280). Race track operation is only permitted with a maximum X : Pull release lever on the hood. engine oil level. The hood is released. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location. When checking the oil level: Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Maintenance and care Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ; up and lift the hood. Checking the oil level using the oil dip- If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in stick (40 cm), the hood is opened and held open G WARNING automatically by the gas-filled strut. Certain components in the engine compart- Closing the hood ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height Working in the engine compartment poses a of approximately 8 in (20 cm). risk of injury. X Check that the hood has engaged properly. Where possible, let the engine cool down and If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not touch only the components described in the properly engaged. Open it again and close following. it with a little more force.

Z 280 Engine compartment

H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Example Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide center. tube. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is X Wipe off oil dipstick :. caused by the following: X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide R tube to the stop, and take it out again. using engine oils and oil filters that have If the level is between MIN mark = and not been specifically approved for the MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. service system R X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = replacing engine oil and oil filters after or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine the interval for replacement specified by oil. the service system has been exceeded Maintenance and care Rusing engine oil additives. Adding engine oil ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the "max" mark on the dipstick, too G WARNING much oil has been added. This can lead to Certain components in the engine compart- damage to the engine or the catalytic con- ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts verter. Have excess oil siphoned off. of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following.

G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to Example: engine oil cap the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com- it. ponents before starting the engine. X Add engine oil. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil. Engine compartment 281

X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn X Park the vehicle on a level surface. clockwise. Only check the coolant level when the vehi- Ensure that the cap locks into place cle is on a level surface and the engine has securely. cooled down. X Check the oil level again with the oil dip- X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- stick (Y page 279). tion lock (Y page 139). Further information on engine oil On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the (Y page 349). Start/Stop button twice (Y page 140). X Check the coolant temperature gauge in the multifunction display. Checking and adding other service The coolant temperature must be below products 158 ‡ (70 †). Checking coolant level X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock. G WARNING X Slowly turn cap ; half a turn counter- Certain components in the engine compart- clockwise to allow excess pressure to ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts escape. of the exhaust system, can become very hot. X Turn cap ; further counter-clockwise and Working in the engine compartment poses a remove it. risk of injury. If the coolant is at the level of marker bar = Where possible, let the engine cool down and in the filler neck when cold, there is enough touch only the components described in the coolant in coolant expansion tank :. Maintenance and care following. If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel G WARNING filler neck when warm, there is enough The engine cooling system is pressurized, par- coolant in expansion tank :. ticularly when the engine is warm. When X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes- opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. coolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury. X Replace cap ; and turn it clockwise as far Let the engine cool down before opening the as it will go. cap. Wear eye and hand protection when opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a For further information on coolant, see Y turn to allow pressure to escape. ( page 351). Windshield washer system

G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator and parts of the exhaust system, can become very hot. Working in the engine compartment poses a risk of injury. Where possible, let the engine cool down and touch only the components described in the following. Example

Z 282 ASSYST PLUS

G WARNING engine oil level. Observe the notes on the Y Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if engine oil level ( page 279). it comes into contact with hot engine compo- The multifunction display shows a service nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of message for several seconds, e.g.: fire and injury. RService A in .. Days Make sure that no windshield washer con- RService A Due centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. RService A Exceeded by .. Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Example does not take into account any periods of time during which the battery is disconnec- X To open: : pull cap upwards by the tab. ted. X Add the premixed washer fluid. Maintenance and care Maintaining the time-dependent service X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck schedule: until it engages. X Note down the service due date displayed If the washer fluid level drops below the rec- in the multifunction display before discon- ommended minimum of 1 liter, a message necting the battery. appears in the multifunction display prompt- or ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 242). X After reconnecting the battery, subtract Further information on windshield washer the battery disconnection periods from the Y fluid/antifreeze ( page 352). service date shown on the display.

ASSYST PLUS Hiding a service message Service messages X Press the a or % button on the steer- The ASSYST PLUS service interval display ing wheel. informs you of the next service due date. Information on the type of service and service intervals (see the separate Maintenance Booklet). You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does not show any information on the Care 283

Displaying service messages Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces X Switch on the ignition. Rif the engine is often left idling for long peri- X = ; Press the or button on the steer- ods ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. Under these or similar conditions, have, for X Press the 9 or : button to select the example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by replaced or changed more frequently. Under pressing the a button. arduous operating conditions, the tires must The service due date appears in the multi- be checked more often. Further information function display. can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- ter. Information about Service Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service Driving abroad interval display An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis- is also available in other countries. You can play has been inadvertently reset, this set- obtain further information from any author- ting can be corrected at a qualified special- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. ist workshop. Have service work carried out as described Care in the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth- Maintenance and care erwise lead to increased wear and damage Notes on care to the major assemblies or the vehicle. H Environmental note A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset cloths in an environmentally responsible man- the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ner. after the service work has been carried out. You can also obtain further information on ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any maintenance work, for example. of the following: R Special service requirements dry, rough or hard cloths Rabrasive cleaning agents The specified maintenance interval takes only Rsolvents the normal operation of the vehicle into R account. Under arduous operating conditions cleaning agents containing solvents or increased load on the vehicle, mainte- Do not scrub. nance work must be carried out more fre- Do not touch the surfaces or protective quently, for example: films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi- scraper. You could otherwise scratch or ate stops damage the surfaces and protective film. Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended short distances period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause increased corrosion of the brake discs and brake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Z 284 Care

should drive for a few minutes after clean- ! Make sure that the automatic transmis- ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the sion is in position N when washing your brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle in a tow-through car wash. The vehi- vehicle can then be parked. cle could be damaged if the transmission is Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for in another position. retaining the quality in the long term. ! Make sure that: Use care products and cleaning agents rec- Rthe side windows and the roof are com- ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. pletely closed Rthe climate control blower is switched off Washing the vehicle and cleaning the Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position paintwork 0 The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. Automatic car wash You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car G WARNING wash from the very start. Braking efficiency is reduced after washing If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. cleaning it in an automatic car wash. After the vehicle has been washed, brake After using an automatic car wash, wipe off carefully while paying attention to the traffic wax from the windshield and the wiper conditions until full braking power is restored. blades. This will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises caused by residue on the wind- Maintenance and care ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function shield. is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To prevent dam- Washing by hand age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- In some countries, washing by hand is only ing or other similar situations: allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Observe the legal requirements in all coun- R when towing the vehicle tries concerned. Rin the car wash X Do not use hot water and do not wash the ! It is preferable to use car washes with vehicle in direct sunlight. adjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning that X Use a soft sponge to clean. corresponds to the specification for the X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Cabriolet program. In car washes that use shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. high water pressures, there is a risk that a X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a small amount of water may leak into the gentle jet of water. vehicle. X Do not point the water jet directly towards ! Lock the car if you wash it in an automatic the air inlet. car wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might be X Use plenty of water and rinse out the damaged. sponge frequently. ! Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry Automatic Car Wash as these use special thoroughly with a chamois. cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the damage the paintwork or plastic parts. paintwork. Care 285

When using the vehicle in winter, remove all Cleaning the paintwork traces of road salt deposits carefully and as ! Do not affix: soon as possible. Rstickers Power washers Rfilms R G WARNING magnetic plates or similar items to painted surfaces. You could otherwise The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt damage the paintwork. blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage to the tires or chassis components. Compo- Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- by corrosion and damage caused by inade- edly. There is a risk of an accident. quate care cannot always be completely Do not use power washers with circular jet repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe- nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged cialist workshop. tires or chassis components replaced imme- X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, diately. while avoiding rubbing too hard. X Soak insect remains with insect remover ! Always maintain a distance of at least and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse power washer nozzle. Information about off the treated areas afterwards. the correct distance is available from the X equipment manufacturer. Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently Move the power washer nozzle around Maintenance and care with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or when cleaning your vehicle. lighter fluid. Do not aim directly at any of the following: X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. R tires X Use silicone remover to remove wax. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint R electrical components surface, use the paint care products recom- Rbattery mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rconnectors This is the case approximately every three to Rlights five months, depending on the climate conditions and the care product used. Rseals If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if Rtrim the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner R ventilation slots recommended and approved by Mercedes- Damaged seals or electrical components Benz should be used. can lead to leaks or failures. Do not use these care products in the sun or ! Do not use high-pressure cleaners if the on the hood while the hood is hot. tank recess is open while you clean it. This X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB can cause damage to the seals or other Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to components. the paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Z 286 Care

Matte finish care ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended period straight after cleaning it, particularly ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy after having cleaned the wheels with wheel wheels. Polishing causes the finish to cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause shine. increased corrosion of the brake discs and ! The following may cause the paint to brake pads/linings. For this reason, you become shiny and thus reduce the matte should drive for a few minutes after clean- effect: ing. Braking heats the brake discs and the RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate- brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The rials. vehicle can then be parked. R Frequent use of car washes. Cleaning the windows RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. G WARNING ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. You could become trapped by the windshield wax. These products are only suitable for wipers if they start moving while cleaning the high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of with matte finish leads to considerable sur- injury. face damage (shiny, spotted areas). Always switch off the windshield wipers and Always have paintwork repairs carried out the ignition before cleaning the windshield or at a qualified specialist workshop. wiper blades.

Maintenance and care ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, treatment under any circumstances. solvents or cleaning agents containing sol- Observe these notes if your vehicle has a vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid not touch the insides of the windows with damage to the paintwork due to incorrect hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. treatment. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows. These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with a clear matte finish. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the windshield and the rear window at regular i The vehicle should preferably be washed intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and pollen may under certain circumstan- and plenty of water. ces prevent water from draining away. This i Use only insect remover and car shampoo can lead to corrosion damage and damage from the range of recommended and to electronic components. approved Mercedes-Benz care products. X Clean the inside and outside of the windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent that is recommended and approved Cleaning the vehicle parts by Mercedes-Benz. Cleaning the wheels Cleaning wiper blades ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products to remove brake dust. This could damage G WARNING wheel bolts and brake components. You could become trapped by the windshield wipers if they start moving while cleaning the Care 287

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning injury. cloths. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before cleaning the windshield or Cleaning the sensors wiper blades. ! If you clean the sensors with a power ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, washer, make sure that you keep a dis- the wiper blade could be damaged. tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and Information about the correct distance is do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the available from the equipment manufac- graphite coating could be damaged. This turer. could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again

before switching on the ignition. Maintenance and care

Cleaning the exterior lighting ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths which are suitable for plastic light lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or X : cleaning cloths could scratch or damage Clean sensors of the driving systems the plastic light lenses. with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior Cleaning the exhaust pipe lighting using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car G WARNING shampoo or cleaning cloths. The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can become very hot. If you come into contact Mirror turn signals with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. There is a risk of injury. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Always be particularly careful around the Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow cloths could scratch or damage the plastic these components to cool down before touch- lenses of the mirror turn signals. ing them. X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- signals in the exterior mirror housing using based cleaning agents such as sanitary a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. cleansers or wheel cleaners.

Z 288 Care

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome care ! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa- product tested and approved by Mercedes- ces: Benz. Rstickers Impurities combined with the effects of road Rfilms grit and corrosive environmental factors may Rscented oil bottles or similar items cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust You can otherwise damage the plastic. pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win- ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent ter and after washing. or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. Interior care X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free Cleaning the display cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- products recommended and approved by lowing: Mercedes-Benz. Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline The surface may change color temporarily. Rabrasive cleaning agents Wait until the surface is dry again. Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or These may damage the display surface. Do selector lever Maintenance and care not put pressure on the display surface X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use when cleaning. This could lead to irrepara- leather care agents that have been recom- ble damage to the display. mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and has cooled down. Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele- X Clean the display surface using a commer- ments cially available microfiber cloth and ! TFT/LCD display cleaner. Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol- X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of fiber cloth. damaging the surface. Cleaning the plastic trim ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are G WARNING mostly made of anodized aluminum and Care products and cleaning agents containing can lose their shine if chrome polish is solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead become porous. As a result, plastic parts may when cleaning the trim pieces. come loose in the event of air bag deploy- If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very ment. There is a risk of injury. dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you Do not use any care products and cleaning are unsure as to whether the trim pieces agents to clean the cockpit. are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Care 289

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with Seat covers of other materials a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber ! Observe the following when cleaning: cloth. RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning moistened with a solution containing 1% products recommended and approved by detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Mercedes-Benz. RClean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth moistened with a solution contain- Cleaning the seat covers ing 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liq- General notes uid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean gen- lines. Leave the seat to dry afterwards. uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICA Cleaning results depend on the type of covers. If used often, these can damage the dirt and how long it has been there. cover. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp i Note that regular care is essential to cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire ensure that the appearance and comfort of seat sections to avoid leaving visible the covers is retained over time. lines.

Genuine leather seat covers Cleaning the seat belts ! To retain the natural appearance of the leather, observe the following cleaning G WARNING

instructions: Seat belts can become severely weakened if Maintenance and care RClean genuine leather covers carefully bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat with a damp cloth and then wipe the cov- belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of ers down with a dry cloth. an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or fatal injury. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise Never bleach or dye the seat belts. become rough and cracked. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical R Only use leather care agents that have cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts been tested and approved by Mercedes- by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡ Benz. You can obtain these from a quali- (80 †) or in direct sunlight. fied specialist workshop. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu- Leather is a natural product. tion. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for example: Cleaning the headliner and carpets Rdifferences in the texture X Headliner: Rmarks caused by growth and injury if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. Rslight nuances of color X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean- These are characteristics of leather and not ing agents recommended and approved by material defects. Mercedes-Benz.

Z 290 291

Useful information ...... 292 Where will I find...? ...... 292 Flat tire ...... 292 Battery (vehicle) ...... 297 Jump-starting ...... 301 Towing and tow-starting ...... 303 Fuses ...... 306 Breakdown assistance 292 Flat tire

Useful information Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel

i This Operator's manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified special- : Folding wheel chock ist workshops (Y page 26). ; Fuse allocation chart = Jack Where will I find...? ? Sheet for faulty wheel A Vehicle tool kit Alignment bolt B Lug wrench General notes C Towing eye The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow- D Valve extractor age well under the trunk floor. E Tire inflation compressor X i Apart from certain country-specific varia- Lift the trunk floor up. tions, the vehicles are not equipped with a X Remove collapsible spare wheel Breakdown assistance tire-change tool kit. Some tools for chang- (Y page 341). ing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which tools are required to perform a wheel change on your Flat tire vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Preparing the vehicle Tools required for changing a wheel may Your vehicle may be equipped with: include, for example: RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop- RJack erties) (Y page 293) RWheel chock Vehicle preparation is not necessary on RLug wrench vehicles with MOExtended tires RRatchet wrench Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 341) RAlignment bolt Information on changing/mounting a wheel (Y page 332). X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 161). Flat tire 293

X If possible, bring the front wheels into the If the pressure loss warning message straight-ahead position. appears in the multifunction display: X Switch off the engine. RObserve the instructions in the display X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove messages (Y page 236). the SmartKey from the ignition lock. RCheck the tire for damage. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the RIf driving on, observe the following notes. driver's door. The maximum driving distance is approx- The on-board electronics now have status imately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehicle is 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having partially laden and approximately 18 miles been removed. (30 km) when the vehicle is fully laden. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis- Start/Stop button from the ignition lock tance possible depends upon: (Y page 140). RSpeed X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. RRoad condition Make sure that they are not endangered as R they do so. Outside temperature X Make sure that no one is near the danger The driving distance possible in run-flat mode area while a wheel is being changed. Any- may be reduced by extreme driving condi- one who is not directly assisting in the tions/maneuvers, or it can be increased wheel change should, for example, stand through a moderate style of driving. behind the barrier. The maximum permissible distance which X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf- can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from fic conditions when doing so. the moment the tire pressure loss warning appears in the multifunction display. X Close the driver's door. Breakdown assistance You must not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat i When replacing one or all tires, make sure properties) that you use only tires: General notes Rof the size specified for the vehicle and Rmarked "MOExtended" With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat characteristics), you can continue to drive If a tire has gone flat and cannot be your vehicle even if there is a total loss of replaced with a MOExtended tire, a stand- pressure in one or more tires. The affected ard tire may be used as a temporary meas- tire must not show any clearly visible damage. ure. Make sure that you use the proper size and type (summer or winter tire). You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the next to the tire size designation, the load- factory. It is therefore recommended that bearing capacity and the speed index you additionally equip your vehicle with a (Y page 326). TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not MOExtended tires may only be used in con- feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. junction with an active tire pressure loss A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, from warning system or with an active tire pressure a qualified specialist workshop. monitor. 294 Flat tire

Important safety notes G WARNING G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your When driving in emergency mode, the driving skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner- inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away ing, accelerating quickly and when braking. from children. There is a risk of injury. There is a risk of an accident. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. observe the following: Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin off-road). This applies in particular to a laden immediately with water. vehicle. RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with Stop driving in emergency mode if: your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. Ryou hear banging noises. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately Rthe vehicle starts to shake. rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink R you see smoke and smell rubber. plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, RESP® is intervening constantly. and seek medical attention immediately. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. RImmediately change out of clothing which After driving in emergency mode, have the has come into contact with tire sealant. wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical workshop with regard to their further use. The attention immediately. defective tire must be replaced in every case. ! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-

Breakdown assistance sor for longer than eight minutes at a time TIREFIT kit without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor can be oper- Important safety notes ated again once it has cooled down. TIREFIT is a tire sealant. Comply with the manufacturer’s safety You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to instructions on the sticker on the tire inflation 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire compressor. tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). Using the TIREFIT kit G WARNING In the following situations, the tire sealant is unable to provide sufficient breakdown assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. TIREFIT sticker, 2-part Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Flat tire 295

X Do not remove any foreign objects which X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or tire. nails. X Screw filler hose D onto valve. X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom- X Insert plug = into the socket of the ciga- panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla- rette lighter (Y page 260) or into a 12 V tion compressor from the stowage well power socket in your vehicle (Y page 261) underneath the trunk floor (Y page 292). X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within tion lock (Y page 139). the driver's field of vision. X Press on/off switch ? on the tire inflation X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the compressor to ON. valve on the wheel with the defective tire. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). X Remove filler hose B and plug = from the If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) bottom section of the tire inflation com- is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes, Breakdown assistance pressor housing. see (Y page 296). X Slide the yellow filler hose connector into If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) the mounting on yellow cap A of tire seal- is not achieved after a maximum of ten ant bottle : until the plug engages. minutes, see (Y page 295). X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellow i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It cap A of tire sealant bottle : into the can then be removed like a layer of film. mounting of tire inflation compressor ;. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, The cap must engage in both hooks. have them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been achieved after ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pump up the tire again.

Z 296 Flat tire

After a maximum of ten minutes, the tire X Pull away immediately. pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ The maximum speed for a tire sealed with 29 psi). tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper G WARNING part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instrument cluster in the driver's If the required tire pressure is not reached field of vision. after the specified time, the tire is too badly X Stop after driving for approximately ten damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the minutes and check the tire pressure with tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire the tire inflation compressor. pressure that is too low can significantly The tire pressure must now be at least impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). acteristics. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified G WARNING specialist workshop. If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too Tire pressure reached badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a G WARNING tire pressure that is too low can significantly A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impair the vehicle's braking and driving char- impairs the driving characteristics and is not acteristics. There is a risk of accident. suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified accident. specialist workshop. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed i In cases such as the one mentioned

Breakdown assistance the specified maximum speed with a tire that above, contact an authorized Mercedes- has been repaired using tire sealant. Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can- ! Residue from the tire sealant may come ada). out of the filler hose after use. This could X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least cause stains. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values, Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic see the Tire and Loading Information plac- bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. ard on the driver's side B-pillar or tire pres- H Environmental note sure table on the fuel filler flap). X Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of To increase the tire pressure: switch on professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist the tire inflation compressor. workshop.

If tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been achieved after a maximum period of ten minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. Battery (vehicle) 297

X To reduce the tire pressure: depress have all work involving the battery carried out pressure release button : next to pres- at a qualified specialist workshop. ; sure gauge . G WARNING X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew Work carried out incorrectly on the battery the filler hose from the valve of the sealed can lead, for example, to a short circuit and tire. thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of lead to function restrictions applying to the sealed tire. safety-relevant systems, e.g. the lighting system, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rbraking

Rin the event of abrupt steering maneuver ce and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions tan There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci- X To remove the tire sealant bottle from the dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop wn assis tire inflation compressor, press together immediately. Do not drive any further. You the locking tabs on the yellow cap. should have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire ® inflation compressor. For further information about ABS and ESP , Breakdo The filler hose remains attached to the tire see (Y page 61) and (Y page 63). sealant bottle. G WARNING X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire inflation compressor. Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo- X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an workshop and have the tire changed there. explosion. X Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle hose replaced as soon as possible at a body to remove any existing electrostatic qualified specialist workshop. build-up. X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist work- The highly flammable gas mixture forms when shop. charging the battery as well as when jump- starting. Always make sure that neither you nor the Battery (vehicle) battery is electrostatically charged. A build- up of electrostatic charge can be caused, for Important safety notes example: Special tools and expert knowledge are Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic required when working on the battery, e.g. fibers removal and installing. You should therefore Rdue to friction between clothing and seats

Z 298 Battery (vehicle)

Rif you push or pull the battery across the cialist workshop or a special carpet or other synthetic materials collection point for used bat- Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth teries. G WARNING ! Have the battery checked regularly at a During the charging process, a battery produ- qualified specialist workshop. ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or Observe the service intervals in the Main- sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe- ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. cialist workshop for more information. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into con- ! You should have all work involving the tact with vehicle parts. battery carried out at a qualified specialist RNever place metal objects or tools on a bat- workshop. In the exceptional case that it is tery. necessary for you to disconnect the battery yourself, make sure that: RIt is important that you observe the descri- R bed order of the battery terminals when you switch off the engine and remove the connecting and disconnecting a battery. key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switched off. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the Check that all the indicator lamps in the battery poles with identical polarity are instrument cluster are off. Otherwise, connected. electronic components, such as the R It is particularly important to observe the alternator, may be damaged. described order when connecting and dis- Ryou first remove the negative terminal connecting the jumper cables. clamp and then the positive terminal R Never connect or disconnect the battery clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. Breakdown assistance terminals while the engine is running. Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system may be damaged. G WARNING Rin vehicles with automatic transmission, Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. the transmission is locked in position P Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. after disconnecting the battery. The vehi- Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean cle is secured against rolling away. You over the battery. Keep children away from can then no longer move the vehicle. batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with The battery and the cover of the positive water and seek medical attention. terminal clamp must be installed securely during operation. H Environmental note In order for the battery to achieve the maxi- Batteries contain dangerous mum possible service life, it must always be substances. It is against the sufficiently charged. law to dispose of them with the household rubbish. They Comply with safety precautions and take pro- must be collected separately tective measures when handling batteries. and recycled to protect the environment. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified spe- Battery (vehicle) 299

Risk of explosion. i If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will have to: Fire, open flames and smoking are Rset the clock; see the separate operating prohibited when handling the bat- instructions. tery. Avoid creating sparks. On vehicles with COMAND and a navigation system, the clock is set automati- Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con- cally. tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Rreset the function for folding the exterior Wear suitable protective clothing, mirrors in/out automatically, by folding especially gloves, apron and face- the mirrors out once (Y page 104). guard. Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a physi- Charging the battery cian if necessary. G WARNING Wear eye protection. During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Keep children away. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Observe this Operator's Manual. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING Breakdown assistance Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. discharge over time if you do not use the Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean vehicle. In this case, have the battery discon- over the battery. Keep children away from nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with can also charge the battery with a charger water and seek medical attention. recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further infor- G WARNING mation. A discharged battery can freeze at tempera- Have the battery condition of charge checked tures below freezing point. When jump-start- more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases for short trips or if you leave it standing idle can escape from the battery. There is a risk of for a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe- an explosion. cialist workshop if you wish to leave your Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before vehicle parked for a long period of time. charging it or jump-starting. i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle and do not require any electrical ! Only use battery chargers with a maxi- consumers. The vehicle will then use very mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. little energy, thus conserving battery ! Only charge the battery using the jump- power. starting connection point.

Z 300 Battery (vehicle)

The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/ warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery. X Open the hood. X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 301). Breakdown assistance Jump-starting 301

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting Breakdown assistance and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel. If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 302 Jump-starting

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to position P. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc. Breakdown assistance X Open the hood. Towing and tow-starting 303

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is activated, the vehicle brakes automati- Important safety notes cally in certain situations. To prevent dam- Breakdown assistance ! Vehicles with automatic transmission age to the vehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC must not be tow-started. You could other- PLUS and the HOLD function in the follow- wise damage the automatic transmission. ing or other similar situations: R G WARNING when towing the vehicle Rin the car wash If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- started is greater than the permissible gross ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the weight of your vehicle: towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could Rthe towing eye could detach itself be damaged. Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll- ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, over. this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, There is a risk of an accident. recover the vehicle with a crane. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, ! Drive slowly and smoothly when towing. its weight should not be greater than the per- Excessive tractive power could otherwise missible gross weight of your vehicle. damage the vehicles. ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

Z 304 Towing and tow-starting

ignition lock and shift the automatic trans- Installing/removing the towing eye mission to N. Then, turn the SmartKey back to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock. Installing the towing eye ! Make sure that the electric parking brake G WARNING is released. If the electric parking brake is The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. a risk of burns when removing the rear cover. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of care when removing the rear cover. 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle. i Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate (Y page 346). It is better to have the vehicle transported than to have it towed. Vehicles with automatic transmission:

Breakdown assistance when towing a vehicle, the automatic transmission must be in position N. The mountings for the removable towing eyes The battery must be connected and charged. are located in the bumpers. They are at the Otherwise, you: front and at the rear, behind the covers. X Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in Press the mark on cover : inwards in the the ignition lock direction of the arrow. X Rcannot shift the transmission to position N Take cover : off the opening. on vehicles with automatic transmission X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle Vehicles with automatic transmission: tool kit (Y page 292). release the selector lever lock manually to X Screw in and tighten the towing eye clock- move it out of position P (Y page 158). wise to the stop. i Disarm the automatic locking feature Removing the towing eye before the vehicle is towed (Y page 207). You could otherwise be locked out when X Unscrew and remove the towing eye. pushing or towing the vehicle. X Attach cover : to the bumper and press until it engages. X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit (Y page 292). Towing and tow-starting 305

Towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Vehicles with manual transmission: raised depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral. ! The ignition must be switched off if you or are towing the vehicle with the rear axle X Vehicles with automatic transmission: raised. Intervention by ESP® could otherwise damage the brake system. shift the automatic transmission to position N. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps X Release the brake pedal. (Y page 111). X Release the electric parking brake. X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. It is important that you observe the safety X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- instructions when towing away your vehicle Y tion lock and remove the SmartKey from ( page 303). the ignition lock. X When leaving the vehicle, take the Smart- Transporting the vehicle Key or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. ! You may only secure the vehicle by the When towing your vehicle with the rear axle wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as raised, it is important that you observe the axle or steering components. Otherwise, safety instructions (Y page 303). the vehicle could be damaged. The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle Towing a vehicle with both axles on onto a trailer or transporter for transporting the ground purposes. X Vehicles with manual transmission: G WARNING Breakdown assistance depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to You can no longer steer the vehicle if the neutral. steering wheel lock has been engaged. There X Vehicles with automatic transmission: is a risk of an accident. turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Always switch off the ignition when towing the tion lock. vehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar. X Move the selector lever to N. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps As soon as the vehicle has been loaded: (Y page 111). X i Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by When towing with the hazard warning applying the electric parking brake. lamps switched on, use the combination X Vehicles with manual transmission: switch as usual to signal a change of direction. In this case, only the indicator lamps fully depress the clutch pedal and engage for the direction of travel flash. When you first or reverse gear. reset the combination switch, the hazard X Vehicles with automatic transmission: warning flashers start flashing again. move the selector lever to P. X X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. tion lock and remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the X brake pedal and keep it depressed. Secure the vehicle.

Z 306 Fuses

Tow-starting (emergency engine Fuses starting) Important safety notes ! Vehicles with automatic transmission G must not be tow-started. You could other- WARNING wise damage the automatic transmission. If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper- i You can find information on "Jump-start- age, the electric cables could be overloaded. ing" under (Y page 301). This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an Before tow-starting: accident and injury. Rthe battery must be connected Always replace faulty fuses with the specified Rthe engine must be cold new fuses having the correct amperage. Rthe exhaust system must have cooled down ! Only use fuses that have been approved When tow-starting, it is important that you for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which Y observe the safety instructions ( page 303). have the correct fuse rating for the system X Switch on the hazard warning lamps concerned. Otherwise, components or sys- (Y page 111). tems could be damaged. X Y Install the towing eye ( page 304). The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towing faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo- rope. nents on the circuit and their functions stop X Depress and hold the brake pedal. operating. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni- Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of tion lock. the same rating, which you can recognize by X the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed Breakdown assistance Depress the clutch pedal fully, engage second gear and keep the clutch pedal in the fuse allocation chart. depressed. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the X Release the brake pedal. cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized X Tow-start the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz Center. X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. Before changing a fuse X As soon as the engine starts, depress the X clutch pedal immediately and shift to neu- Secure the vehicle against rolling away Y tral. ( page 161). X X Stop at a suitable place, in accordance with Switch off all electrical consumers. the traffic conditions. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni- Y X Depress the parking brake. tion lock and remove it ( page 139). X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope. or X X Remove the towing eye (Y page 304). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 140). X Switch off the hazard warning lamps. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be off. Fuses 307

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: X To close: check whether the seal is seated RFuse box in the engine compartment on the correctly in cover ;. left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed X Insert cover ; at the rear of the fuse box in the direction of travel into the retainer. RFuse box in the trunk X Fold down cover ; and close clamps :. The fuse allocation chart is located in the X Close the hood. vehicle tool kit in the stowage compartment under the trunk floor (Y page 292). Fuse box in the trunk Fuse box in the engine compartment i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 306). i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 306). ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. G WARNING When the hood is open and the windshield wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it Breakdown assistance is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair The fuse box is located in the trunk behind the the operation of the fuses. partition covering. X Open the trunk lid. X To open: release cover : on the right and left-hand sides with a flat object. X Open cover : downwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers are turned off. X Open the hood. X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from the fuse box. X To open: open clamp :. X Remove fuse box cover ; forwards.

Z 308 309

Useful information ...... 310 Important safety notes ...... 310 Operation ...... 310 Winter operation ...... 312 Tire pressure ...... 314 Loading the vehicle ...... 322 All about wheels and tires ...... 324 Changing a wheel ...... 332 Wheel and tire combinations ...... 337 Emergency spare wheel ...... 341 Wheels and tires 310 Operation

Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics: R i pay attention to the information and warn- This Operator's manual describes all ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with models and all standard and optional equip- run-flat characteristics). ment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's manual. Accessories that are not approved for your Country-specific differences are possible. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being Please note that your vehicle may not be used correctly can impair operating safety. equipped with all features described. This Before purchasing and using non-approved also applies to safety-related systems and accessories, visit a qualified specialist work- functions. shop and inquire about: i Read the information on qualified special- Rsuitability Y ist workshops ( page 26). Rlegal stipulations Rfactory recommendations Important safety notes Information on dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found Y G WARNING ( page 337). Information on air pressure for the tires on If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, your vehicle can be found: the wheel brakes or suspension components may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci- Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- dent. tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 322) Always replace wheels and tires with those Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler that fulfill the specifications of the original flap (Y page 159) part. Rin the "Tire pressure" section When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Wheels and tires correct: Operation Rdesignation Rmodel Information on driving When replacing tires, make sure to use the If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tire correct: pressures and correct them if necessary. Rdesignation While driving, pay attention to vibrations, Rmanufacturer noises and unusual handling characteristics, Rmodel e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus- G WARNING pect that a tire is defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer- as possible to check the wheels and tires for ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle. damage. Hidden tire damage could also be There is a risk of accident. causing the unusual handling characteristics. Tires without run-flat characteristics: If you find no signs of damage, have the tires Rdo not drive with a flat tire. and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your workshop. emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or When parking your vehicle, make sure that consult a qualified specialist workshop. the tires do not get deformed by the curb or Operation 311 other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over The service life of tires depends on the fol- curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try lowing factors amongst other things: to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth- RDriving style erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls, RTire pressure may be damaged. RDistance covered

Regular checking of wheels and tires Important safety notes on the tire G WARNING tread Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres- G WARNING sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk and replace any damaged tires immediately. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where Regularly check the wheels and tires of your speed is not adapted to suit the driving con- vehicle for damage at least once a month, as ditions. There is a risk of accident. well as after driving off-road or on rough If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of may exhibit different levels of wear at differ- tire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam- ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you age such as: should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire Rcuts in the tires width of all tires. Rpunctures Minimum tire tread depth for: Rtears in the tires RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) Rbulges on tires R R M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)

deformation or severe corrosion on wheels Wheels and tires For safety reasons, replace the tires before Regularly check the tire tread depth and the the legally prescribed limit for the minimum condition of the tread across the whole width tire tread depth is reached. of the tire (Y page 311). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems. Regularly check the pressure of all the tires particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure as necessary (Y page 314). Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated Observe the notes on the emergency spare into the tire tread. wheel (Y page 341). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread. They are visible once the tread depth is

Z 312 Winter operation

approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a quali- case, the tire is so worn that it must be fied specialist workshop. replaced.

Winter operation Selecting, mounting and replacing tires General notes ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali- type and make. fied specialist workshop at the onset of winter. Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" Y tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires section ( page 332). with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 293). Driving with summer tires ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and the first 60 miles (100 km). They only reach braking power. Change the tires on your vehi- their full performance after this distance. cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold temperatures could cause cracks to RDo not drive with tires which have too little form, thereby damaging the tires perma- tread depth, as this significantly reduces nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). responsibility for this type of damage. RReplace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. G WARNING Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of Wheels and tires MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. properties) Check the tires regularly for signs of damage With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat and replace any damaged tires immediately. characteristics), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires MOExtended tires may only be used in con- G WARNING junction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than ã monitor and on wheels specifically tested by in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter Mercedes-Benz. and do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of an accident. Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a flat tire (Y page 293). M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use win- factory. It is therefore recommended that ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire you additionally equip your vehicle with a are identified by the M+S marking. TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. symbol in addition to the M+S marking pro- Winter operation 313 vide the best possible grip in wintry road con- ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you ditions. mount snow chains on steel wheels, you Only these tires will allow driving safety sys- may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti- caps from the relevant wheels before mally in winter. These tires have been devel- mounting the snow chains. oped specifically for driving in snow. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on mends that you only use snow chains that all wheels to maintain safe handling charac- have been specially approved for your vehicle teristics. by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding Always observe the maximum permissible standard of quality. speed specified for the M+S tires you have If you intend to mount snow chains, please mounted. bear the following points in mind: When you have mounted M+S tires: RSnow chains may not be mounted on all X Check the tire pressures (Y page 317). wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-tire combinations (Y page 337). X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressure R monitor (Y page 318). Only use snow chains when driving on roads completely covered by snow. X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres- Remove the snow chains as soon as possi- sure loss warning system (Y page 318). ble when you come to a road that is not For more information on driving with the snow-covered. emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 341). RLocal regulations may restrict the use of snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to install snow chains. Snow chains RDo not exceed the maximum permissible G WARNING speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). ® If snow chains are installed to the front i You may wish to deactivate ESP when Wheels and tires wheels, they may drag against the vehicle pulling away with snow chains installed body or chassis components. This could (Y page 64). You can thereby allow the cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. wheels to spin in a controlled manner, ach- There is a risk of an accident. ieving an increased driving force (cutting To avoid hazardous situations: action). Rnever install snow chains to the front For more information on driving with the wheels emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 341). Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

! You must drive at raised vehicle level (height 1) if snow chains have been installed. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! On some tire sizes there is not enough space for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire combinations" section under "Tires and wheels".

Z 314 Tire pressure

Tire pressure Further information on tire pressures can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure specifications Important safety notes Tire and Loading Information placard

G WARNING Tires with tire pressures that are too low or too high are associated with the following hazards: Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is heavily laden or when driven at high speeds. Rthe tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly, which can severely impair tire traction. : Recommended tire pressures Rthe driving, steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side There is a risk of accident. (Y page 322). Follow recommended tire inflation pressures The Tire and Loading Information placard con- and check the pressure of all the tires includ- tains the recommended tire pressures for ing the spare wheel: cold tires. The recommended tire pressures Rmonthly, at least are valid for the maximum permissible load Rif the load changes and up to the maximum permissible vehicle Rbefore beginning a long journey speed. Runder different operating conditions, e.g.

Wheels and tires off-road driving Tire pressure table If necessary, correct the tire pressure. The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. The tire pressure table contains the recom- Operation with the emergency spare mended pressures for cold tires for various wheel(Y page 341). operating conditions, i.e. differing load and speed conditions. Tire pressure 315

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sudden loss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects. laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking. amounts of luggage. The actual number of If you are unable to rectify the damage, con- seats may differ. tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a Wheels and tires risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for Some tire pressure tables show only the rim your vehicle onto the tire valve. diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire (Y page 326). does not permit any reliable conclusion about If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring sys- road speeds, the pressures should be reset to tem, the tire pressure can be checked using the higher values: the on-board computer. Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase and/or when the vehicle is in motion. This is depend- Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. ent on the driving speed and the load. i Therefore, you should only correct tire pres- The tire pressures for increased loads sures when the tires are cold. and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure table, may have a negative effect on driving comfort.

Z 316 Tire pressure

The tires are cold: Underinflated tires may: Rif the vehicle has been parked without Roverheat, leading to tire defects direct sunlight on the tires for at least three Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac- hours and teristics Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than Rwear quickly and unevenly 1 mile (1.6 km). Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption The tire temperature changes depending on the outside temperature, the vehicle speed Overinflation and the tire load. If the tire temperature changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure G WARNING changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ Tires with excessively high pressure can burst 1.5 psi). Take this into account when check- because they are damaged more easily by ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correct road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they the tire pressure if it is too low for the current also suffer from irregular wear, which can operating conditions. If you check the tire severely impair the braking properties and the pressure when the tires are warm, the result- driving characteristics. There is a risk of an ing value will be higher than if the tires were accident. cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tire Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the pressure to the value specified for cold tires. tires, including the spare wheel. The tire pressure would otherwise be too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for Overinflated tires may: cold tires: Rincrease the braking distance Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rhave an adverse effect on handling charac- on the B-pillar on the driver's side teristics Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the Rwear quickly and unevenly fuel filler flap Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Wheels and tires R printed in yellow on the rim of the emer- Rbe more susceptible to damage gency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) Maximum tire pressures

Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflation

G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. : Example: maximum permissible tire pres- Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the sure tires, including the spare wheel. Never exceed the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure. Always observe the recommended tire pressure for your vehicle Tire pressure 317 when adjusting the tire pressure Tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 314). (Canada only) i The actual values for tires are vehicle- General notes specific and may deviate from the values in the illustration. While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure loss warning system monitors the set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the Checking the tire pressures wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed Important safety notes of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of a Observe the notes on tire pressure loss of pressure, a corresponding warning (Y page 314). message will appear in the multifunction display. Information on air pressure for the tires on your vehicle can be found: You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning by the Run Flat Indicator Active R on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa- Press 'OK' to Restart message which tion placard on the B-pillar appears in the Service menu of the multi- Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler function display. Information on the message flap display can be found in the "Restarting the tire Rin the "Tire pressure" section pressure loss warning system" section (Y page 318). Checking tire pressures manually Important safety notes To determine and set the correct tire pressure, proceed as follows: The tire pressure warning system does not X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. be checked. Observe the notes on the recommended tire

pressure (Y page 314). Wheels and tires X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. The tire pressure loss warning does not X replace the need to regularly check the tire Read the tire pressure and compare it with pressure. An even loss of pressure on several the recommended value on the Tire and tires at the same time cannot be detected by Y Loading Information placard ( page 314). the tire pressure loss warning system. X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn the recommended value. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the X If the tire pressure is too high, release air by tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the pressing down the metal pin in the valve. event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid check the tire pressure again using the tire abrupt steering maneuvers. pressure gauge. The function of the tire pressure loss warning X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. system is limited or delayed if: X Repeat these steps for the other tires. Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's tires. Rroad conditions are wintry. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Z 318 Tire pressure

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor- If you wish to confirm the restart: nering at high speeds or driving with high X Press the a button. rates of acceleration). The Tire Pressure Now OK? message Ryou drive with a heavy load. appears in the multifunction display. X Press the 9 or : button to select Restarting the tire pressure loss warn- Yes. ing system X Press the a button. Restart the tire pressure loss warning system The Run Flat Indicator Restarted if you have: message appears in the multifunction dis- Rchanged the tire pressure play. Rchanged the wheels or tires After a teach-in period, the tire pressure R loss warning system will monitor the set mounted new wheels or tires tire pressures of all four tires. X Before restarting, make sure that the tire If you wish to cancel the restart: pressures are set properly on all four tires for the respective operating conditions. X Press the % button. The recommended tire pressures can be or found on the Tire and Loading Information X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side appears, use the 9 or : button to or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler select Cancel.

tires flap. X Press the a button. The tire pressure loss warning system can The tire pressure values stored at the last only give reliable warnings if you have set restart will continue to be monitored. the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire

els and pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. Tire pressure monitor

Whe X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 314). General notes X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi- Y 2 in the ignition lock ( page 139). cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- tire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres- ing wheel to select the Serv. menu. sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops X Press the 9 or : button to select in one or more of the tires. The tire pressure Tire Pressure. monitor only functions if the correct sensors X Press the a button. are installed on all wheels. The Run Flat Indicator Active Information on tire pressures is displayed in Press 'OK' to Restart message the multifunction display. After a few minutes appears in the multifunction display. of driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is shown in the Service menu of the multifunction display. Tire pressure 319

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then Example: current tire pressure display remain continuously illuminated. This For information on the message display, refer sequence will be repeated every time the vehi- to the "Checking the tire pressure electroni- cle is started as long as the malfunction cally" section (Y page 320). exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, Important safety notes the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- G WARNING tions may occur for a variety of reasons, Each tire, including the spare (if provided), including the installation of incompatible should be checked at least once a month replacement or alternate tires or wheels on when cold and inflated to the pressure rec- the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func- ommended by the vehicle manufacturer on tioning properly. Always check the TPMS mal- the Tire and Loading Information placard on function telltale after replacing one or more the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressure tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If your the replacement or alternate tires and wheels vehicle has tires of a different size than the allow the TPMS to continue to function prop- size indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor- erly. mation placard or the tire pressure label, you should determine the proper tire pressure for It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire those tires. pressure to that recommended for cold tires

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has which is suitable for the operating situation Wheels and tires been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring (Y page 314). Note that the correct tire pres- system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure for the current operating situation must sure telltale when one or more of your tires first be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, If there is a substantial loss of pressure, the when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, warning threshold for the warning message is you should stop and check your tires as soon aligned to the reference values taught-in. as possible, and inflate them to the proper Restart the tire pressure monitor after adjust- pressure. Driving on a significantly underin- ing the pressure of the cold tires flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can (Y page 321). The current pressures are lead to tire failure. Underinflation also saved as new reference values. As a result, a reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and warning message will appear if the tire pres- may affect the vehicle's handling and stop- sure drops significantly. ping ability. The tire pressure monitor does not warn you Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- the notes on the recommended tire pressure er's responsibility to maintain correct tire (Y page 314). pressure, even if underinflation has not The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn reached the level to trigger illumination of the you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the

Z 320 Tire pressure

event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the Checking the tire pressure electroni- vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid cally abrupt steering maneuvers. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn- 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139). ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat- X Press the = or ; button on the steering a pressure loss or malfunction. Whether Service the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi- ing wheel to select the menu. cates whether a tire pressure is too low or the X Press the 9 or : button to select tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning: Tire Pressure. X a Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the Press the button. tire pressure on one or more tires is signif- The current tire pressure of each tire is icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor is shown in the multifunction display. not malfunctioning. If the vehicle has been parked for over Rif the warning lamp flashes for around a 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be minute and then remains lit constantly, the displayed after driving a few tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. minutes message appears. After a teach-in process, the tire pressure i In addition to the warning lamp, a mes- monitor automatically detects new wheels or sage appears in the multifunction display. new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of Further information can be found on the tire pressure value to the individual (Y page 236). wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning, Monitor Active display message is shown it may take more than ten minutes for the tire instead of the tire pressure display. The tire pressure warning lamp to inform you of the pressures are already being monitored. malfunction by flashing for approximately one i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, minute and then remaining lit. When the mal- the system may continue to show the tire function has been rectified, the tire pressure Wheels and tires pressure of the wheel that has been warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, driving. note that the value displayed for the posi- The tire pressure values indicated by the on- tion where the spare wheel is mounted is board computer may differ from those meas- not the same as the current tire pressure of ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. the emergency spare wheel. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured at sea Tire pressure monitor warning mes- level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val- sages ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higher than those shown by the on-board computer. If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. loss in one or more tires, a warning message The operation of the tire pressure monitor can is shown in the multifunction display and the be affected by interference from radio trans- yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, comes on. two-way radios) that may be being operated RIf the Please Correct Tire Pressure in or near the vehicle. message appears in the multifunction display, the tire pressure in at least one tire is Tire pressure 321

too low and must be corrected at the next X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position opportunity. 2 in the ignition lock. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Press the = or ; button on the steer- multifunction display, the tire pressure in ing wheel to select the Service menu. one or more tires has dropped significantly X Press the 9 or : button to select and the tires must be checked. Tire Pressure. RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction X Press the a button. appears in the multifunction display, the The multifunction display shows the cur- tire pressure in one or more tires has drop- rent tire pressure for the individual tires or ped suddenly and the tires must be the Tire pressure will be displayed checked. after driving a few minutes mes- Observe the instructions and safety notes in sage. the display messages in the "Tires" section X Press the : button. (Y page 236). The Use Current Pressures as New i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are Reference Values message appears in rotated, the tire pressures may be dis- the multifunction display. played for the wrong positions for a short If you wish to confirm the restart: time. This is rectified after a few minutes of X a driving, and the tire pressures are displayed Press the button. Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted for the correct positions. The message appears in the multifunction dis- Restarting the tire pressure monitor play. After driving for a few minutes, the system When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all checks whether the current tire pressures existing warning messages are deleted and are within the specified range. The new tire the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses pressures are then accepted as reference the currently set tire pressures as the refer- values and monitored. ence values for monitoring. In most cases, the Wheels and tires If you wish to cancel the restart: tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference values after you X Press the % button. have changed the tire pressure. However, you The tire pressure values stored at the last can also define reference values manually as restart will continue to be monitored. described here. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values. Radio type approval for the tire pres- X Set the tire pressure to the value recom- sure monitor mended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading Information Country Radio type approval number placard on the driver's side USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A B-pillar (Y page 314). FCC ID: MRXGG4 Additional tire pressure values for different loads can also be found on the tire pressure FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4 table on the inside of the fuel filler flap Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A Y ( page 314). IC: 2546A-GG4 X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct IC: 2546A-MC34MA4 on all four wheels.

Z 322 Loading the vehicle

Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by : B-pillar, driver's side exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show Maximum permissible gross vehicle the maximum possible load. weight rating (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number of occupants and the maximum permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires installed at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle identification plate informs you of the

Wheels and tires gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up X Specification for maximum gross vehicle of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu- weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading pants, the fuel and the cargo. You can Information placard: "The combined weight also find information about the maximum of occupants and cargo should never gross axle weight rating on the front and exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." rear axle. The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, The maximum gross axle weight rating is load and luggage must not exceed the speci- the maximum weight that can be carried fied value. by one axle (front or rear axle). Never i exceed the maximum load or the maxi- The specifications shown on the Tire and mum gross axle weight rating for the Loading Information placard in the illustra- front or rear axle. tion are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle- specific and may differ from that in the illustration. You can find the valid maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation placard. Loading the vehicle 323

Number of seats X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capa- Maximum number of seats : indicates the city calculated in step 4. maximum number of occupants allowed to travel in the vehicle. This information can be found on the Tire and Loading Information Example: steps 1 to 3 placard. The following table shows examples on how i The specifications shown on the Tire and to calculate total and cargo load capacities Loading Information placard in the illustra- with varying seating configurations and num- tion are examples. The number of seats is ber and size of occupants. The following vehicle-specific and can differ from the examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs details shown. The number of seats in your (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load- only. Make sure you are using the actual load ing Information placard. limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 322).

Determining the correct load limit The higher the weight of all the occupants, the Wheels and tires smaller the maximum load for luggage. Step-by-step instructions Step 1 The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Example 1 Example 2 Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 Combined 1500 lbs 1500 lbs pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor maximum (680 kg) (680 kg) Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". weight of X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com- occupants bined weight of occupants and cargo and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on (data from the your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information Tire and Load- placard. ing Informa- X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of tion placard) the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

Z 324 All about wheels and tires

Step 2 Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers Example 1 Example 2 and the load must not exceed the permissible Number of 1 2 gross vehicle weight. people in the Gross axle weight rating: the maximum per- vehicle (driver missible weight that can be carried by one and occu- axle (front or rear axle). pants) To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross vehi- Weight of the Occu- Occu- cle weight and maximum gross axle weight occupants pant 1: pant 1: rating), have your loaded vehicle (including 175 lbs 175 lbs driver, occupants and the load) weighed on a (80 kg) (80 kg) suitable vehicle weighbridge. Occu- pant 2: 195 lbs All about wheels and tires (88 kg) Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand- Gross weight 175 lbs 370 lbs ards of all occu- (80 kg) (168 kg) pants Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand- ards Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Permissible 1500 lbs 1500 lbs load (maxi- (680 kg) (680 kg)

Wheels and tires mum gross Ò175 lbs Ò370 lbs vehicle weight (80 kg) = (168 kg) = rating from 1325 lbs 1130 lbs the Tire and (600 kg) (512 kg) Loading Infor- mation placard minus the Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are gross weight U.S. government specifications. Their pur- of all occu- pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia- pants) ble information on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using three performance factors: treadwear grade :, Vehicle identification plate traction grade ; and temperature grade =. These regulations do not apply to Canada. Even if you have calculated the total load Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America carefully, you should still make sure that the are provided with the corresponding quality gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle grading markings on the sidewall of the tire. weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Where applicable, the tire grading informa- be found on the vehicle identification plate on tion can be found on the tire sidewall between the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle the tread shoulder and maximum tire width. (Y page 322). All about wheels and tires 325

Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. RTraction grade: AA You should pay special attention to road con- R Temperature grade: A ditions when temperatures are around freez- All passenger car tires must conform to the ing point. statutory safety requirements in addition to Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum specific and may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 311). Winter tires can the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with The treadwear grade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested Further information on winter tires (M+S under controlled conditions on a specified tires) (Y page 312). U.S. government course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half Temperature times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. G WARNING The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is estab- upon the actual conditions of their use, how- lished for a tire that is properly inflated and ever, and may depart significantly from the not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla- norm, due to variations in driving habits, ser- tion, or excessive loading, either separately or vice practices and differences in road char- in combination, can cause excessive heat acteristics and climate conditions. build-up and possible tire failure. Wheels and tires Traction The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C. These represent the tire's resistance G WARNING to the generation of heat and its ability to dis- The traction grade assigned to this tire is sipate heat when tested under controlled based on straight-ahead braking traction conditions on a specified indoor laboratory tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- test wheel. Sustained high temperature can nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char- cause the material of the tire to degenerate acteristics. and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage C corresponds to a level of performance to the drive train. which all passenger car tires must meet under The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as levels of performance on the laboratory test measured under controlled conditions on wheel than the minimum required by law. specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Z 326 All about wheels and tires

Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

: Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code : Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard ? Rim diameter (Y page 330) A Load bearing index ; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating Y ( page 329) General: depending on the manufacturer's Y = Maximum tire load ( page 328) standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 316) may not contain any letters or may contain A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description. B Y Wheels and tires Tire material ( page 329) If there is no letter preceding the size descrip- C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa- tion (as shown above): these are passenger city and speed index (Y page 326) vehicle tires according to European manufac- D Load index (Y page 328) turing standards. E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description: these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. The markings described above are on the tire manufacturing standards. in addition to the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. manu- i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- facturing standards. ate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an capacity and speed rating emergency. G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa- tire width in millimeters. city and the approved maximum speed could Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There size ratio between the tire height and tire is a risk of accident. width and is shown in percent. The aspect All about wheels and tires 327 ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by Sum- the tire height. mer Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. tires "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial Index Speed rating tires. Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) the size description, depending on the man- S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diam- T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) rim flange. The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Do not overload the tires by exceeding the ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) specified load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) the driver's side (Y page 322). Example: ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can the size description, depending on the bear. For further information on the maximum manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). tire load in kilograms and lbs, see Wheels and tires The service specification is made up of (Y page 328). load-bearing index A and speed rating B. For further information on the load bearing RIf the size description of your tire includes index, see "Load index" (Y page 328). "ZR" and there are no service specifica- Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order to approved maximum speed of the tire. find out the maximum speed. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- If a service specification is available, the ate from the data in the example. maximum speed is limited according to the Regardless of the speed rating, always speed rating in the service specification. observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam- adapt your driving style to the traffic condi- ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. The tions. letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph (300 km/h). RThe size description for all tires with maximum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the service specification must be given in parentheses. Exam- ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating

Z 328 All about wheels and tires

"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of Further information about reading tire data the tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask can be obtained from any qualified specialist the tire manufacturer about the maximum workshop. speed. Load index All- weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating

Q M+S3 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S3 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S3 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S3 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) In addition to the load bearing index, load rating : may be imprinted after the letters that i identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire Not all tires with the M+S marking provide (Y page 326). res the driving characteristics of winter tires. In R addition to the M+S marking, winter tires If no specification is given: no text (as in the also have the i snowflake symbol on example above), represents a standard the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill load (SL) tire the requirements of the Rubber Manufac- RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced turers Association (RMA) and the Rubber tire Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the RLight Load: represents a light load tire

Wheels and ti tire traction on snow. They have been espe- RC, D, E: represents a load range that cially developed for driving on snow. depends on the maximum load that the tire An electronic speed limiter prevents your can carry at a certain pressure vehicle from exceeding the following speeds: i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles): ate from the data in the example. 130 mph (210 km/h) RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) Maximum load rating RAMG vehicles with Handling Package: 174 mph (280 km/h) The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "tires" section (Y page 337).

3 Or M+Si for winter tires. All about wheels and tires 329

Maximum load rating : is the maximum per- For further information about retreaded tires, missible weight for which the tire is approved. see (Y page 310). Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. specified load limit. The maximum permissi- Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and by the manufacturer as a code to describe Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on specific characteristics of the tire. the driver's side (Y page 322). Date of manufacture: date of manufacture i The actual values for tires are vehicle- A provides information about the age of a specific and may deviate from the values in tire. The first and second positions represent the illustration. the week of manufacture, starting with "01" for the first calendar week. Positions three DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) and four represent the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that is marked with U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in manufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN 2008. in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

The TIN is a unique identification number. The Wheels and tires TIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers or retreaders to notify customers of recalls or other safety-related matters. It makes it possible for the purchaser to easily identify the This information describes the type of tire affected tires. cord and the number of layers in sidewall : The TIN consists of the manufacturer identi- and under tire tread ;. fication code ;, tire size =, tire type i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi- code ? and manufacturing date A. ate from the data in the example. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol : indicates that the tire complies Definition of terms for tires and loading with the requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Tire ply composition and material used Manufacturer identification code: manu- Describes the number of plies or the number facturer identification code ; provides of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire details on the tire manufacturer. New tires tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, have a code with two symbols. Retreaded nylon, polyester and other materials. tires have a code with four symbols.

Z 330 All about wheels and tires

Bar GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals weight. The actual load on an axle must never (kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar. exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the DOT (Department of Transportation) vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of the driver's side. the United States Department of Transporta- tion. Speed rating The speed rating is part of the tire identifica- Normal occupant weight tion. It specifies the speed range for which the The number of occupants which the vehicle is tire is approved. designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lb). GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The gross vehicle weight includes the weight Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare A uniform standard to grade the quality of wheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug- tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica- and temperature characteristics. Ratings are ble. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as government testing procedures. The ratings specified on the vehicle identification plate on are molded into the sidewall of the tire. the B pillar on the driver's side. Recommended tire pressure GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The recommended tire pressure applies to The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross the tires mounted at the factory. weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of The Tire and Loading Information placard con- the vehicle including all accessories, occu- tains the recommended tire pressures for pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose- Wheels and tires cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the weight, if applicable). The gross vehicle maximum permissible vehicle speed. weight rating is specified on the vehicle iden- The tire pressure table contains the recom- tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's mended pressures for cold tires for various side. operating conditions, i.e. differing load and Maximum loaded vehicle weight speed conditions. The maximum weight is the sum of: Increased vehicle weight due to optional Rthe curb weight of the vehicle equipment Rthe weight of the accessories This is the combined weight of all standard Rthe load limit and optional equipment available for the vehi- R cle, regardless of whether it is actually instal- the weight of the factory installed optional led on the vehicle or not. equipment Rim Kilopascal (kPa) This is the part of the wheel on which the tire Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre- is mounted. sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. All about wheels and tires 331

Load index Cold tire pressure In addition to the load-bearing index, the load The tires are cold: index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of Rif the vehicle has been parked without the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa- direct sunlight on the tires for at least three city more precisely. hours and Curb weight Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than The weight of a vehicle with standard equip- 1 mile (1.6 km). ment including the maximum capacity of fuel, Tread oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi- The part of the tire that comes into contact tioning system and optional equipment if with the road. these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Bead Maximum load rating The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel The maximum tire load is the maximum per- wires in the bead to prevent the tire from missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a coming loose from the wheel rim. tire is approved. Sidewall Maximum permissible tire pressure The part of the tire between the tread and the Maximum permissible tire pressure for one bead. tire. Weight of optional extras Maximum load on one tire The combined weight of those optional extras Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated that weigh more than the replaced standard by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs). by two. These optional extras, such as high-perform-

PSI (pounds per square inch) ance brakes, level control, a roof rack or a Wheels and tires A standard unit of measure for tire pressure. high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of the acces- Aspect ratio sories. Relationship between tire height and tire TIN (Tire Identification Number) width in percent. This is a unique identifier which can be used Tire pressure by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for This is pressure inside the tire applying an example for a product recall, and thus identify outward force to each square inch of the tire's the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the surface. The tire pressure is specified in manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal type code and the manufacturing date. (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only Load bearing index be corrected when the tires are cold. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire.

Z 332 Changing a wheel

Traction Tire-mounting tools should not be used Traction is the result of friction between the near the valve. This could damage the elec- tires and the road surface. tronic components. Only have tires changed at a qualified spe- Treadwear indicators cialist workshop. Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis- Always pay attention to the instructions and tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is safety notes when changing a wheel level with the bars, the wear limit of á in (Y page 333). (1.6 mm) has been reached. The wear patterns on the front and rear tires Occupant distribution differ, depending on the operating conditions. The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern their designated seating positions. has formed on the tires. Front tires typically wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires Total load limit in the center. Rated cargo and luggage load plus If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you 68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the num- can rotate the wheels according to the inter- ber of seats in the vehicle. vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no warranty book is available, the tires should be rotated Changing a wheel every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to Flat tire 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Do not change the direction of wheel rotation. The "Breakdown assistance" section Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and Y ( page 292) contains information and notes the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on is rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec- driving with MOExtended tires in the event of essary, restart the tire pressure loss warning a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended Wheels and tires system or the tire pressure monitor. tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" (Y page 293). Direction of rotation Rotating the wheels Tires with a specified direction of rotation have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk G WARNING of hydroplaning. You will only gain these ben- Interchanging the front and rear wheels may efits if the correct direction of rotation is severely impair the driving characteristics if maintained. the wheels or tires have different dimensions. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates The wheel brakes or suspension components its correct direction of rotation. may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Storing wheels and tires are of the same dimensions. Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure dry and preferably dark place. Protect the monitor, electronic components are loca- tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. ted in the wheel. Changing a wheel 333

Cleaning the wheels i Due to differences in vehicle equipment, not all vehicles are equipped with a tire- G WARNING change tool kit. For information on which The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt tools are required to perform a wheel blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage change on your vehicle, consult an author- to the tires or chassis components. Compo- ized Mercedes-Benz Center. nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect- Necessary wheel-changing tools can edly. There is a risk of an accident. include, for example: Do not use power washers with circular jet RJack nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged R tires or chassis components replaced imme- Wheel chock R diately. Lug wrench Securing the vehicle to prevent it from Mounting a wheel rolling away Preparing the vehicle X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. X Vehicles with manual transmission: fully depress the clutch pedal and engage first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, move the selector lever to P. it can be found in the tire-change tool kit Wheels and tires X Switch off the engine. (Y page 292). X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove The folding wheel chock is an additional the SmartKey from the ignition lock. securing measure to prevent the vehicle from X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the rolling away, for example when changing a driver's door. wheel. The on-board electronics now have status X Fold both plates upwards :. 0. This is the same as the SmartKey having X Fold out lower plate ;. been removed. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the the openings in base plate =. Start/Stop button from the ignition lock (Y page 140). X If included in the vehicle equipment, remove the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

Z 334 Changing a wheel

The following must be observed when raising the vehicle: Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed. It is not suited for per- Securing the vehicle on level ground forming maintenance work under the vehicle. X On level ground: place chocks or other R suitable items under the front and rear of avoid changing the wheel on uphill and the wheel that is diagonally opposite the downhill slopes. wheel you wish to change. Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disen- gage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the Wheels and tires Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients jack will not be able to achieve its load- bearing capacity due to the restricted X On light downhill gradients: place height. chocks or other suitable items in front of R the wheels of the front and rear axle. make sure that the distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). Raising the vehicle Rnever place your hands and feet under the G WARNING raised vehicle. If you do not position the jack correctly at the Rdo not lie under the vehicle. appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the Rdo not start the engine when the vehicle is jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. raised. There is a risk of injury. Rdo not open or close a door or the trunk lid Only position the jack at the appropriate jack- when the vehicle is raised. ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack Rmake sure that no persons are present in must be positioned vertically, directly under the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. Changing a wheel 335

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: fold cover ; upwards.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com- X ? = pletely. Position jack at jacking point .

Example The jacking points are located just behind the

X Wheels and tires front wheel housings and just in front of the Make sure the foot of the jack is directly rear wheel housings (arrows). beneath the jacking point. X Turn crank A clockwise until jack ? sits completely on jacking point = and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. X Turn crank A until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing a wheel ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could otherwise be damaged when Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMG equip- you screw them in. ment) AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG equipment: to protect the vehicle body, the vehicle has covers next to the jacking points on the outer sills.

Z 336 Changing a wheel

approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. X Remove the wheel. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. Mounting a new wheel X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the G WARNING alignment bolt and push it on. X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin- Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged ger-tight. wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel X bolts to come loose. As a result, you could Unscrew the alignment bolt. lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- accident. tight. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of X Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel: Wheels and tires damage to the threads, contact a qualified inflate the collapsible spare wheel specialist workshop immediately. Have the (Y page 342). Only then lower the vehicle. damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. Lowering the vehicle

G WARNING G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip and bolts are not tightened to the specified over. There is a risk of injury. tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts Have the tightening torque immediately when the vehicle is on the ground. checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Always pay attention to the instructions and safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section (Y page 332). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been Wheel and tire combinations 337

Wheel and tire combinations General notes ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use tires and wheels which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle. These tires have been specially adapted for use with the control systems, such as ABS ® X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock- or ESP , and are marked as follows: wise until the vehicle is once again standing RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original firmly on the ground. RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended X Place the jack to one side. (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer- wise pattern in the sequence indicated (: tain AMG tires) to A). The specified tightening torque is Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). may only be used on wheels that have been X Turn the jack back to its initial position. specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes- tools in the trunk again. ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer- X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMG tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle equipment: insert the cover into the outer noise emissions or fuel consumption, may sill. otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, when driving with a load, tire dimen- X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun- sion variations could cause the tires to ted wheel and adjust it if necessary. Wheels and tires come into contact with the bodywork and Observe the recommended tire pressure axle components. This could result in dam- Y ( page 314). age to the tires or the vehicle. i When you are driving with the collapsible Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure damage resulting from the use of tires, loss warning system or the tire pressure wheels or accessories other than those tes- monitor cannot function reliably. Only ted and approved. restart the tire pressure loss warning sys- Information on tires, wheels and approved tem/the tire pressure monitor when the combinations can be obtained from any damaged wheel has been replaced with a qualified specialist workshop. new wheel. ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec- Vehicles with a tire pressure control ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since pre- system: all installed wheels must be equip- vious damage cannot always be detected ped with functioning sensors. on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes- Benz cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if you have no information about their previous usage.

Z 338 Wheel and tire combinations

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow- Winter tires are not available at the factory ing tire tables: as standard equipment or optional extras. RBA: both axles If you want to equip your vehicle with RFA: front axle approved winter tires, it may be necessary to obtain wheel rims in the corresponding RRA: rear axle size. The size of the approved winter tires The recommended pressures for various may differ from the standard tires. This is operating conditions can be found: dependent on the model and the equip- Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard ment installed at the factory. with the recommended tire pressures on The tires and wheel rims, as well as further the B-pillar on the driver's side information, can be obtained at a qualified Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of the specialist workshop. fuel filler flap Observe the notes on recommended tire pressures under various operating conditions (Y page 314). Check tire pressures regularly, and only when the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance recommendations of the tire manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. Notes on the vehicle equipment – always equip the vehicle with: Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/ right) Rthe same type of tires at a given time (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) Wheels and tires Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" section (Y page 293). Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It is therefore recommended that you additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. i Not all wheel and tire combinations are available at the factory for all countries. i The following pages contain information on approved wheel rims and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with winter tires. Wheel and tire combinations 339

Tires SLK 250

Summer tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 245/40 R17 91 W4, 5 RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL5 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) Winter tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheels and tires Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

SLK 350

Summer tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W4 FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 245/40 R17 91 W4, 5 RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

4 Available as MOExtended tires. 5 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Z 340 Wheel and tire combinations

R18

Tires Alloy wheels FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL5 RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm) Winter tires R17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si4 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

SLK 55 AMG

Summer tires R18

Tires Alloy wheels FA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) RA: 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL5 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm) Wheels and tires Winter tires R18

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+S i BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) FA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm) HA: 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si5 RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

5 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section. 4 Available as MOExtended tires. Emergency spare wheel 341

Emergency spare wheel Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the Important safety notes emergency spare wheel. G WARNING i When you are driving with the collapsible The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel loss warning system or the tire pressure and the wheel to be replaced may differ. monitor cannot function reliably. Only Mounting an emergency spare wheel may restart the tire pressure loss warning sys- severely impair the driving characteristics. tem/the tire pressure monitor when the There is a risk of an accident. damaged wheel has been replaced with a To avoid hazardous situations: new wheel. Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: Radapt your driving style accordingly and after mounting an emergency spare wheel, drive carefully. the system may still display the tire pres- R never mount more than one spare wheel or sure of the removed wheel for a few emergency spare wheel that differs in size. minutes. The value displayed for the moun- Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare ted emergency spare wheel is not the same wheel of a different size briefly. as the current tire pressure of the emer- Rdo not switch ESP® off. gency spare wheel. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Removing the emergency spare wheel Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size, you must not Wheels and tires exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Snow chains must not be mounted on emergency spare wheels.

General notes (Example) You should regularly check the pressure of The collapsible spare wheel can be found in the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior the stowage well under the trunk floor. to long trips, and correct the pressure as nec- X Lift and remove the reversible floor panel in essary (Y page 314). The applicable value is the trunk (Y page 258). found on the wheel or under "Technical data" X Turn retaining screw ; counter-clockwise (Y page 344). and remove it. An emergency spare wheel may also be X Remove collapsible spare wheel :. mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as Always observe the instructions and safety the speed limitation specified on the emer- notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section Y gency spare wheel. ( page 333).

Z 342 Emergency spare wheel

Stowing the emergency spare wheel ! Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture may get into the vehicle. Take the following steps to stow a used collapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, the collapsible spare wheel will not fit in the trunk in the intended manner. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve. Mount the collapsible spare wheel as described (Y page 333). X If possible, unscrew the valve insert from the valve and release the air. The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted before it is inflated. i Fully deflating the tires can take a few X ? minutes. Pull plug out of the housing. X Take the air hose out of the housing. X Screw the valve insert back into the valve. X Insert the yellow hose connector of the air X Screw the valve cap back on. hose into the guide in the housing and push X Pull the protective sheet provided with the it into the fixture until the hose connector spare wheel over the collapsible spare engages. wheel. X Remove the cap from the valve on the col- X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the lapsible spare wheel. emergency spare wheel well under the X Screw union nut : on the air hose onto the trunk. valve. X Use the retaining screw to pierce the pro- X Make sure the tire inflation compressor's tective sheet and fasten the collapsible Wheels and tires on/off switch A is set to OFF. spare wheel in place. X Insert plug ? into the socket of the cigarette lighter or into a 12 V power socket in Inflating the collapsible spare wheel your vehicle. Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter ! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using (Y page 260). Observe the notes on sock- the tire inflation compressor before lower- ets (Y page 261). ing the vehicle. The wheel rim could other- X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni- wise be damaged. tion lock (Y page 139). ! Do not operate the tire inflation compres- X Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation sor for longer than ten minutes at a time compressor to ON. without a break. It may otherwise overheat. The tire inflation compressor is switched The tire inflation compressor can be oper- on. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is ated again once it has cooled down. shown on pressure gauge =. X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure. The specified tire pressure is printed on the yellow label of the emergency spare wheel. Emergency spare wheel 343

X When the specified tire pressure has been reached, press on/off switch A to OFF, on the tire inflation compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched off. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X If the tire pressure is higher than the specified pressure, press pressure release button ; until the correct tire pressure has been reached. X Unscrew union nut : on the air hose from the valve. X Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsible spare wheel again.

Removing an air hose Wheels and tires X To remove the hose from the tire inflation compressor, push down the rocker switch on the hose connector and pull out the hose. X Stow plug ? and the air hose in the lower section of the blower housing. X Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehicle.

Z 344 Emergency spare wheel

Technical data All models

Collapsible spare wheel6 Tires Alloy wheels 145/70-17 92 P 4.5 B x 17 H2 Tire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi) Wheel offset: 0.47 in (12 mm)

Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels mounted, your vehicle may be equipped with TIREFIT or a collapsible spare wheel. i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel. d tires Wheels an

6 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains. 345

Useful information ...... 346 Information regarding technical data ...... 346 Identification plates ...... 346 Service products and filling capacities ...... 347 Vehicle data ...... 353 Technical data 346 Identification plates

Useful information

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Identification plates Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Vehicle identification plate with vehi- ; VIN cle identification number (VIN) = Paint code i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-

Technical data tion plate is used only as an example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle identification plate.

X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :. Service products and filling capacities 347

VIN Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out X Slide the front-passenger seat to its front of the reach of children. most position. X Fold trim : upwards. H Environmental note VIN ; can be seen. Dispose of service products in an environ- The VIN can also be found in the following mentally responsible manner. locations: Service products include the following: Ron the vehicle identification plate R (Y page 346) Fuels R Ron the lower edge of the windshield Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) (Y page 347) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindshield washer fluid Engine number RClimate control system refrigerant Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing, and disposing of service fluids. Technical data Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information about tested and approved products can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at : Emission control information plate, http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. including the certification of both federal You can recognize service products approved and Californian emissions standards by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip- ; Engine number (stamped into the crank- tion on the containers: case) RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Other designations or recommendations indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.

Z 348 Service products and filling capacities

MB 229.51). They have not necessarily been Model Of which approved by Mercedes-Benz. reserve All models Approx. Fuel 2.4 US gal (9.0 l) Important safety notes

G WARNING Gasoline Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel Fuel grade incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo- ! sion. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a You must avoid fire, open flames, creating gasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni- sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine tion if you accidentally refuel with the and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter refueling. the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the G WARNING fuel system and the engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop and have the fuel Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. tank and fuel lines drained completely. There is a risk of injury. ! You must make sure that fuel does not come Only refuel using unleaded premium into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing grade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/ and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel 95 RON. vapors. Keep fuel away from children. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- If you or others come into contact with fuel, ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to observe the following: engine failure. RWash away fuel from skin immediately ! Do not use the following: using soap and water. RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, RE100 (100% ethanol) Technical data immediately rinse them thoroughly with R clean water. Seek medical assistance with- M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) out delay. RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis- RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) tance without delay. Do not induce vomit- RM100 (100% methanol) ing. RGasoline with metalliferous additives R Immediately change out of clothing which RDiesel has come into contact with fuel. Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recommended for your vehicle. Do not use addi- Tank capacity tives. This can otherwise lead to engine damage. This does not include cleaning Model Total capa- additives for the removal and prevention of city residue build-up. gasoline may only be All models 18.5 US gal mixed with cleaning additives recommen- (70.0 l) ded by Mercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You can obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Service products and filling capacities 349

! To ensure the longevity and full perform- Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use ance of the engine, only premium-grade branded fuels that have additives. unleaded gasoline must be used. The quality of the fuel available in some coun- If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila- tries may not be sufficient. Residue could ble and you have to refuel with unleaded build up in the injection system as a result. In gasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol- such cases, and in consultation with an lowing precautions: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso- ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg- line may be mixed with the cleaning additive ular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest recommended by Mercedes-Benz. You must with premium-grade unleaded gasoline observe the notes and mixing ratios specified as soon as possible. on the container. RDo not drive at the maximum speed. RAvoid sudden acceleration and engine Engine oil speeds over 3,000 rpm. General notes Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gas- ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a oline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be used. specification other than is necessary to ful- You will usually find information about the fuel fill the prescribed service intervals. Do not grade on the pump. If you cannot find the change the engine oil or oil filter in order to label on the pump, ask the staff for assis- achieve longer replacement intervals than tance. those prescribed. You could otherwise i cause engine damage or damage to the For further information, consult a quali- exhaust gas aftertreatment. fied specialist workshop or visit Follow the instructions in the service inter- http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). val display regarding the oil change. Other- As a temporary measure, if the recommended wise, you may damage the engine and the fuel is not available, you may also use unlea- exhaust gas aftertreatment. ded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI/ When handling engine oil, observe the impor- 91 RON. This may reduce engine perform- tant safety notes on service products Technical data ance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid (Y page 347). driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration. Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI. The engine oils are matched to the performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service Information on refueling (Y page 158). intervals. You should therefore only use Additives in gasoline engine oils and oil filters that are approved for ! Operating the engine with fuel additives vehicles with maintenance systems. added later can lead to engine failure. Do For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen- not include additives for the removal and ter. Or visit the website prevention of residue buildup. gasoline http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. must only be mixed with additives recom- The table shows which engine oils have been mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply with approved for your vehicle. the instructions for use on the product label. More information about recommended additives can be obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Z 350 Service products and filling capacities

Model Engine MB this means that it is thick; a low viscosity model Approval means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification SLK 250 271 229.5 (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside SLK 350 276 229.5 temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low- SLK 55 AMG 152 229.5 temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore for AMG vehicles. strongly recommended that you carry out regular oil changes using an approved engine oil i MB approval is indicated on the oil con- with the appropriate SAE classification. tainers.

Filling capacities Brake fluid The following values refer to an oil change G WARNING including the oil filter. The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture Model Capacity from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake SLK 250 5.8 US qt (5.5 l) fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the SLK 350 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. SLK 55 AMG With external oil There is a risk of an accident. cooler: 10.0 US qt You should have the brake fluid renewed at (9.5 l) the specified intervals.

Additives When handling brake fluid, observe the important safety notes on service products ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. (Y page 347).

Technical data This could damage the engine. The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Engine oil viscosity Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and the replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.

Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, Service products and filling capacities 351

Coolant ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). Important safety notes The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra- G WARNING tion in the engine cooling system should: If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com- Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine ponents in the engine compartment, it may cooling system against freezing down to ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). Let the engine cool down before you add anti- Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the will not be dissipated as effectively. antifreeze from components before starting If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal the engine. amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ with the desired antifreeze protection. You corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord- could otherwise damage the engine. ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod- Further information on coolants can be ucts 310.1. found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications i for Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil- on the Internet at led with a coolant mixture that ensures http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con- adequate antifreeze and corrosion protec- tact a qualified specialist workshop. tion. i ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, The coolant is checked with every main- even in countries where high temperatures tenance interval at a qualified specialist prevail. workshop. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not Filling capacities sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. Missing values were not available at time of i Have the coolant regularly replaced at a going to print. Technical data qualified specialist workshop and the Model Capacity replacement confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. SLK 250 Approx. 10.1 US qt Comply with the important safety precautions (9.6 l) for service products when handling coolant SLK 350 Approx. 11.0 US qt (Y page 347). (10.4 l) The coolant is a mixture of water and anti- SLK 55 AMG freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the following tasks: i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 approved Rcorrosion protection antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. Rantifreeze protection Rraising the boiling point If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡(-37 †), the boiling point of the cool-

Z 352 Service products and filling capacities

Windshield washer system Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside temperature. Important safety notes RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB Win- G WARNING terFit to 2 parts water. Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if RDown to Ò4 ‡(Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Win- it comes into contact with hot engine compo- terFit to 1 part water. nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB fire and injury. WinterFit to 1 part water. Make sure that no windshield washer con- i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB centrate is spilled next to the filler neck. SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all year round. ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid Climate control system refrigerant could damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps. Important safety notes ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to The climate control system of your vehicle is the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the filled with refrigerant R‑134a. level sensor may be damaged. The instruction label regarding the refrigerant ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit type used can be found on the radiator cross washer fluid should be mixed together. The member. spray nozzles may otherwise become ! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG blocked. oil approved by Mercedes-Benz may be When handling washer fluid, observe the used. The approved PAG oil may not be important safety notes on service products mixed with any other PAG oil that is not (Y page 347). approved for R-134a refrigerant. Other- At temperatures above freezing: wise, the climate control system may be damaged.

Technical data X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. Service work, such as topping up refrigerant MB SummerFit. or replacing components, may only be carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts applicable regulations must be adhered to, water. SAE standard J639 included. At temperatures below freezing: Always have work on the climate control sys- X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture tem carried out at a qualified specialist work- of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter- shop. Fit. Vehicle data 353

Refrigerant instruction label Vehicle data General notes Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of: - tires - load - condition of the suspension - optional equipment Example: refrigerant instruction label Roptional equipment reduces the maximum : Warning symbol payload. ; Refrigerant filling capacity = Applicable standards ? PAG oil part number Dimensions and weights A Type of refrigerant Warning symbol : advises you about: Rpossible dangers Rhaving service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop

Filling capacities

Model Refrigerant AMG vehicles 22.2 ± 0.4 oz Model : Opening height (630 ± 10 g) Technical data All other models 19.4 ± 0.4 oz All models (70.7 in) (550 ± 10 g) (1796 mm)

Missing values were not available at time of Model PAG oil going to print. AMG vehicles 2.8 oz AMG vehicles (80 g) Vehicle length 163.2 in (4146 mm) All other models 4.2 oz (120 g) Vehicle length when opening/ closing the roof Vehicle width 79.0 in (2006 mm) including exterior mirrors

Z 354 Vehicle data

AMG vehicles Vehicle height 51.2 in (1301 mm) Vehicle height, when opening/ closing the roof Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm) Turning radius 34.6 ft (10.55 m) Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg) load

All other models Vehicle length 162.8 in (4134 mm) Vehicle length 170.2 in (4323 mm) when opening/ closing the roof Vehicle width 79.0 in (2006 mm) including exterior mirrors Vehicle height 51.3 in (1303 mm) Vehicle height, 61.5 in (1561 mm) when opening/ closing the roof

Technical data Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm) Turning radius 34.5 ft (10.52 m) Maximum trunk 220 lb (100 kg) load 355 356